PW 127H Maintenance Manual Chapter 72 01 PDF

PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MANUAL PART NO. 3045542
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE SECTION PAGE DATE
LEP 1 Jan 24/2006 409 Nov 04/2005
2 Jan 24/2006 410 Nov 04/2005
3 Jan 24/2006 411 Nov 04/2005
4 Jan 24/2006 412 Nov 04/2005
5 Jan 24/2006 413 Nov 04/2005
6 Jan 24/2006 414 Nov 04/2005
415 Nov 04/2005
Contents 1 Jan 24/2006 416 Nov 04/2005
2 Jan 24/2006 417 Nov 04/2005
3 Jan 24/2006 418 Nov 04/2005
4 Jan 24/2006 419 Nov 04/2005
5 Jan 24/2006 420 Nov 04/2005
6 Jan 24/2006 421 Nov 04/2005
7 Jan 24/2006 422 Nov 04/2005
8 Jan 24/2006 423 Nov 04/2005
9 Jan 24/2006 424 Nov 04/2005
10 Jan 24/2006 425 Nov 04/2005
11 Jan 24/2006 426 Nov 04/2005
12 Jan 24/2006 427 Nov 04/2005
13 Jan 24/2006 428 Nov 04/2005
14 Jan 24/2006 429 Nov 04/2005
15 Jan 24/2006 430 Nov 04/2005
16 Jan 24/2006 431 Nov 04/2005
17 Jan 24/2006 432 Nov 04/2005
18 Jan 24/2006
19 Jan 24/2006 72-01-10 601 Nov 09/2001
20 Jan 24/2006 Inspection 602 Nov 09/2001
21 Jan 24/2006 Check 603 Nov 09/2001
22 blank Jan 24/2006 604 Nov 09/2001
605 Nov 09/2001
72-01-00 1 Sep 03/99 606 Nov 09/2001
Introduction 2 blank Sep 03/99 607 Nov 09/2001
608 Nov 09/2001
72-01-10 401 Nov 04/2005 609 Nov 09/2001
Removal/ 402 Nov 04/2005 610 blank Nov 09/2001
Installation 403 Nov 04/2005
404 Nov 04/2005 72-01-10 701 May 02/2003
405 Nov 04/2005 Cleaning/ 702 May 02/2003
406 Nov 04/2005 Painting 703 May 02/2003
407 Nov 04/2005 704 May 02/2003
408 Nov 04/2005
Page 1
72-01 LEP Jan 24/2006
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
72-01-10 801 May 02/2003 72-01-30 401 Aug 13/2004
Approved 802 Sep 03/99 Removal/ 402 Jan 16/2004
Repairs 803 Sep 03/99 Installation 403 Jan 16/2004
804 blank Sep 03/99 404 Jan 16/2004
405 Jan 16/2004
72-01-20 401 Mar 09/2001 406 Jan 16/2004
Removal/ 402 Oct 18/2002 407 Jan 16/2004
Installation 403 Mar 09/2001 408 Jan 16/2004
404 Mar 09/2001 409 Jan 16/2004
405 Oct 18/2002 410 Jan 16/2004
406 Oct 18/2002 411 Jan 16/2004
407 Mar 09/2001 412 Jan 16/2004
408 Mar 09/2001 413 Jan 16/2004
408 A Oct 18/2002 414 Jan 16/2004
408 B blank Oct 18/2002 415 Jan 16/2004
409 Mar 09/2001 416 Jan 16/2004
410 Mar 09/2001 417 Jan 16/2004
411 Mar 09/2001 418 Jan 16/2004
412 blank Mar 09/2001 419 Jan 16/2004
420 Jan 16/2004
72-01-20 501 Nov 09/2001 421 Jan 16/2004
Adjustment/ 502 Nov 09/2001 422 Jan 16/2004
Test 423 Jan 16/2004
424 Jan 16/2004
72-01-20 601 Oct 18/2002 425 Jan 16/2004
Inspection 602 Oct 18/2002 426 Jan 16/2004
Check 603 Oct 18/2002 427 Jan 16/2004
604 Oct 18/2002 428 Jan 16/2004
605 Oct 18/2002
606 blank Oct 18/2002 72-01-30 501 Jul 07/2000
Adjustment/ 502 Jul 07/2000
72-01-20 701 Sep 03/99 Test 503 Jul 07/2000
Cleaning/ 702 Sep 03/99 504 blank Jul 07/2000
Painting
72-01-30 601 Jan 16/2004
72-01-20 801 Sep 03/99 Inspection 602 Jan 16/2004
Approved 802 Sep 03/99 Check
Repairs 803 Sep 03/99
804 Sep 03/99 72-01-30 701 Jan 16/2004
Cleaning/ 702 Jan 16/2004
Painting
Page 2
72-01 LEP Jan 24/2006
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
72-01-30 801 Sep 03/99 429 Nov 04/2005
Approved 802 Sep 03/99 430 Nov 04/2005
Repairs 431 Nov 04/2005
432 Nov 04/2005
72-01-40 301 Mar 03/2000 433 Nov 04/2005
Servicing 302 Mar 03/2000 434 Nov 04/2005
303 Mar 03/2000 435 Nov 04/2005
304 Mar 03/2000 436 Nov 04/2005
305 Mar 03/2000 437 Nov 04/2005
306 Mar 03/2000 438 Nov 04/2005
307 Mar 03/2000 439 Nov 04/2005
308 blank Mar 03/2000 440 Nov 04/2005
441 Nov 04/2005
72-01-40 401 Nov 04/2005 442 blank Nov 04/2005
Removal/ 402 Nov 04/2005
Installation 403 Nov 04/2005 72-01-40 501 Sep 03/99
404 Nov 04/2005 Adjustment/ 502 blank Sep 03/99
405 Nov 04/2005 Test
406 Nov 04/2005
407 Nov 04/2005 72-01-40 601 Mar 11/2005
408 Nov 04/2005 Inspection 602 Mar 11/2005
409 Nov 04/2005 Check 603 Mar 11/2005
410 Nov 04/2005 604 Mar 11/2005
411 Nov 04/2005 605 Mar 11/2005
412 Nov 04/2005 606 Mar 11/2005
413 Nov 04/2005 607 Mar 11/2005
414 Nov 04/2005 608 Mar 11/2005
415 Nov 04/2005 609 Mar 11/2005
416 Nov 04/2005 610 Mar 11/2005
417 Nov 04/2005 611 Mar 11/2005
418 Nov 04/2005 612 Mar 11/2005
419 Nov 04/2005 613 Mar 11/2005
420 Nov 04/2005 614 Mar 11/2005
421 Nov 04/2005 615 Mar 11/2005
422 Nov 04/2005 616 Mar 11/2005
423 Nov 04/2005 617 Mar 11/2005
424 Nov 04/2005 618 blank Mar 11/2005
425 Nov 04/2005
426 Nov 04/2005 72-01-40 701 Mar 11/2005
427 Nov 04/2005 Cleaning/ 702 Mar 11/2005
428 Nov 04/2005 Painting 703 Mar 11/2005
Page 3
72-01 LEP Jan 24/2006
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
704 Mar 11/2005 414 Nov 09/2001
705 Mar 11/2005 415 Nov 09/2001
706 Mar 11/2005 416 Nov 09/2001
707 Mar 11/2005 417 Nov 09/2001
708 Mar 11/2005 418 Nov 09/2001
709 Mar 11/2005 419 Aug 13/2004
710 Mar 11/2005 420 Nov 09/2001
421 Nov 09/2001
72-01-40 801 Mar 11/2005 422 Nov 09/2001
Approved 802 Mar 11/2005 423 Nov 09/2001
Repairs 803 Mar 11/2005 424 Nov 09/2001
804 Mar 11/2005 425 Nov 09/2001
805 Mar 11/2005 426 Nov 09/2001
806 Mar 11/2005 427 Nov 09/2001
807 Mar 11/2005 428 Nov 09/2001
808 Mar 11/2005 429 Nov 09/2001
809 Mar 11/2005 430 Nov 09/2001
810 Mar 11/2005 431 Nov 09/2001
811 Mar 11/2005 432 Nov 09/2001
812 Mar 11/2005 433 Nov 09/2001
434 Nov 09/2001
72-01-50 301 Mar 03/2000 435 Nov 09/2001
Servicing 302 Jul 13/2001 436 Nov 09/2001
303 Mar 03/2000 437 Nov 09/2001
304 Mar 03/2000 438 Nov 09/2001
305 Mar 03/2000 439 Nov 09/2001
306 blank Mar 03/2000 440 Nov 09/2001
441 Aug 13/2004
72-01-50 401 Nov 09/2001 442 Nov 09/2001
Removal/ 402 Nov 09/2001 443 Aug 13/2004
Installation 403 Nov 09/2001 444 Nov 09/2001
404 Nov 09/2001 445 Nov 09/2001
405 Nov 09/2001 446 Nov 09/2001
406 Nov 09/2001 447 Nov 09/2001
407 Nov 09/2001 448 Nov 09/2001
408 Nov 09/2001 449 Nov 09/2001
409 Nov 09/2001 450 Nov 09/2001
410 Nov 09/2001 451 Aug 13/2004
411 Nov 09/2001 452 Nov 09/2001
412 Nov 09/2001 453 Aug 13/2004
413 Nov 09/2001 454 Nov 09/2001
Page 4
72-01 LEP Jan 24/2006
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
455 Nov 09/2001 619 Jan 24/2006
456 Nov 09/2001 620 Jan 24/2006
457 Nov 09/2001 621 Jan 24/2006
458 Nov 09/2001 622 Jan 24/2006
459 Nov 09/2001 623 Jan 24/2006
460 Nov 09/2001 624 Jan 24/2006
461 Nov 09/2001 625 Jan 24/2006
462 Nov 09/2001 626 blank Jan 24/2006
463 Nov 09/2001
464 Nov 09/2001 72-01-50 701 Oct 20/2000
465 Nov 09/2001 Cleaning/ 702 Nov 09/2001
466 Nov 09/2001 Painting 703 Oct 20/2000
467 Nov 09/2001 704 Oct 20/2000
468 Nov 09/2001 705 Oct 20/2000
469 Nov 09/2001 706 Oct 20/2000
470 Nov 09/2001 707 Oct 20/2000
471 Nov 09/2001 708 Oct 20/2000
472 Nov 09/2001
72-01-50 801 Mar 11/2005
72-01-50 501 Oct 20/2000 Approved 802 Sep 03/99
Adjustment/ 502 blank Oct 20/2000 Repairs 803 Mar 11/2005
Test 804 Sep 03/99
805 Sep 03/99
72-01-50 601 Jan 24/2006 806 Sep 03/99
Inspection 602 Jan 24/2006 807 Sep 03/99
Check 603 Jan 24/2006 808 Sep 03/99
604 Jan 24/2006 809 Sep 03/99
605 Jan 24/2006 810 blank Sep 03/99
606 Jan 24/2006
607 Jan 24/2006 72-01-60 401 Mar 11/2005
608 Jan 24/2006 Removal/ 402 Mar 11/2005
609 Jan 24/2006 Installation 403 Oct 18/2002
610 Jan 24/2006 404 Oct 18/2002
611 Jan 24/2006 405 Oct 18/2002
612 Jan 24/2006 406 Oct 18/2002
613 Jan 24/2006 407 Mar 11/2005
614 Jan 24/2006 408 Mar 11/2005
615 Jan 24/2006 409 Oct 18/2002
616 Jan 24/2006 410 Oct 18/2002
617 Jan 24/2006 411 Oct 18/2002
618 Jan 24/2006 412 Oct 18/2002
Page 5
72-01 LEP Jan 24/2006
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER CHAPTER
413 Oct 18/2002
414 Oct 18/2002 72-01-60 801 Sep 03/99
415 Oct 18/2002 Approved 802 Sep 03/99
416 Oct 18/2002 Repairs 803 Sep 03/99
417 Oct 18/2002 804 Sep 03/99
418 Oct 18/2002 805 Sep 03/99
419 Oct 18/2002 806 blank Sep 03/99
420 Mar 11/2005
421 Mar 11/2005
422 Oct 18/2002
423 Oct 18/2002
424 Oct 18/2002
425 Oct 18/2002
426 Oct 18/2002
427 Oct 18/2002
428 Oct 18/2002
429 Oct 18/2002
430 Oct 18/2002
431 Oct 18/2002
432 Oct 18/2002
433 Oct 18/2002
434 Oct 18/2002
435 Oct 18/2002
436 blank Oct 18/2002
72-01-60 601 Mar 11/2005

Inspection 602 Mar 11/2005
Check 603 Mar 11/2005
604 Mar 11/2005
605 Mar 11/2005
606 Mar 11/2005
607 Mar 11/2005
608 Mar 11/2005
609 Mar 11/2005
610 Mar 11/2005
611 Mar 11/2005
612 Mar 11/2005
72-01-60 701 Sep 03/99

Cleaning/ 702 Sep 03/99
Painting
Page 6
72-01 LEP Jan 24/2006
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
EXTERNALS AND ACCESSORIES - INTRODUCTION 72-01-00

1. General 1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-01-10
1. General 401
2. Consumable Materials 401
3. Special Tools 402
4. Fixtures, Equipment and Supplier Tools 402

5. Electrical Wiring Harness 402
A. Removal 402
B. Installation 407
6. Electrical Wiring Harness (Instrument Services) 409
A. Removal 409
B. Installation 416
7. Electrical Wiring Harness (Instrument Services A) 417
A. Removal 417
B. Installation 422
8. Electronic Engine Control (EEC) 424
A. Removal 424
B. Installation 424
9. Autofeather Control Unit (AFU) and Brackets 429
A. Removal 429
B. Installation 429
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK 72-01-10
1. General 601
Page 1
72-01 CONTENTS Jan 24/2006
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-01-10

5. Inspection 601
A. General 601
6. Check 601
A. Electrical Wiring Harness 601
B. Characterization Plug (EEC) 601
C. Characterization Plug (AFU) 606
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING 72-01-10
1. General 701
5. Cleaning 702
A. General 702
B. Electronic Engine Control (EEC) and Autofeather Unit 702
C. Wiring Harness 702
D. Wiring Harness Connectors 703
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS 72-01-10
1. General 801
5. Repair 801
A. EEC Characterization Plug 801
Page 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
IGNITION SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-01-20

1. General 401
5. Igniters 402
A. Removal 402
B. Installation 402
6. Ignition Cables 403
A. Removal 403
B. Installation 403
7. Ignition Exciter(s) 405
A. Removal 405
B. Installation 408A
8. Ignition Exciter Mounting Plate 409
A. Removal 409
B. Installation 409
IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 72-01-20
1. General 501
5. Adjustment/Test 501
A. Ignition Exciters, Cables and Igniters (Operational Test) 501
IGNITION SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK 72-01-20
1. General 601
Page 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
IGNITION SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-01-20

5. Inspection 601
A. General 601
B. Igniter 601
C. Ignition Exciter 602
6. Check - Ignition Cable 602
A. Continuity Resistance Check 602
B. Insulation Resistance Check 602
C. Visual Check 602
IGNITION SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING 72-01-20
1. General 701
5. Cleaning 701
A. Ignition Exciter 701
B. Igniter 701
C. Ignition Cable 702
6. Painting 702
A. Procedure 702
IGNITION SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS 72-01-20
1. General 801
Page 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
IGNITION SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS (Cont’d) 72-01-20

5. Ignition Exciter 801
A. Procedure 801
6. Ignition Exciter Mounting Plate 802
A. Procedure 802
7. Igniter Cable - Braiding 802
A. Procedure 802
AIR SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-01-30
1. General 401
5. P3 and Overspeed Governor Pressure Sensing Tubes 402
A. Removal 402
B. Installation 402
6. Inlet Air Pressure Sensing Tube 403
A. Removal 403
B. Installation 403
7. No. 3 and 4 Bearing Cavity Pressure Sensing Tube 405
A. Removal 405
B. Installation 405
8. P3 Bleed Air Boss Insulation 407
A. Removal 407
B. Installation 407
Page 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
AIR SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-30
9. Switching Valve-to-rear Inlet Case Sealing Air Tube 407

A. Removal 407
B. Installation 407
10. Oil Check Valve Air Pressure Tube 409
A. Removal 409
B. Installation 409
11. Bleed Valve Air Supply Tube Assembly 411
A. Removal 411
B. Installation 411
12. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Assembly (IBV) 411
A. Removal 411
B. Installation 413
13. Intercompressor Bleed Valve (IBV) Servo Valve 413
A. Removal 413
B. Installation 413
14. Intercompressor Bleed Valve (IBV) Servo Valve Screen 415
A. Removal 415
B. Installation 415
15. P2.5 Check Valve Assembly 417
A. Removal 417
B. Installation 417
16. Intercompressor Case (ICC) Transfer Tube . 417
A. Removal 417
B. Installation 419
Page 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
AIR SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 72-01-30

1. General 501
A. Servo Valve Torque Motor 501

B. Intercompressor Bleed Valve (IBV) 501
AIR SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK 72-01-30
1. General 601
5. Inspection 601
A. General 601
B. Intercompressor Bleed Valve 601
C. Intercompressor Case Transfer Tube 601
6. Check 602
A. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Torque Motor 602
AIR SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING 72-01-30
1. General 701
5. Cleaning 701
A. General 701
Page 7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
AIR SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING (Cont’d) 72-01-30
B. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Servo Valve Screen 702

C. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Metering Plug 702
D. Intercompressor Case Cavity and Transfer Tube. 702
AIR SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS 72-01-30
1. General 801
5. Approved Repairs 801
A. Tubes 801
B. Housings 802
FUEL SYSTEM - SERVICING 72-01-40
1. General 301
5. Fuel Heater Inlet Filter 301
A. Removal 303
B. Installation 303
6. Fuel Pump Outlet Filter 304
A. Removal 304
B. Installation 304
7. Fuel Pump Inlet Screen 304
A. Removal 304
B. Installation 304
Page 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
FUEL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-01-40

1. General 401
5. Mechanical Fuel Control (MFC) and Fuel Pump Assembly 403
A. Removal 403
B. Disassembly 403
C. Assembly 405
D. Installation 407
6. Power Fuel Control and Condition Fuel Control Arms 411
A. Rigging 411
7. Fuel Tube Assemblies 413
A. MFCU-to-Oil Cooler Fuel Tube Assemblies 413
B. Oil Cooler to Dump Valve Fuel Tube Assemblies 413
8. Fuel Drain Valves 416
A. Removal 416
B. Installation 416
9. Flow Divider and Dump Valve 417
A. Removal 417
B. Installation 419
10. Fuel Manifold and Adapters 422
A. Removal 422
B. Installation (Post-SB21705) 428
11. Fuel Pump Pressure Differential Switch 430
A. Removal 430
Page 9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
FUEL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-40
B. Installation 431
12. Fuel Heater 431
A. Removal 431
B. Installation 433
13. Fuel Waste Tubes, Motive Flow Pressure Fuel Tube Assembly and
MFCU and Fuel Pump Drain Tubes and Fuel Waste Ejector
Assembly 436
A. Fuel Waste Ejector Tube and Motive Fuel Flow Ejector Tube 436
B. Motive Flow Pressure Fuel Tube Assembly 437

C. Fuel Waste Ejector Assembly 437
FUEL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 72-01-40
1. General 501
5. Leak Test 501
A. Mechanical Fuel Control Unit, Fuel Pump, Oil to Fuel Heater,
Flow Divider and Dump Valve, Fuel Lines and Fuel Manifold.. 501
FUEL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK 72-01-40
1. General 601

5. Inspection/Check 602
A. General 602
B. Fuel Filters and Screen 602
Page 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
FUEL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-01-40
C. Fuel Heater Filter 605

D. Fuel Heater Housing and Impending Bypass Switch 605
E. Fuel Pump Pressure Differential Switch 605
F. Drain Valve 606
G. Mechanical Fuel Control to Fuel Pump Coupling 606
H. Transfer Tubes 606
I. Mechanical Fuel Control Unit Electrical Circuits 606
J. Fuel Nozzle Sampling Program 607
K. Fuel Manifold Adapters 612
L. Flexible Fuel Manifold Hose 612
FUEL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING 72-01-40
1. General 701
5. Cleaning 702
A. General 702
B. Fuel Filters 702
C. Fuel Pump Inlet Screen 706
D. Flexible Fuel Manifold Hose 707
6. In-Situ Fuel Nozzle Adapter Washing (Optional) 707
A. General 707
B. Equipment Required 709
C. Fuel Nozzle Adapter Wash Procedure 709
Page 11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
FUEL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING (Cont’d) 72-01-40
7. Painting 710
A. Fuel Heater Insulating Coating 710
FUEL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS 72-01-40
1. General 801
A. Tubes 802
B. Super B Nut Replacement 802
C. Flexible Fuel Manifold Hose 802
D. Housings 803
E. Fuel Heater Thermal Element 805
F. Fuel Pump Adapter 807
OIL SYSTEM - SERVICING 72-01-50
1. General 301
5. Pressure Oil Filter 301
A. Removal 301
B. Installation 303
6. Reduction Gearbox (RGB) Scavenge Oil Filter 303
A. Removal 303
B. Installation 305
Page 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
OIL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-01-50

1. General 401
5. Main Oil Tank Chip Collector , Strainer and Associated Parts 402
A. Removal 402
B. Installation 403
6. RGB Chip Detector, Strainer and Associated Parts 405
A. Removal 405
B. Installation 407
7. Oil Pressure Differential Switches (Pressure and Scavenge) 408
A. Removal 408
B. Installation 408
8. Oil Pressure Regulating Valve 408
A. Removal 408
B. Disassembly 409
C. Assembly 409
D. Installation 411
9. Pressure Oil Check Valve 413
A. Removal 413
B. Installation 417
10. Filter Bypass and Relief Valve 419
A. Removal 419
B. Installation 419
Page 13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
OIL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-50
11. Oil Cooler and Heat Exchange Adapters 421

A. Removal 421
B. Installation 421
12. Oil Pressure Tubes 421
A. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Oil Pressure Tubes 421
B. No. 3, 4 and 5 Bearing Oil Pressure Tube 426
C. No. 1 and 2 Bearing Oil Pressure Tube Assembly 427
D. Fuel Heater to Fuel-cooled Oil Cooler Oil Tube Assembly 428
E. Fuel-cooled Oil Cooler to RGB Oil Tube Assembly 429
F. Rear Inlet Case Oil Pressure Tube 431
G. Low and Main Oil Pressure Sensing Tube Assemblies 431
13. Oil Scavenge Tubes 435
A. No. 3, 4 and 5 Bearing Oil Scavenge Tubes 435
B. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Oil Scavenge Tubes 437
C. Reduction Gearbox Oil Scavenge Tube 439
14. Bearing Vent Tubes 441
A. No. 5 Bearing Vent Tube 441
B. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Vent Tube 443
15. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Pressure, Vent and Scavenge Transfer Tubes 445
A. Removal 445
B. Installation 447
16. Oil Filler Cap, Neck and Tube Valve 449
A. Removal 449
B. Installation 449
Page 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
OIL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-50
17. Oil Level Indicator 451

A. Removal 451
B. Installation 453
18. Oil Pump Pressure Relief Valve Assembly 454
A. Removal 454
B. Installation 454
19. Reduction Gearbox Scavenge Oil Pump 454
A. Removal 454
B. Disassembly 455
C. Assembly 455
D. Installation 455
20. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Scavenge Oil Pump/Pressure Oil Pump 457
A. Removal 457
B. Disassembly 457
C. Assembly 457
D. Installation 459
21. Fuel-cooled Oil Cooler and Bracket Assembly 459
A. Removal 459
B. Installation 461
22. Accessory Gearbox Breather Tube Assembly 463
A. Removal 463
B. Installation 463
23. Intercompressor Case Oil Drain 465
A. Removal 465
B. Installation 465
Page 15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
OIL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 72-01-50

1. General 501
A. Oil System Components and Lines - Leak Check 501

B. Chip Detectors - Leak Check 501
OIL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK 72-01-50
1. General 601
5. Inspection 602
A. General 602
B. Oil Filters, Strainers and Screen Assembly 602
C. Transfer Tube 605
D. Oil Pump Housings and Cover Plates 605
E. Oil Filler and Check Valve (Post-SB21150) 605
F. Spur Gears 605
G. Idler and Driveshafts 607
H. Patch-making Procedure and Chip Detector Debris Transfer 607
I. Chip Detector Circuit Completion, Debris on Oil Filters and/or
Filter Impending Bypass Warnings 609
J. Determination of the Category for Debris 611
K. Debris originating from the Turbomachinery Module 612
Page 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
OIL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-01-50
L. Debris originating from the Reduction Gearbox Module 616

M. Laboratory Analyzed Debris (filter patch and chip detector) 619
N. Intercompressor Case P2.5 Cavity Inspection 622
6. Check 623
A. Chip Detector 623
B. Spring Compression 624
C. Oil Filler Cap (Pre-SB21720, Post-SB21720). 624
D. Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Elbow 625
E. Drain Valve 625
OIL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING 72-01-50
1. General 701
5. Cleaning 702
A. General 702
B. Oil Filter Elements 702
C. Strainers and Pump Inlet Screen 706
D. Carbon Removal 707
E. Oil Indicator Sight Glass 707
6. Painting 708
A. Procedure 708
OIL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS 72-01-50
1. General 801
Page 17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
OIL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS (Cont’d) 72-01-50

A. Tubes 802
B. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Oil Pressure, Vent and Scavenge Tubes
Super B Nut Replacement 802
C. Air Inlet-to-Scavenge Pump Oil Transfer Tube Seal
Replacement 802
D. Housings and Cover Plates 802

E. Valves 803
F. Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Tee Restrictor Replacement 803
PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-01-60
1. General 401
5. Negative and Positive Bus-bars 402
A. Removal 402
B. Installation 402
6. T6 Thermocouples 406
A. Removal 406
B. Installation 407
7. T6 Thermocouple Rear Electrical Cable 409
A. Removal 409
B. Installation 409
Page 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM -

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-60
8. NL Speed Sensor Probe 409

A. Removal 409
B. Installation 411
9. NL Sensor Port Sealing Tube 413
A. Removal 413
B. Installation 414
10. T6 Thermocouple Trim Harness 414
A. Removal 414
B. Installation 414
11. NH Speed Sensor Probes (No. 1 and 2) 415
A. Removal 415
B. Installation 415
12. No. 1 and 2 Torque Monitor Sensors 419
A. Removal 419
B. Installation 419
13. T1.8 Sensor 423
A. Removal 423
B. Installation 423
14. NP Speed Sensor Probe 425
A. Removal 425
B. Installation 427
15. Low and Main Oil Pressure Sensors 428
A. Removal 428
B. Installation 428
Page 19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-60
16. Fuel Temperature Sensor 428

A. Removal 428
B. Installation 429
17. Oil Temperature Sensor 431
A. Removal 431
B. Installation 431
PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK 72-01-60
1. General 601
5. Inspection 601
A. Procedure 601
6. Check 601
A. Temperature Sensing System 601
B. NL Speed Sensor Probe 609
C. Torque Sensors 609

D. T1.8 Sensor 609
E. Speed Sensor Probes (NH or NP) 610
F. Main Pressure Oil Sensor 611
G. Fuel and Oil Temperature Sensor 611
H. Low Pressure Oil Switch 612
PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING 72-01-60
1. General 701
Page 20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE

CLEANING/PAINTING (Cont’d) 72-01-60

5. Cleaning 701
A. General 701
B. Thermocouple Wiring Harness 701
C. T6 Thermocouple 702
PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS 72-01-60
1. General 801
5. Thermocouple Wiring Harness 801
A. Procedure 801
6. Thermocouple Harness Terminal Assembly 803
A. Procedure 803
7. T1.8 Sensor 803

A. Procedure 803
Page 21/22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERNALS AND ACCESSORIES - INTRODUCTION
1. General
Chapters 72-01-10 through 72-01-60 contain maintenance instructions for the engine
external accessories:
72-01-10 Electrical System
72-01-20 Ignition System
72-01-30 Air System
72-01-40 Fuel System
72-01-50 Oil System
72-01-60 Performance Indicating System
72-01-00 Page 1/2

EXTERNALS AND ACCESSORIES - INTRODUCTION Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
A. These instructions provide information necessary for replacement of components of the

engine electrical system.
B. Refer to 72-00-00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES, for installation of elbows and tees.
C. Lubricate packings with engine oil (PWC03-001), unless otherwise stated.
D. Use 1 ml of alcohol (PWC11-014) with 15 ml of electrical contact enhancer (PWC05-256)

and mix thoroughly.
WARNING: WEAR GOGGLES WHEN REMOVING/INSTALLING LOCKWIRE.

WARNING: GLOVES MUST BE WORN TO PROTECT SKIN WHEN DECONTAMINATING
AREAS CONTAINING GASKETS OR PACKINGS WHICH HAVE
DECOMPOSED DUE TO HIGH TEMPERATURES. HYDROFLUORIC ACID IS
PRODUCED WHEN THE MATERIAL DECOMPOSES. MEDICAL
TREATMENT IS REQUIRED AS SOON AS POSSIBLE IF THE ACID
TOUCHES BARE SKIN.
CAUTION: TO ENSURE COMPATIBILITY WITH ASSOCIATED SERVICEABLE
COMPONENTS, NEW COMPONENTS MUST BE FULLY INTERCHANGEABLE
WITH THOSE REPLACED.
NOTE: When installing wiring harness, make sure connectors and receptacles are dry;
use heat gun as necessary.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE YOU SELECT PROPER CLAMP CLASS WHEN INSTALLING
WIRING HARNESS TO ENSURE HARNESS IS NOT LOOSE IN CLAMP.
NOTE: Refer to Inspection/Check for schematic diagram of wiring harness.
2. Consumable Materials
The consumable materials listed below are referred to in this section. For more data, refer to
the CONSUMABLE MATERIALS section at the beginning of this manual.
WARNING: READ THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS BEFORE YOU USE THESE
MATERIALS. SOME MATERIALS CAN BE DANGEROUS.
Item No. Name
PWC03-001 Oil, Engine
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC05-105 Tape, Insulating
PWC05-256 Enhancer, Electrical Contact
PWC05-273 Sleeve, Shrink, Self-adhesive
PWC05-295 Lockwire (May be used instead of PW05-089)
PWC06-007 Coating, Film Lubricant
72-01-10 Page 401

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Nov 04/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item No. Name

PWC11-014 Alcohol, Isopropyl
3. Special Tools
Special tools are identified in procedural text by part number in parentheses.
Tool No. Name

PWC58104 Wrench
4. Fixtures, Equipment and Supplier Tools
The fixtures, equipment and supplier tools listed below are referred to in procedural text.
Name
Heat Gun - Thermofit Minigun (with reflector)
Pliers, Soft-jaw - Glenair TG69
Wrench, Mini-strap - Glenair TG70
5. Electrical Wiring Harness (Ref. Fig. 401)
A. Removal
WARNING: ENSURE AIRFRAME ELECTRICAL POWER IS OFF WHEN

DISCONNECTING CONNECTORS FROM RECEPTACLES.
(1) If installed, remove insulating tape (PWC05-105) (Post-SB21004) or harness sleeve
(PWC05-273) (Post-SB21269) and disconnect connectors at the following locations:
v Airframe wiring harness at the J11 receptacle.

v P1, EEC top.
v P2, EEC bottom.
v P4, T1.8 sensor.
v P5, NH sensor No. 2.
v P7, torque sensor No. 2.
v P8, MFCU.
v P9, NP sensor.
v P10, bleed valve torque motor
v P14, NH sensor No. 1.
(2) Remove integral drive generator (IDG) (Ref. AMM).
(3) Remove EEC (Ref. Para. 8.).
(4) Remove bolts (1) at bracket (23), washers (2) and wiring harness connector.
72-01-10 Page 402

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
TO
P33
9 4
16 17 16
17
3 8
P5 3
3
6
16 17 31 TO
4 19 5 10 P10
P8
5
4 31
15
20 3 5
15 5
TO
MASTER P14
KEYWAY P4 3
LOCATION 1
2 20
19 25 27 19 J11
29 30 5
28 P1 21
5 13
14
3
3
3 TO
P7 23 21
TO 26 24
P9 13
7
21
5
P2
22
C62642B
Electrical Wiring Harness - Removal/Installation
Figure 401 (Sheet 1 of 3)
72-01-10 Page 403

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Bolt (MS9527-04)
2. Washer (MS9549-07)
3. Nut
4. Bolt (MS9208-05)
5. Bolt (MS9208-06)
6. Bolt (MS9208-07)
7. Bolt (MS9208-13)
8. Bolt (MS9208-17)
9. Bolt (MS9208-08)
10. Spacer (3105512-06)
11. Spacer (3111826-01)
12. Washer (MS9549-09)
13. Spacer (3108991-01)
14. Tie Wrap
15. Clamp Assembly (ST1478-04 or -05)
16. Clamp (3030367)
17. Grommet (ST3023-04)
18. Grommet (ST3023-03)
19. Clamp Assembly (ST1478-05, -06, -07)
22. Electrical Wiring Harness Assembly
23. Bracket (3049877)
24. Bolt (MS9556-08)
25. Bolt (MS9556-06)
26. IDG Support Bracket (3055035-01)
27. Nut
28. Bolt (MS9556-12)
29. Plate
30. IDG Support Block
31. Clamp Assembly (ST1478-05, or -06)
32. Bracket (MS9592-054)
33. Bolt (MS9556-17)
34. Bolt (MS9208-17) (Post-SB21687)
35. Bracket (MS9592-374) (Post-SB21687)
72-01-10 Page 404

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
18 35 TO
16 3 P5
3 P10 FW
8
D
5 10
3
18
16 18
16 5
32
P10
10
5 16 3
34
3 3 5 3
10 5
16 18 10
16 18
16 18
VIEW A
3
(POST − SB21687)
5 8
16 18
16 18
4
15 16 5
A 3
3
18
P4 3
P14
33
TO FW
P24 D
31
10 12
C62644B
Figure 401 (Sheet 2)
72-01-10 Page 405

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P7
3
15
12
11
15
8
15
4
4
P9
VIEW A 4
4
15 15
15
3
15
15
3
4
4
3 15
3
A TO P7
C63979
72-01-10 Page 406

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Remove nuts (3, 27), bolts (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 24, 25, 33) and (34) (Post-SB21687),
bracket assembly (26), bracket (32) and (35) (Post-SB21687), spacers (9, 10,
11, 13), washers (12), tie wrap (14) and wiring harness assembly (22).
(6) Remove clamp assemblies (15, 19, 20, 21, 31), clamps (16) and grommets (17, 18)
from wiring harness assembly (22).
(7) If required, remove nuts (27), bolts (28), plate (29) and IDG support block (30).
B. Installation
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CHAFING/RUBBING, ENSURE WIRING HARNESS DOES NOT

TOUCH ADJACENT COMPONENTS. MINIMUM CLEARANCE IS 0.125 IN.
(3.175 mm).
NOTE: 1. Unless otherwise stated, torque all nuts/bolts in the following procedural steps
36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: 2. Before connecting plugs, install harness sleeves (PWC05-273) (Post-SB21269)

over plugs.
(1) If required, assemble and install bracket assembly (26) as follows:
(a) Install bolts (28), IDG support block (30), plate (29) and nuts (27). Torque nuts
36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(b) Install brackets (23, 26) and bolts (24). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(2) Clean and dry connectors (Ref. Cleaning/Painting).
(3) Use of electrical contact enhancer (PWC05-256) is optional. If used, apply as

follows:
(a) Prior to installing harness connectors, put a drop of the diluted (Ref. Para. 1.D.)
electrical contact enhancer (PWC05-256) on each connector pin.
NOTE: Let the liquid flow downward on each pin to make a thin film.
(4) Install wiring harness assembly (22), secure to bracket (23) with bolts (1) and
washers (2). Torque bolts 10 to 12 lb.in. (1.13-1.36 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
NOTE: Master keyway must be at 12 o’clock position as shown.
(5) Install grommets (17, 18), clamps (16) and clamp assemblies (15, 19, 20, 21, 31)
on wiring harness assembly (22).
72-01-10 Page 407

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Install bracket (32) and (35) (Post-SB21687), bolts (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 25, 33) and (34)
(Post-SB21687), spacers (9, 10, 11, 13), washers (12), nuts (3, 27) and tie wrap
(14). Torque 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.57 Nm).
NOTE: Where applicable include clamp assembly of characterization plug lanyard,

fuel waste ejector tube and electrical wiring harness (instrument services).
WARNING: ENSURE AIRFRAME ELECTRICAL POWER IS OFF WHEN CONNECTING

RECEPTACLES AND CONNECTORS.
CAUTION: ENSURE CONNECTORS AND RECEPTACLES ARE FREE FROM
MOISTURE. IF NECESSARY, DRY USING HEAT GUN.
CAUTION: DO NOT FORCE OR STRETCH HARNESS WHEN INSTALLING
CONNECTORS OR SECURING CLAMP OR CLAMP ASSEMBLIES.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TORQUE WRENCH OR PLIERS TO TIGHTEN P7
CONNECTION.
CAUTION: ENSURE P4 AND P14 CONNECTORS ARE INSTALLED ON THE
CORRECT SENSOR (T1.8 AND NH NO. 1, RESPECTIVELY).
(7) Install connector P7 at torque sensor No. 2, rotating it by hand 1/4 turn clockwise
until a click is heard which indicates the connector is in the locked position. Do not
use a torque wrench or pliers to apply torque.

CAUTION: ENSURE P4 AND P14 CONNECTORS ARE INSTALLED ON THE
CORRECT SENSOR (T1.8 AND NH NO. 1, RESPECTIVELY).
(8) Install connectors P4, P14, P5, P8, P10, and P9 at T1.8 sensor, NH No. 1 sensor,
NH No. 2 sensor, MFCU, IBV servo valve and NP speed sensor respectively.
Tighten each connector nut by hand until witness band(s) on mating receptacle is/are
covered. It is recommended to further torque connector coupling nuts, using one
of the following methods:
CAUTION: DO NOT USE STEEL-JAWED PLIERS TO TIGHTEN CONNECTORS.

(a) Method 1, Mini-strap Wrench (PWC58104) or (Glenair TG70)
1 Using mini-strap wrench (PWC58104) or (Glenair TG70), apply reasonable

force to ensure connector coupling nut is firmly tightened and metal-to-metal
bottoming of connector is achieved.
NOTE: Mini-strap wrench has a design slip torque of 100 lb.in. (11.3 Nm).
72-01-10 Page 408

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Method 2, Soft-jawed Pliers (Glenair TG69)
1 Using soft-jawed pliers (Glenair TG69), apply reasonable force to ensure

connector coupling nut is firmly tightened and metal-to-metal bottoming of
connector is achieved.
NOTE: Soft-jawed pliers have a design slip torque of 100 lb.in. (11.3 Nm).
(9) Install EEC and connect P1 and P2 (Ref. Para. 8.).
(10) Use of insulating tape (PWC05-105) (Post-SB21004) (to wrap the connector joints)
is optional (Ref. Fig. 402).
(11) If sleeves (PWC05-273) (Post-SB21269) are installed, use heat gun to heat-shrink
them over the plugs. Connector joints to be covered as shown on Figure 402.
(12) Install integral drive generator (IDG) (Ref. AMM).
(13) Connect airframe wiring harness at J11 receptacle (Ref. AMM).
6. Electrical Wiring Harness (Instrument Services) (Ref. Fig. 403)
A. Removal

DISCONNECTING PLUGS FROM RECEPTACLES.
v P20, Aircraft connector.

v P24, Ignition exciters.
v P25, Low oil pressure switch.
(2) Remove nuts (21) and disconnect harness leads (22) from terminal block (23).
(3) Remove clamps (13, 15, 16, 17, 19) and grommets (14, 18, 20).
(4) Remove nuts (5), washer (11), spacers (12), bolts (6, 7, 8, 9, 10) and (25)
(Post-SB21687), bracket (24) (Post-SB21687) and harness (1).
72-01-10 Page 409

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAPE / SLEEVE
COVERAGE ZONE
0.500 IN.
MIN.
(12.7 mm)
TYPICAL VIEW OF STRAIGHT CONNECTOR
0.250 IN.
MIN.
(6.35 mm)
TAPE / SLEEVE
COVERAGE ZONE
TYPICAL VIEW OF 90 DEGREE CONNECTOR
C26248A
Protective Tape/Heat Shrink - Installation Zone
72-01-10 Page 410

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAPE / SLEEVE
0.500 IN. COVERAGE ZONE
(12.7 mm)
MIN.
0.250 IN. MIN.

(6.35 mm)
C62304A
Protective Tape/Heat Shrink - Installation Zone
72-01-10 Page 411

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P20
12 10 13 14
8
13 14 16 1
13 14
P21
8
A
5
TO P24
8
8
13 17
13 17
8
9
24
13 17
25
18 19
13 17
7
1 VIEW A
(POST−SB21687)
L.H. SIDE
P25 P27
C62643C
Electrical Wiring Harness (Instrument Services) - Removal/Installation
72-01-10 Page 412

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 403
1. Harness
2. Nut
3. Nut
4. DELETED
5. Nut
6. DELETED
7. Bolt (MS9556-06)
8. Bolt (MS9208-06)
9. Bolt (MS9208-07)
10. Bolt (MS9556-17)
11. Washer (MS9549-09)
12. Spacer (3105512-06)
13. Clamp (3030367)
14. Grommet (ST3023-03)
15. Clamp (ST1478-04, ST1478-05)
16. Clamp (ST1478-06)
17. Clamp (ST1478-05, ST1478-06)
18. Grommet (ST3023-04)
19. Clamp (MS9391-05)
20. Grommet (MS9393-03)
21. Nut
22. Harness Lead
23. Terminal Block
24. Bracket (MS9592-374) (Post-SB21687)
25. Bolt (MS9208-07) (Post-SB21687)
72-01-10 Page 413

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO P20
K
J H
G
TO P25
F
VIEW LOOKING FWD
E
TO T6
TERMINAL
BLOCK
B
A TO P24
P24 − 1 P24 − 2
D
P4 & P14
7 RIGHT HAND SIDE
19 10 TEMPERATURE
12 19 INDICATING
SYSTEM CABLE
5
15
5
11
DETAIL B
DETAIL A
8
5
P33 P5
8
P5 DETAIL D 10
8
5
7 P5 8
15 12
8
15 15 DETAIL G P10
DETAIL E 16
5
13 13
5
14
DETAIL K
14
DETAIL F DETAIL H DETAIL J
C63499A
72-01-10 Page 414

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T6 THERMOCOUPLE TRIM
ELECTRICAL CABLE
SEE 72−01−60
TO P20
E F
C D
TO P24
1
B
A
22
21
TO P33
23
13 14
13 14 13 14
DETAIL A DETAIL B DETAIL C
13 14 13 14
13 14
DETAIL D DETAIL E DETAIL F
C79822
72-01-10 Page 415

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation

(3.175 mm).
36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: 2. When installing clamp assemblies, select size to suit harness diameter.
NOTE: 3. Post-SB21269: before connecting plugs, install harness sleeves (PWC05-273)

over plugs.
NOTE: 4. Ensure plugs are clean and dry. If necessary, clean plugs using isopropyl
alcohol (PWC11-014) or caeon (PWC11-008). Dry the plugs with nitrogen
(PWC05-050) or a heat gun.
(1) Install grommets (14, 18, 20) and clamps (13, 15, 16, 17, 19) on harness (1).
(2) Install harness leads (22) on terminal block (23).
(3) Install bolts (6, 7, 8, 9, 10) and (25) (Post-SB21687), bracket (24) (Post-SB21687),
washer (11), spacers (12), nuts (21) and nuts (5). Torque nuts (21) to 24 to
40 lbf.in. (2.71 - 4.52 Nm). Torque all bolts and nuts (5) to 36 to 40 lbf-in. (4.07 -
4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Clamps for adjacent wiring harness should also be secured.

follows:
(6) Connect chromel and alumel leads to T6 terminal block with nuts (2, 3), respectively.
Torque nut (2) 20 to 25 lb.in. (2.26-2.83 Nm) and nut (3) 25 to 30 lb.in.
(2.82-3.39 Nm).
NOTE: Angle of leads as shown.
72-01-10 Page 416

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(7) Install connectors P24, P25 and P20 at ignition exciters, low oil pressure switch and
firewall connector, respectively. Tighten connector coupling nut by hand until
witness band(s) on mating receptacle is/are covered. It is recommended connector
coupling nuts are further torqued using one of the following methods:


(b) Method 2, Soft-jawed pliers (Glenair TG69)

(8) Post-SB21004: use of insulating tape (PWC05-105) (to wrap the connector joints) is
optional (Ref. Fig. 402).
(9) Post-SB21269: use heat gun to heat-shrink harness sleeves over plugs. Connector
joints to be covered as shown on Figure 402.
7. Electrical Wiring Harness (Instrument Services A) (Ref. Fig. 404)
A. Removal

DISCONNECTING CONNECTORS FROM RECEPTACLES.

v P27, Engine oil pressure switch.
v P32, Oil temperature sensor.
v P33, NL sensor
72-01-10 Page 417

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P36 A SEE SH. 2

7
1 5
5 9 10
P21
TO P20
11
3
TO P33
P37
8
5 5
9 12
11 3
P35 9 12
3
5
P32
4 9 10
6
13 14
15
13 14
P25 P27
15
C63502B
Electrical Wiring Harness (Instrument Services A) - Removal/Installation
72-01-10 Page 418

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 404
1. Harness
2. Tie Wrap
3. Nut
4. Bolt (MS9556-05)
5. Bolt (MS9208-06)
6. Bolt (MS9208-07)
7. Bolt (MS9208-17)
8. Spacer (3105512-06)
9. Clamp (3030367)
10. Grommet (ST3023-03)
11. Clamp (ST1478-05, ST1478-06)
12. Grommet (ST3023-05)
13. Clamp (MS9391-05)
14. Grommet (MS9393-03)
15. Bolt (MS9556-06)
72-01-10 Page 419

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9 10
9 10
TO P5
TO P24
3
VIEW A
C79647
72-01-10 Page 420

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T6 HARNESS
H 3
5
5
P24
9
DETAIL H 10 3 9
10
DETAIL G
G
3
10
F DIM. AB 9
5
E
FWD
P33 DETAIL F
AC D SECTION AC−AC
3
3 10
C
9 5
AC 5
9
DETAIL D 10
DETAIL E
A
B
6
5 9
10 5
9
9
3 10
10 3
3
DETAIL A DETAIL B DETAIL C
C63503A
72-01-10 Page 421

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
v P35, Low pressure fuel filter impending bypass switch.

v P36, High pressure fuel filter impending bypass switch.
v P37, Fuel temperature sensor.
(2) Remove nuts (3), spacer (8), bolts (4, 5, 6, 7, 15) and harness (1).
(3) Remove clamps (9, 11, 13) and grommets (10, 12, 14) from harness.
B. Installation

CAUTION: ENSURE CONNECTORS AND RECEPTACLES ARE FREE FROM MOISTURE.
IF NECESSARY, DRY USING HEAT GUN.
(3.175 mm).
36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: 2. When installing clamps (ST1478), select size to suit harness diameter.
NOTE: 3. Post-SB21269: before connecting plugs, install harness sleeves (PWC05-273)

over plugs.
NOTE: 4. Ensure plugs are clean and dry. If necessary, clean plugs using isopropyl
alcohol (PWC11-014) or caeon (PWC11-008). Dry the plugs with nitrogen
(PWC05-050) or a heat gun.

follows:
(3) Install harness (1).
(4) Connect plugs at the following locations:

v P27, Engine oil pressure transmitter.
72-01-10 Page 422

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
v P32, Oil temperature sensor.

v P33 NL sensor.
v P35, Low pressure fuel filter impending bypass switch.
v P36, High pressure fuel filter impending bypass switch.
v P37, Fuel temperature sensor.
NOTE: Ensure connection is fully coupled. Locking indicator must be within

orange band.
(5) Install grommets (10, 12, 14) and clamps (9, 11, 13) on harness
(6) Install bolts (4, 5, 6, 7, 15), spacer (8) and nuts (3). Torque bolts.
NOTE: 1. Clamps of the adjacent wiring harnesses must also be secured.
NOTE: 2. Ensure dimension AB is between 5.900 and 6.100 in. (149.86-154.94 mm).
(7) Tighten each connector coupling nut by hand until witness band(s) on mating
receptacle is/are covered. It is recommended connector coupling nuts are further
torqued using one of the following methods:



(8) Post-SB21004: use of insulating tape (PWC05-105) (to wrap the connector joints) is
optional (Ref. Fig. 402).
(9) Post-SB21269: use heat gun to heat-shrink harness sleeves over plugs. Connector
joints to be covered as shown on Fig. 402.
72-01-10 Page 423

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Electronic Engine Control (EEC) (Ref. Fig. 405)
A. Removal
CAUTION: AIRFRAME ELECTRICAL POWER MUST BE OFF WHEN

DISCONNECTING RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS.
(1) Disconnect electrical connectors P1 (16) and P2 (17).
(2) Disconnect characterization plug (15).
(3) Disconnect inlet air pressure sensing tube (12).
(4) Disconnect airframe ambient air pressure sensing tube from elbow (11) (Ref. AMM).
(5) Remove bolts (2, 3, 4), clamp (13), grommet (14), terminal lead (5) and EEC (1).
(6) Place EEC on bench and remove bolt (4), terminal lead (5), elbows (6, 11), nuts (7,
10). Discard packings (9) and backup rings (8).
(7) If required, remove bolt (19), spacer (20), nut (21) and characterization plug
assembly (15) and lead (18). Remove clamp (13) and grommet (14).
B. Installation
(1) Install nuts (10, 7), backup rings (8), packings (9) and elbows (11, 6) (Ref.
72-00-00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES), angle of elbows as shown.
(2) Torque nut (10) 38 to 42 lb.in. (4.29-4.75 Nm) and nut (7) 70 to 80 lb.in.
(7.91-9.04 Nm). Secure nuts with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
NOTE: Metal-to-metal contact between nut and boss must be obtained without
exceeding recommended torque. There must be no extrusion of packing or
backup ring.

CAUTION: CHARACTERIZATION PLUG IS MATCHED TO RGB COUPLING SHAFT.
ENSURE PLUG OF SAME CLASS AS INDICATED ON ENGINE DATA
PLATE IS INSTALLED.
(3) Install characterization plug (15). Torque fingertight until fully coupled (Ref.
72-00-00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
NOTE: Ensure lockwire and lead seal are intact.
(4) Lubricate bolts (2, 3) using coating (PWC06-007).
NOTE: Remove excess coating.
(5) Install EEC (1), bolts (2, 3), grommet (14), clamp (13) and terminal lead (5). Torque
bolts 25 to 28 lb.in. (2.83-3.16 Nm).
72-01-10 Page 424

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11
A
2
7
8 16
6
9
10
3
8
9 2
20 12 4
5
14 13 14
B
13 18
19
3
21
17
15
C17522
Electronic Engine Control (EEC) - Removal/Installation
72-01-10 Page 425

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 405
1. Electronic Engine Control (EEC)

2. Bolt
3. Bolt
4. Bolt
5. Terminal Lead
6. Elbow
7. Nut
8. Backup Ring
9. Packing
10. Nut
11. Elbow
12. Tube
13. Clamp
14. Grommet
15. Characterization Plug
16. P1 Connector
17. P2 Connector
18. Characterization Plug Assembly Lanyard
19. Bolt
20. Spacer
21. Nut
72-01-10 Page 426

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0 DEG. ± 1 DEG.
IN RELATION TO
EEC VERTICAL AXIS
10 ° REF.
14
13 20
59 DEG. ± 1 DEG.
IN RELATION TO 19
EEC HORIZONTAL
AXIS
VIEW B
VIEW A
C17644
Electronic Engine Control (EEC) - Removal/Installation
72-01-10 Page 427

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Install free end of terminal lead (5) and bolt (4). Torque bolt 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(7) Install tube (12) at elbow (6). Torque tube nut 90 to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.30 Nm).
Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
CAUTION: HOLD ELBOW SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING TUBE NUT.

(8) Install tube at elbow (11). Torque tube nut 270 to 300 lb.in. (30.51-33.90 Nm).
WARNING: ENSURE AIRFRAME ELECTRICAL POWER IS OFF BEFORE HANDLING

CONNECTORS.

follows:

(11) Install connectors P1 (16) and P2 (17) at EEC top and EEC bottom, respectively.
Tighten each connector nut by hand until witness band(s) on mating receptacle
is/are covered. It is recommended to further torque connector coupling nuts, using
one of the following methods:



72-01-10 Page 428

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Use of insulating tape (PWC05-105) (to wrap the connector joints) is optional (Ref.
Fig. 402).
(13) If sleeves (PWC05-273) are installed, use heat gun to heat-shrink them over the
plugs. Connector joints to be covered as shown on Figure 402.
(14) If required, do the following:
(a) Install grommet (14), clamp (13), spacer (20) and bolt (19). Torque bolt 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamp of wiring harness at bolt (19).
(b) Secure characterization plug assembly (18) lanyard at Flange A with nut (21).
Torque nut 150 to 170 lb.in. (17.0-19.2 Nm).
9. Autofeather Control Unit (AFU) and Brackets (Ref. Fig. 406)
A. Removal
(1) AFU
CAUTION: AIRFRAME ELECTRICAL POWER MUST BE OFF BEFORE

(a) Disconnect electrical connector at bottom of AFU (1) (Ref. AMM).
(b) Disconnect characterization plug (2).
(c) If required, remove nuts (3,18), bolt (17) and spacer (16) to free lanyard (4)
and remove characterization plug (2).
(d) Remove clamp (14) and grommet (15).
(e) Remove bolt (5) to free terminal lead (6).
(f) Remove bolts (7), washers (8), terminal lead (6) and AFU (1).
(2) Bracket
(a) Remove AFU (Ref. step (1)).
(b) Remove EEC (Ref. Para. A.).
(c) Remove nuts (9), bolts (10), washers (11) and brackets (12, 13).
B. Installation
(1) Brackets
(a) Install brackets (12, 13). bolts (10), washers (11) and nuts (9). Torque nuts 85
to 95 lb.in. (9.61-10.74 Nm).
72-01-10 Page 429

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
14
3
15
A
4
VIEW A
17 18
12 9 11
16
12 10
13
8
7
8
13
7 10
9
6 11
5
C17698B
Autofeather Control Unit (AFU) and Brackets - Removal/Installation
Figure 406
72-01-10 Page 430

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 406
1. Autofeather Control Unit (AFU)

2. Characterization Plug
3. Nut
4. Lanyard
5. Bolt
6. Terminal Lead
7. Bolt
8. Washer
9. Nut
10. Bolt
11. Washer
12. Bracket
13. Bracket
14. Clamp
15. Grommet
16. Spacer
17. Bolt
18. Nut
(b) Install EEC (Ref. Para. B.).
(2) AFU
(a) Install terminal lead (6) and bolt (5). Torque bolt 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(b) Lubricate bolts (7) with coating (PWC06-007).
NOTE: Remove excess coating.
(c) Install autofeather control unit (1), washers (8), free end of terminal lead (6)
and bolts (7). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(d) Install airframe harness connector at bottom of AFU (1).

CAUTION: CHARACTERIZATION PLUG IS MATCHED TO RGB COUPLING
SHAFT. ENSURE PLUG OF SAME CLASS AS INDICATED ON
ENGINE DATA PLATE IS INSTALLED.
(e) Install characterization plug (2). Torque fingertight until fully coupled (Ref.
72-00-00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
(f) If required, secure lanyard (4) on RGB Flange A with nut (3). Torque nut 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
72-01-10 Page 431

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Install grommet (15), clamp (14), spacer (16), bolt (17) and nut (18). Torque nut
36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
72-01-10 Page 432

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
A. These instructions provide the information necessary to inspect and functionally check
the electrical system components.

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Barfield test set, TT-1000-A,
Simpson ohmmeter, or equivalent
5. Inspection
A. General
(1) In addition to any details specifically mentioned, inspect for obvious damage,
defective threads and loose or damaged pins.
(2) Replace defective items for which no repair is specified.
6. Check
A. Electrical Wiring Harness (Ref. Figs. 601)
(1) Check connector-to-connector continuity using ohmmeter; resistance must be 0.5

ohm maximum.
(2) Check insulation using test set: pin-to-shield resistance, 2 megohms minimum at
45 volts DC or AC.
NOTE: Blanking plugs must be installed in connector empty pin holes (18
maximum).
B. Characterization Plug (EEC) (Ref. Fig. 602)
(1) Check continuity between pins C-A, C-D and C-E using ohmmeter.
72-01-10 Page 601

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK Nov 09/2001
TORQUE SIGNAL HI 100
TORQUE SIGNAL RTN
101
TORQUE SIGNAL REF.
b U c
102
P2
J11
P1
108.0 Ω NOM.
T1.8 SENSOR HI SPARE
160 103
T1.8 SENSOR LO 161 FROM AC DATA BUS ARINC (RTN)
T1.8 SENSOR RTN 104
K J d
162 FROM AC DATA BUS ARINC (SIG)
105
TEST SERIAL INPUT UART (SIG) 106
3 2 1 4 5
TEST SERIAL INPUT UART (RTN) 107
TEST SERIAL OUTPUT UART (SIG) 108
TEST SERIAL OUTPUT UART (RTN)
109
P4
TO AC DATA BUS ARINC (SIG) 110
TO AC DATA BUS ARINC (RTN)
t z h E e d c G H
NH SIGNAL HI 111
163
36−45 Ω NH SIGNAL RTN
Z E
164
COIL 1
3 4 1 2 5
SPARE
112
RATING LOGIC BIT 1 DISC
KK x
113
P14
RATING LOGIC BIT 2 DISC
P T S GG z k m AA V r U q A y W CC
TORQUE 2 SENSOR HI 114
165
557−589 Ω TORQUE 2 SENSOR RTN DISCRETE RTN
COIL 1 166 115
TOR. SEN. TEMP HI GROUND TEST RTN
G w
167
y NN FF
108.0 Ω NOM. TOR. SEN. TEMP RTN 116

168
TOR. SEN. TEMP LO
169 GROUND TEST DISC
i
Z
TORQUE 1 SENSOR RTN 117
170
612−664 Ω TORQUE 1 SENSOR HI
r q L p e R P
A B G E F D C
171 PROP. BRAKE DISC
COIL 2 118
BLEED SWITCH NO 1 119
BLEED SWITCH NO 2
BB h C
120
P7
f CC DD
EEC (LOCAL)
BLEED VALVE TM HI
133−166 Ω 172
BLEED VALVE TM RTN EEC POWER RTN
i W
173 121
EEC POWER RTN
A C B
122
EEC POWER 28VDC
K J
123
EEC POWER 28VDC
P10
124
ECS FAULT RTN 125
P8
PW127H ENGINE TRIM DISC
126
STEP MOTOR EXC. SPARE 127
F−G/S−G/T−G/H−G 174 LRU SELECTOR
m a Z M S HH g F
STEP MOTOR A 128
p x X HH
115−155 Ω 175
STEP MOTOR B 176
STEP MOTOR C
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
177

STEP MOTOR D 178
RVDT EXC 179 DISCRETE RTN

g F v
RVDT RTN 180 129

RVDT RTN (E1 & E2) 181 INHIBIT / RESET DISC
X Y MM r
RVDT E1 130
182
RVDT E2
U j X n k F a c b G
183 FAIL FIXED RELAY HI
EE u c
MFC ID LOOP 131

AA
A−B 52−78 Ω
P−C/R−C 76−114Ω MFC ID LOOP RTN
FAIL FIXED RELAY RTN
b
132
Electrical Wiring Harness - Schematic Diagram

G F S T H A B C P R J L N M
N−M 32−55 Ω UPTRIM DISC FROM OPP. ENGINE
133
LL j
FEATHER DISC
(CANCEL NP COVERING) 134
NH SIGNAL HI 184 UPTRIM LAMP

u t w
36−45 Ω NH SIGNAL RTN

E s a D L M N
185 135
COIL 1
D Y C

72-01-10
136
72−88 Ω
COIL 2 186
3 4 1 2 5
187 IGNITION
136
NH SIGNAL HI
NH SIGNAL RTN 137
B n R
P5
138
MANUAL SOL. RTN 139
MANUAL SOL. EXC.
140
C D V W
L K
C68079A_1
Nov 09/2001
Page 602
P9
COIL 2
NP SIGNAL HI 141
65−95 Ω NP SIGNAL RTN
142
NP SIGNAL HI 143
30−50 Ω NP SIGNAL RTN
U T EE q
144
1 2 3 4 5
COIL 1
A/F RELAY HI
W
W
TORQUE SIGNAL REF. 102 145

TORQUE SIGNAL RTN 101 A/F RELAY RTN
V
V
TORQUE SIGNAL HI 146
c U b
100
HI TORQUE TO OPP RELAY
S
S
147
TORQUE 2 SENSOR HI
557−589 Ω 188
TORQUE 2 SENSOR RTN 189
COIL 2 TOR. SEN. TEMP HI
190
TOR. SEN. TEMP LO
H J K L
108.0 Ω NOM. 191
UPTRIM OUTPUT
T
T
148
612−664 Ω
AFU (LOCAL)
AFU POWER 28VDC
COIL 1 149
AFU POWER RTN
E F
E F
150
A B G F E C D H J K
J16
P16
A/F ARMED RELAY
151
A/F TEST 152
P6
A/F ENABLE OPP. 153
LOW TORQUE IND

154
A/F ENABLE LOCAL
A P a B N
A P a B N
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
155
HI TORQUE FROM OPP RELAY

R
156
P16

P5

72-01-10
FEATHER SOL HI
157
158
PVM
159
C A B E F
(LOCAL)
C68079A_2
Nov 09/2001
Page 603
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPARK IGNITION SYSTEM

(SINGLE EXCITERS SINGLE OUTPUT)
P24 IGNITION EXCITER
IGNITION BOX #1 RTN

B 192 B
IGNITION BOX #1 HI
A 193 A
IGNITER PLUGS P24 IGNITION EXCITER
IGNITION BOX #2 RTN

B 194 F
IGNITION BOX #2 HI
A 195 G
P25 ENGINE OIL LP SWITCH

OIL PRESSURE 28 VDC
B 196 M
OIL PRESSURE RTN
C 197 D
OIL PRESSURE LOW SIG R
P A 198
+ VE (CR) BUS TERMINAL
− VE (AL) BUS TERMINAL V

199
200 K
U
THERMOCOUPLE
TRIM CIRCUIT
T6 THERMOCOUPLES
INSTRUMENTATION HARNESS NO.1
C68209A_1
72-01-10 Page 604

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P36 HP FUEL FILTER IMPENDING

BYPASS SWITCH (PUMP)
HP FUEL FILTER SIG
1 201 G
HP FUEL FILTER RTN
2 202 F
P
P32 ENGINE OIL SENSOR TEMP
OIL TEMPERATURE SIG

90.4 Ω @ 0°C A 203 B
128.9 Ω @100°C B
OIL TEMPERATURE RTN
204 P
P35 LP FUEL FILTER IMPENDING

BYPASS SWITCH
LP FUEL FILTER SIG 205
A V
B LP FUEL FILTER RTN C
206
P
P37 FUEL SENSOR TEMP
FUEL TEMPERATURE SIG

90.4 Ω @ 0°C A 207 M
128.9 Ω @100°C B
FUEL TEMPERATURE RTN
208 A
P27 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

TRANSMITTER
OIL PRESSURE 10 VDC HI
B 209 H
OIL PRESSURE 10 VDC RTN J
A 210
OIL PRESSURE RTN 211
D L
OIL PRESSURE SIG
E 212 K
N
U
P33 NL SENSOR
R
NL SIGNAL HI
1 213 E
2 NL SIGNAL RTN 214 D
S
INSTRUMENTATION HARNESS NO.2
C68209A_2
72-01-10 Page 605

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Check that no continuity exists with remaining contacts.
(3) Check that insulation resistance to ground using test set is not less than 2
megohms minimum at 45 volts DC or AC.
(4) Check resistance between pins C-A (resistor R1), C-D (resistor R3) and C-E
(resistor R4) using ohmmeter (Ref. RGB identification plate).
NOTE: 1. Q2G on RGB identification plate corresponds to resistor R4, and Q2B to
resistor R3.
NOTE: 2. Values (in ohms) on characterization plug decal R3xxxx and R4xxxx
must be identical to those on RGB identification plate Q2Bxxxx and
Q2Gxxxx, respectively.
NOTE: 3. If resistance ± 1% is not as indicated on RGB identification plate, or if

values on decal are not identical to those on RGB identification plate,
reject plug and replace with new one of correct values.
(5) Replace defective plugs with similar ones having the same class (Ref. Approved
Repairs for replacement of resistors).
C. Characterization Plug (AFU) (Ref. Figs. 603 and 604)
(1) Determine which circuits are used in relation to the plug class and check continuity
± 1% using ohmmeter.
NOTE: 1. The characterization plug classes are recorded on the reduction gearbox
reference data plate (offset value is first two digits; gain, last two digits).
NOTE: 2. The characterization plug classes may also be recorded (by vibropeen)
on the characterization plug (offset value is first two digits; gain, last two
digits).
(2) If characterization plug classes are recorded (by vibropeen) on the plug itself,
ensure values are identical to those on the RGB reference data plate.
(3) Check that no continuity exists between remaining contacts.
(4) Check that insulation to ground resistance is not less than 2 megohms at 45 volts
DC or AC. Use test set.
(5) A defective plug must be replaced with one having the same class.
72-01-10 Page 606

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOT USED
A B D E A
R1 R3 R4
T/M TRIM VALUES

RGB MODULE S/N
R1 R3 X X X X
R2 R4 X X X X
SCHEMATIC PLUG DECAL

NOTE: Q2G CORRESPONDS
NOT USED TO RESISTOR R4 AND
Q2B TO RESISTOR R3
F MASTER
E KEYWAY
R4 G
R3 D H LONGUEUIL QUEBEC CANADA
A TURBOPROP ENGINE
REDUCTION GEARBOX MODULE
C B
ENGINE MODEL
NOT USED MODULE SERIAL NO.
Q2G X X X X Q2B X X X X
EEC TRIM
CONTACT PINS
AFU TRIM
VIEW ON A
NOT USED RGB IDENTIFICATION PLATE
R4
A
R1
B D
C E
R3
RESISTOR SIDE
C30182D
Characterization Plug (EEC) Resistor Installation - Circuit Diagram
Figure 602
72-01-10 Page 607

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C15238A
Characterization Plug (AFU) - Jumper Circuits (OFFSET)
Figure 603
72-01-10 Page 608

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GAIN GAIN
CLASS % TRIM CONNECTIONS CLASS % TRIM CONNECTIONS
01 + 15.0 S−G−H, U−J−K 32 − 0.5 P−L
02 + 14.5 S−G−H, U−J−L 33 − 1.0 P−K
03 + 14.0 S−G−H, U−J 34 − 1.5 P−K, T−L
04 + 13.5 S−G−H, U−J, P−L 35 − 2.0 P−J
05 + 13.0 S−G−H, U−K 36 − 2.5 P−J, T−L
06 + 12.5 S−G−H, U−L 37 − 3.0 P−J, T−K
07 + 12.0 S−G, U−H 38 − 3.5 P−H, S−L
08 + 11.5 S−G, U−H, P−L 39 − 4.0 P−H
09 + 11.0 S−G, U−H, P−K 40 − 4.5 P−H, T−L
10 + 10.5 S−G, U−H, P−K, T−L 41 − 5.0 P−H, T−K
11 + 10.0 S−G, U−J 42 − 5.5 P−H, T−J, S−L
12 + 9.5 S−G, U−J, P−L 43 − 6.0 P−H, T−J
13 + 9.0 S−G, U−K 44 − 6.5 P−G, S−K, U−L
14 + 8.5 S−G, U−L 45 − 7.0 P−G, S−K
15 + 8.0 S−G 46 − 7.5 P−G, S−L
16 + 7.5 S−G, P−L 47 − 8.0 P−G
17 + 7.0 S−G, P−K 48 − 8.5 P−G, T−L
18 + 6.5 S−G, P−K, U−L 49 − 9.0 P−G, T−K
19 + 6.0 S−H, U−J 50 − 9.5 P−G, T−J, S−L
20 + 5.5 S−H, U−J, P−L 51 − 10.0 P−G, T−J
21 + 5.0 S−H, U−K 52 − 10.5 P−G, T−H, S−K, U−L
22 + 4.5 S−H, U−L 53 − 11.0 P−G, T−H, S−K
23 + 4.0 S−H 54 − 11.5 P−G, T−H, S−L
24 + 3.5 S−H, P−L 55 − 12.0 P−G, T−H
25 + 3.0 S−J, U−K 56 − 12.5 P−G−H, T−L
26 + 2.5 S−J, U−L 57 − 13.0 P−G−H, T−K
27 + 2.0 S−J 58 − 13.5 P−G−H, T−J, S−L
28 + 1.5 S−K, U−L 59 − 14.0 P−G−H, T−J
29 + 1.0 S−K 60 − 14.5 P−G−H, T−J−L
30 + 0.5 S−L 61 − 15.0 P−G−H, T−J−K
31 0.0 NONE
C15250A
Characterization Plug (AFU) - Jumper Circuits (GAIN)
Figure 604
72-01-10 Page 609/610

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING
1. General
A. These instructions provide the information necessary for the cleaning/painting of

components of the engine electrical system.
Item No. Name
PWC05-256 Enhancer, Electrical Contact
PWC11-012 Acetone
PWC11-022 Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone
PWC11-023 Solvent Cleaner
PWC11-027 Solvent, Petroleum
PWC11-031 Cleaner, Engine Parts
PWC11-035 Solvent Cleaner
PWC11-036 Solvent Deoxidizer
PWC11-036A Solvent Deoxidizer
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Brush, Stiff Bristle
72-01-10 Page 701

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING May 02/2003
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Cleaning
WARNING: REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS INFORMATION SUCH AS: HAZARDOUS
INGREDIENTS, PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS, FIRE,
EXPLOSION, REACTIVITY, HEALTH HAZARD DATA, PRECAUTIONS FOR
SAFE HANDLING, USE AND CONTROL MEASURES.
WARNING: DO ALL THE CLEANING IN A WELL VENTILATED AREA TO MINIMIZE
EXPOSURE OF PERSONNEL TO SOLVENT FUMES. AVOID PROLONGED
CONTACT WITH SKIN.
A. General
(1) Unless otherwise specified, clean all parts with petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) or
cleaner (PWC11-031).
NOTE: Tergit (PWC11-031) is recommended to be used as an alternative to

petroleum solvent when the use of this product is restricted by local
environmental and/or health legislation.
B. Electronic Engine Control (EEC) and Autofeather Unit
(1) Clean external parts, using non-metallic bristle brush and MEK (PWC11-022) or
solvent (PWC11-023).
WARNING: WHEN USING COMPRESSED AIR FOR CLEANING OR DRYING,

REGULATE PRESSURE TO 29 psig (200 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR
GOGGLES OR FACE SHIELD TO PROTECT EYES.
(2) Dry with clean, compressed air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
C. Wiring Harness
WARNING: REFER TO MANUFACTURERS’ MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR

EXPLOSION, REACTIVITY, HEALTH HAZARD DATA, PRECAUTIONS
FOR SAFE HANDLING, USE AND CONTROL MEASURES.
CAUTION: DO NOT IMMERSE HARNESS IN SOLVENT.
(1) Wipe harness using clean, lint-free, unsized cloth moistened with one of the
following:
v Acetone (PWC11-012).
v Methyl-ethyl-ketone (PWC11-022).
v Solvent cleaner (PWC11-023).
(2) Air-dry harness.
72-01-10 Page 702

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Wiring Harness Connectors
WARNING: REFER TO MANUFACTURERS’ MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR

WARNING: THE SOLVENTS USED IN THESE PROCEDURES ARE EXTREMELY
FLAMMABLE. LIMIT THE QUANTITY USED TO WHAT IS NECESSARY TO
DO THE CLEANING.
(1) Degrease the connector using one of the following consumables:

v Solvent Petroleum (PWC11-027).
(2) Use a clean, non-abrasive tool or brush to remove all deposits.

(3) Shake or swab connector to remove all liquid. Dry connector using clean compressed
air, regulated to 29 psig (200 Kpa) maximum.
(4) Allow connector to air dry for 2 to 3 minutes.
WARNING: THE DEOXIDENTS USED IN THIS PROCEDURE ARE EXTREMELY

FLAMMABLE. LIMIT THE QUANTITY USED TO WHAT IS NECESSARY
TO DO THE DEOXIDIZING.
(5) Deoxidize the connector pins using either:
v Cramolin ‘‘Pro Gold’’(PWC11-036).

or
v DeoxIT (PWC11-036A).
(6) Let the deoxidizer stay in the connector for 1 to 2 minutes and:
v Shake the connector several times

or
v Connect, then disconnect the connector from the associated receptacle. Do this
at least one time.
(7) Rinse the connectors using one of the following consumables:

72-01-10 Page 703

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
v Solvent Petroleum (PWC11-027).

(8) Dry connector using clean compressed air, regulated to 29 psig (200 Kpa)
maximum or let the solvent completely evaporate.
NOTE: Evaporation can take up to 20 minutes in cold ambient conditions.
(9) Hold the connector in a vertical position, apply a small amount of the electrical
contact enhancer (PWC05-256) into the contact socket as follows:
(a) Use the kit supplied lint-free applicator and wet the contact socket surface face
with the contact enhancer solution (PWC05-256).
NOTE: If the ambient temperature is too cold for the solution to flow into the
sockets, the solution can be diluted. Use 4 parts isopropyl alcohol
(PWC11-014) and one part contact enhancer (PWC05-256).
(b) To make sure the solution goes into the contacts, remove the cotton tip
material from the kit supplied applicator. Carefully insert the plastic tip into the
socket to push the solution into the socket.
(c) If the contact enhancer solution was diluted, let the part air dry at room
temperature for one hour minimum.
72-01-10 Page 704

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS
1. General
A. These instructions provide information necessary to achieve approved repairs of

components of the engine electrical system.
B. Refer to corresponding function heading in Chapter 72-00-00 for information of a

general nature applicable to approved repairs.
Item No. Name
PWC05-027 Marker, Ink
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC05-295 Lockwire (may be used instead of PWC05-089)
PWC07-011 Varnish (air-dry)
PWC09-011 Sealant, RTV
PWC11-014A Alcohol, Isopropyl
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Ohmmeter
5. Repair
A. EEC Characterization Plug
(1) Assemble resistors R3 (Q2B) and R4 (Q2G) and R1 as follows:
NOTE: 1. Resistor classes for R3 and R4 are recorded on reduction gearbox

module identification plate.
NOTE: 2. R1 resistor is a fixed value of 1910 ohms and Class (ST3090-071).
(a) Remove threaded cap and seal plug from characterization plug assembly.
72-01-10 Page 801

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS May 02/2003
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL THREADS AND /OR CIRCUIT BOARD
ARE NOT DAMAGED WHEN THE RTV SEALANT (PWC09-011) IS
REMOVED.
(b) Remove sealant (PWC09-011) using a hard plastic pick.
(c) Clean the plug (Ref. Cleaning/Painting).
WARNING: WHEN USING COMPRESSED AIR FOR DRYING, REGULATE

PRESSURE TO 20 psig (137 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES OR
FACE SHIELD TO PROTECT EYES.
(d) Dry with clean, compressed air at 20 psig (137 kPa).
(e) Bend and cut resistor leads.
NOTE: Direction of bend must ensure visibility of marked value when resistor
is installed.
(f) Install resistor into appropriate holes of circuit board. Ensure full contact and no
tension or stress.
(g) Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance between connector pins ensuring

resistance is within limits, ± 1.0 %.
(2) Apply sealant as follows:
(a) Mask surrounding areas not to be sealed and fill plug assembly to dimension
shown with sealant (PWC09-011) (Ref. Fig. 801).
(b) Allow sealant to dry thoroughly; set characterization plug aside until compound
has a non-gelatinous consistency and continue with assembly.
(c) Install seal plug and threaded cap. Torque 2 to 13 lb.in. (0.23-1.47 Nm), secure
with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295) and apply seal to lockwire.
NOTE: Make sure lockwire does not cross decal area.
(3) Install decal (Ref. IPC) as follows:
(a) Clean surface of characterization plug assembly where decal is to be affixed

with isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014A).
(b) Air dry for 10 to 15 minutes.
(c) Affix decal to the plug and hold in position until decal is sufficiently attached.
(d) Using marker (PWC05-027), record trim values from the engine reference data
plate to the appropriate spaces on decal. Allow ink to dry for five minutes.
(e) Mask surfaces surrounding decal and apply varnish (PWC07-011) on decal
only. Allow varnish to air dry.
72-01-10 Page 802

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOT USED
MASTER
KEYWAY
F
G
0.195 IN. (4.95 mm) E
D
0.175 IN. (4.45 mm) R4
R3 H
C A R1
0.500 IN.
B
(12.7 mm)
NOT
USED
RESISTOR CONNECTOR PINS
A
RTV SEALANT
WITHIN ENCLOSED AREA
0.450 IN. (11.430 mm)

0.400 IN. (10.160 mm)
A
SECTION A−A
MASTER
KEYWAY
T/M TRIM VALUES

TURBO/RGB MODULE S/N
R1 R3
R2 R4
DECAL
NOTE: PLACE DECAL IN RELATION

TO MASTER KEYWAY AS SHOWN
C30183F
EEC Characterization Plug - Resistor Installation
Figure 801
72-01-10 Page 803/804

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
A. These instructions provide the information necessary for the replacement of components
of the engine ignition system.
WARNING: WEAR GOGGLES WHEN REMOVING/INSTALLING LOCKWIRE.

TOUCHES BARE SKIN.
Item No. Name
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC06-005 Lubricant, Dry Spray, (Fluorocarbon)
PWC06-007 Compound, Film Lubricant
PWC06-023 Compound, Antiseize (Silver Goop)
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
72-01-20 Page 401

IGNITION SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Mar 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Igniters (Ref. Fig. 401)
WARNING: RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IN IGNITION EXCITER MAY BE DANGEROUSLY

HIGH. ENSURE IGNITION SYSTEM IS OFF AT LEAST SIX MINUTES
BEFORE STARTING REMOVAL PROCEDURE. ALWAYS DISCONNECT
COUPLING NUTS AT IGNITION EXCITER END FIRST. ALWAYS USE
INSULATED TOOLS TO REMOVE CABLE COUPLING NUTS. DO NOT TOUCH
OUTPUT CONNECTORS OR COUPLING NUTS WITH BARE HANDS.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW IGNITER CABLE BRAIDING OR FERRULES TO ROTATE
WHEN TURNING COUPLING NUT.
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect ignition cables (Ref. Para. 6.).
CAUTION: ALWAYS REPLACE AN IGNITER THAT HAS BEEN DROPPED. INTERNAL

DAMAGE MAY NOT BE EVIDENT AT TESTING.
(2) Remove igniters (1) (Pre-SB21649) or (3) (Post-SB21649) and gaskets (2). Discard
gaskets.
B. Installation
WARNING: ENSURE IGNITION SYSTEM IS OFF BEFORE STARTING INSTALLATION.

CAUTION: SILVER GOOP (PWC06-023) MUST NOT COME IN CONTACT WITH
THE INTERCOMPRESSOR CASE OR IMPELLERS. THESE
COMPONENTS ARE MADE FROM TITANIUM, WHICH IS LIABLE TO
CRACK WHEN IN CONTACT WITH SILVER GOOP.
CAUTION: SILVER GOOP (PWC06-023) MUST NOT COME IN CONTACT WITH THE
THREADS OF THE IGNITER. THE SPECIFIED TORQUE VALUE IS
DEFINED FOR A DRY THREAD. LUBRICATING THE THREAD WITH
SILVER GOOP MAY DAMAGE THE IGNITER.
(1) If considered necessary, apply a thin coat of compound (PWC06-023) to surface of
igniter mating with gasket (2) to facilitate separation of the gasket and igniter at
disassembly. Do not apply the compound to the igniter threads.
(2) Install new gaskets (2) on igniters (1) or (3) (Post-SB21649) and install igniters.
Torque igniters 300 to 360 lb.in. (33.90-40.68 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
NOTE: If a new gasket is not available, it is permissible to reuse the existing

gasket provided a new one is installed during the next aircraft stop where
such a gasket is available. Operating with an old gasket may lead to a
P3 leak, which contributes to a higher interturbine temperature and
consequently higher operating costs.
72-01-20 Page 402

IGNITION SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Oct 18/2002
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW IGNITER CABLE BRAIDING OR FERRULES TO

ROTATE WHEN TURNING COUPLING NUTS.
(3) Connect igniter cables (Ref. Para. B.).
6. Ignition Cables (Ref. Fig. 402)
A. Removal

HIGH. ENSURE IGNITION SYSTEM IS OFF AT LEAST SIX MINUTES
BEFORE STARTING REMOVAL PROCEDURE. ALWAYS DISCONNECT
COUPLING NUTS AT IGNITION EXCITER END FIRST. ALWAYS USE
INSULATED TOOLS TO REMOVE CABLE COUPLING NUTS. DO NOT
TOUCH OUTPUT CONNECTORS OR COUPLING NUTS WITH BARE
HANDS.
WARNING: ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR CONTACT IS MADE OF TOXIC MATERIAL.
PROLONGED HANDLING MAY CAUSE SKIN IRRITATION. USE GLOVES
WHEN HANDLING PART.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW CABLE BRAIDING OR FERRULES TO ROTATE WHEN
TURNING COUPLING NUTS.
(1) Disconnect cables (1, 2) at ignition exciters (13, 14).
(2) Disconnect ignition cables at igniters.
(3) Remove nuts (3) and bolts (4).
(4) Remove nuts (5) and bolts (6).
(5) Open clamps (9, 10, 11) and remove ignition cables (1, 2).
(6) Remove clamps (7) and grommets (8, 12).
B. Installation
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, torque all nuts/bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW ANY LUBRICANT TO COME IN CONTACT WITH

CENTRAL CONDUCTORS OF CONNECTORS. CONTACT WITH
CONDUCTORS MAY RESULT IN A HIGH-RESISTANCE PATH, WHICH
COULD GENERATE HEAT AND OXIDATION.
(1) Mask central conductors at both ends of ignition cables, using suitable sleeve
protectors, and apply fluorocarbon dry spray (PWC06-005) to seal band.
CAUTION: WHEN TURNING COUPLING NUTS, DO NOT LET BRAIDING OR

FERRULES ON IGNITION CABLES TWIST.
(2) Install cable (1) to rear exciter (13) and cable (2) to front exciter (14). Torque
coupling nuts fingertight plus 45 degrees. Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or
(PWC05-295).
72-01-20 Page 403

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
1
C38665
Igniter - Removal/Installation
Figure 401
72-01-20 Page 404

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Igniter (Pre-SB21649)
2. Gasket
3. Igniter (Post-SB21649) (not illustrated)
(3) Install cable (1) at igniter on RH side of engine and cable (2) at igniter on LH
side of engine. Torque coupling nuts fingertight.
(4) Secure cable sealing plates at mounting brackets with bolts (4) and nuts (3). Torque
nuts.
(5) Install grommets (12) on cables (1, 2).
(6) Install cables in clamps (9, 10, 11). Secure clamps.
(7) Install grommets (8) and clamps (7) on cables (1, 2).
(8) Secure clamps (7) with bolts (6) and nuts (5). Torque bolts.
NOTE: Position clamps to ensure a clearance exists between the cables and fuel
tubes.
(9) Torque coupling nuts 200 to 270 lb.in. (22.60-30.51 Nm). Secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
7. Ignition Exciter(s) (Ref. Fig. 403)
A. Removal

HIGH. ENSURE IGNITION IS SWITCHED OFF AT LEAST SIX MINUTES
BEFORE STARTING REMOVAL PROCEDURE. ALWAYS USE
INSULATED TOOLS TO REMOVE CABLE COUPLING NUTS. DO NOT
TOUCH OUTPUT CONNECTORS OR COUPLING NUTS WITH BARE
HANDS.
WARNING: ENSURE AIRFRAME ELECTRICAL POWER IS OFF BEFORE
(1) Disconnect connectors P24 (1) (Ref. 72-01-10).
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING OR FERRULES TO

(2) Disconnect ignition cables (2).
(3) Remove bolts (3), one end of ground terminals (4), spacers (16) and ignition
exciters (5) from mounting plate assembly (13).
72-01-20 Page 405

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
14
1 2 A 13
12
6 7 8
6
1
12 2
12
12 5 6
7 8
5 8 7
9
VIEW A
(POST − SB21687)
10
5
4
9
12 9
3
C63360A
Ignition Cables - Removal/Installation
72-01-20 Page 406

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 402
1. Ignition Cable
2. Ignition Cable
3. Nut
4. Bolt
5. Nut
6. Bolt
7. Clamp
8. Grommet
9. Clamp
10. Clamp
11. Clamp
12. Grommet
13. Ignition Exciter (Rear)
14. Ignition Exciter (Front)
72-01-20 Page 407

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
D
FW
12
12 12
2
VIEW A
C63412
Ignition Cables - Removal/Installation
72-01-20 Page 408

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Install spacers (16) and ignition exciters (5) on mounting plate assembly (13),
ensuring input electrical connectors are at top.
72-01-20 Page 408A/408B

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Install bolts (3) and free end of ground terminals (4) Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING OR FERRULES TO

(3) Connect ignition cables (2) (Ref. Para. B.).

CONNECTING RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS.
(4) Connect connectors P24 (1) (Ref. 72-01-10).
8. Ignition Exciter Mounting Plate (Ref. Fig. 403)
A. Removal
(1) Remove electrical wiring harnesses, as required (Ref. 72-01-10).
(2) Remove ignition exciters (Ref. Para. 7.).
(3) Disconnect fuel tubes, as required (Ref. 72-01-40).
(4) Remove bolts (6), ground terminals (4), brackets (7, 8), washers (9, 11, 15),
vibration mounts (12), sleeves (14) and mounting plate (13).
B. Installation
(1) Install vibration mounts (12) and sleeves (14) on mounting plate (13).
(2) Install mounting plate, washers (9, 11, 15), brackets (7, 8), ground terminals (4) and
bolts (10, 15). Torque bolts 14 to 16 lb.in. (1.58-1.81 Nm).
NOTE: 1. Lubricate with coating (PWC06-007), bolts which fasten ground

terminals.
NOTE: 2. Include oil-cooler bracket (10) under washer (9).
(3) Install fuel tubes (Ref. 72-01-40).
(4) Install ignition exciters (Ref. Para. 7.).
(5) Install electrical wiring harnesses, as required (Ref. 72-10-10).
72-01-20 Page 409

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12 15
11
4 8
A
INSTALLATION AT A
13
1 11 12
P24 6
15
14
P24
4
A
10
11 12
16
9
5
14 15
4
4 12
6 11
6 7
3
2
C38604A
Ignition Exciters and Mounting Plate - Removal/Installation
Figure 403
72-01-20 Page 410

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 403
1. Connector
2. Cable
3. Bolt
4. Ground Terminal
5. Exciter
6. Bolt
7. Bracket
8. Bracket
9. Washer
10. Oil-cooler Bracket
11. Washer
12. Vibration Mount
13. Mounting Plate
14. Sleeve
15. Washer
16. Spacer
72-01-20 Page 411/412

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
A. These instructions provide information necessary for adjustment/test of components of

the engine ignition system.

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Adjustment/Test
A. Ignition Exciters, Cables and Igniters (Operational Test)
(1) Ground aircraft (Ref. AMM).
(2) Remove igniters (Ref. Removal/Installation).
(3) Connect ignition cables to igniters.
(4) Position igniters on engine to enable firing end to be seen.
CAUTION: IGNITER SHELLS MUST BE GROUNDED TO ENGINE TO ENSURE

SPARK DAMAGE DOES NOT OCCUR.
(5) Ground igniter shells to engine.
WARNING: ENSURE NO FLAMMABLE VAPOR OR FLUID IS IN VICINITY OF

IGNITERS.
WARNING: DO NOT CONTACT CABLE AND/OR IGNITER WHEN PERFORMING
THE FOLLOWING TEST. EXCITER OUTPUT VOLTAGE RANGES UP TO
8000 VOLTS DC.
(6) Advance condition lever 5 degrees and switch on ignition (Ref. AMM) for 30
seconds maximum.
(a) If igniter does not spark, proceed as follows:
72-01-20 Page 501

IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST Nov 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: BEFORE STARTING REMOVAL PROCEDURES, ENSURE

IGNITION IS OFF AT LEAST SIX MINUTES. RESIDUAL
VOLTAGE IN IGNITION EXCITER MAY BE DANGEROUSLY
HIGH. ALWAYS DISCONNECT COUPLING NUTS AT IGNITION
EXCITER END FIRST. ALWAYS USE INSULATED TOOLS
TO REMOVE CABLE COUPLING NUTS. DO NOT TOUCH
OUTPUT CONNECTORS OR COUPLING NUTS WITH BARE
HANDS.
1 Switch off ignition and replace igniter.
2 Switch on ignition for 30 seconds maximum. If there is no spark, check the

following:
a Power supply (Ref. AMM).
b Ignition exciter.
c Ignition cable.
(b) If sparks are irregular or misfiring occurs, proceed as follows:
1 Switch off ignition and replace igniter.
2 Switch on ignition for 30 seconds maximum.
3 If sparks are irregular or misfiring occurs, replace exciter (Ref.

Removal/Installation).
4 Re-check system.
(c) If sparks are regular and no misfiring occurs:
1 Install igniters on engine and reconnect cables (Ref. Removal/Installation).
2 Move condition lever to FUEL SO position.
72-01-20 Page 502

IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST Nov 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
A. These instructions provide the information necessary for the inspection/check of

components of the engine ignition system.

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Barfield test set, TT-1000-A
5. Inspection
A. General
(1) In addition to the details specifically mentioned, inspect for obvious defects.
B. Igniter

(1) Inspect Igniter. Reject if any of the following defects are evident:
(a) Shell
1 Swelling, distortion, impact damage.
2 Fretting depth at firing end exceeds 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) or fretting
extends more than one half its circumference.
(b) Semi-conductor: missing.
(c) Connector well: cracked or loose.
72-01-20 Page 601

IGNITION SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK Oct 18/2002
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Erosion limit (Ref. Fig. 601) is exceeded.
NOTE: Uneven erosion is acceptable.
C. Ignition Exciter
(1) If housing has a bulge, the exciter may remain in service, providing:
(a) It functions correctly.
(b) Visual inspection reveals no cracks.
6. Check - Ignition Cable
A. Continuity Resistance Check
(1) Check, using test set, that continuity resistance is not more than 0.05 ohm at
45 volts AC or DC.
B. Insulation Resistance Check
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH EXPOSED PORTION OF TEST PROBES OR

COMPONENT UNDER TEST.
(1) Check, using test set, that insulation resistance to ground is not less than 2
megohms at 45 volts DC or AC.
C. Visual Check
(1) Electrical connectors for cleanliness and freedom from oil or fluids.
(2) Insulation material for condition.
(3) The outside shield (braided stainless steel) for condition. Repair if required (Ref.
Approved Repairs).
(4) Connection nuts for condition. Threads must be free from dirt and not defective.
72-01-20 Page 602

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
72-01-20 Page 603

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.240 IN.
6.096 mm
DIA. A
B B
NEW IGNITER 0.025 IN. MAX

0.635 mm
0.350 IN. MAXIMUM MEASURED

8.89 mm ALONG SHORTEST AXIS
180 MAX.
NOTE :
EROSION IN ANY
OTHER AXIS IN
EXCESS OF 0.350 IN.
(8.89 mm) IS ACCEPTABLE
SECTION B−B
FRETTING LIMIT VIEW
EROSION LIMIT
(PRE-SB21649) C30186E
Igniter - Erosion Limit
72-01-20 Page 604

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.168 IN.
4.267 mm
DIA. A
B B
NEW IGNITER 0.025 IN. MAX

0.635 mm
0.300 IN. MAXIMUM MEASURED

7.62 mm ALONG SHORTEST AXIS
180 MAX.
NOTE :
EROSION IN ANY
OTHER AXIS IN
EXCESS OF 0.300 IN.
(7.62 mm) IS ACCEPTABLE
SECTION B−B
FRETTING LIMIT VIEW A
EROSION LIMIT
(POST-SB21649) C86670
Igniter - Erosion Limit
72-01-20 Page 605/606

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING
1. General

MATERIALS. SOME MATERIALS CAN BE DANGEROUS
Item No. Name
PWC06-005 Lubricant, Dry Spray (Fluorocarbon)
PWC11-010 Alcohol, Methyl (Methanol)
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Cleaning
WARNING: REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS

FOR CONSUMABLE MATERIALS INFORMATION SUCH AS: HAZARDOUS
NOTE: Tergit (PWC11-031) is recommended to be used as an alternative to petroleum
solvent where the use of this product is restricted by local environmental and/or
health legislation.
A. Ignition Exciter
(1) Clean repaired surfaces (Ref. Approved Repairs) using MEK (PWC11-022).
B. Igniter

(1) Wipe combustion deposits on outer surface with a lint-free cloth.
72-01-20 Page 701

IGNITION SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Using a felt swab, soaked in petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) or methyl alcohol
(PWC11-010) or cleaner (PWC11-031), clean inside surface of terminal well.
NOTE: The nose of igniter should never be cleaned. Do not remove carbon from
electrodes or annular gap areas. Carbon deposits in the gap area are an
aid to igniter operation.

PRESSURE TO 29 PSIG (200 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES OR
(3) Dry using clean compressed air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
C. Ignition Cable

(1) Clean using MEK (PWC11-022).
6. Painting
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW ANY LUBRICANT TO COME IN CONTACT WITH CENTRAL

CONDUCTORS OF EXCITER CONNECTORS. CONTACT WITH
CONDUCTORS MAY RESULT IN A HIGH-RESISTANCE PATH, WHICH
COULD GENERATE HEAT AND OXIDATION.
A. Procedure
(1) Apply light film of fluorocarbon spray lubricant (PWC06-005) to repaired surfaces.
72-01-20 Page 702

IGNITION SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS
1. General
A. These instructions provide the information necessary to achieve the approved repairs of
B. Refer to equivalent functional heading of Chapter 72-00-00 for information of a general

nature applicable to approved repairs.
Item No. Name
PWC05-029 Flux
PWC05-058 Solder, 50/50
PWC05-066 Tape, Insulating
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC05-101 Cloth, Abrasive (320 grit)
PWC06-005 Lubricant, Dry Spray (Fluorocarbon)
PWC11-002 Trichloroethane 1-1-1 (Inhibited)
PWC11-032 Solvent, Degreasing
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Stainless Steel Bristle Brush
Riveting equipment
Soldering Iron
5. Ignition Exciter
A. Procedure
(1) Remove corrosion using stainless-steel bristle brush.
72-01-20 Page 801

IGNITION SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET FOR

INGREDIENTS, PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS, FIRE
(2) Clean repaired surface using MEK (PWC11-022).
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW ANY LUBRICANT TO COME IN CONTACT WITH

CENTRAL CONDUCTORS OR EXCITER CONNECTORS. CONTACT
WITH CONDUCTORS MAY RESULT IN A HIGH RESISTANCE PATH,
WHICH COULD GENERATE HEAT AND OXIDATION.
(3) Apply a light film of lubricant (PWC06-005) to repaired surfaces.
6. Ignition Exciter Mounting Plate
A. Procedure
(1) Replace defective plate nuts using riveting equipment.
7. Igniter Cable - Braiding (Ref. Fig. 801)
A. Procedure
(1) Areas not exceeding 0.375 in. (9.52 mm) in length and 0.5 in. (12.70 mm) from
connector or flange with no damage to underlying insulation, may be repaired as
follows:
WARNING: REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA

SHEETS FOR CONSUMABLE MATERIALS INFORMATION SUCH
AS: HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS, PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL
CHARACTERISTICS, FIRE, EXPLOSION, REACTIVITY, HEALTH
HAZARD DATA, PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE HANDLING, USE AND
CONTROL MEASURES.
(a) Clean area using trichloroethane (PWC11-002) or degreasing solvent
(PWC11-032).
NOTE: Magkleen 4 (PWC11-032) is recommended to be used as an

alternative to trichloroethane when the use of this product is
restricted by local environmental and/or health legislation.
(b) Solder (PWC05-058 and PWC05-029) damaged area overlapping by 0.125 in.
(3.18 mm).
(c) Clean area using trichloroethane (PWC11-002) or degreasing solvent

(PWC11-032).

72-01-20 Page 802

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Blend area with abrasive cloth (PWC05-101). Repeat steps (b) and (c), as
required.
(e) Check continuity and insulation (Ref. Inspection/Check).
(2) Areas exceeding a length of 0.375 in. (9.52 mm) but not exceeding a length of
1.0 in. (25.4 mm) may be repaired providing the finished repair will be at least
0.5 in. (12.70 mm) from nearest connector, flange or existing repair, as follows:
(a) Cut off all loose strands of braiding around damaged area.
(b) Wrap insulating tape (PWC05-066) around harness covering all of the
damaged area as shown (Ref. Fig. 801).
(c) Wrap repaired area with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295) as shown.

Hold wrapping wire snugly along length of harness braid beginning from the
left. Starting at opposite end, wrap wire tightly and uniformly over harness braid
and repaired area.
NOTE: Ensure that wire overlaps tape and contacts harness braid at each
end of repair.
(d) When approximately two-thirds of wrapping length is completed, allow short

end of loop to remain exposed. Continue wrapping wire to complete remaining
distance, shown as 1⁄3X.
(e) After final turn of wrapping, insert wire A through loop as shown. Cut off surplus
end B of wire so that length is approximately one-third of repair length. Pull
loop end C until wire at A is snug and end B of wire has just disappeared
underneath final turn of wrappings. Then cut wire end C flush.
(f) Check continuity and insulation (Ref. Inspection/Check).
72-01-20 Page 803

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSULATING TAPE
B X
1/3 X
C
C4960C
Harness Braid Repair
Figure 801
72-01-20 Page 804

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General

engine air system.
WARNING: WEAR GOGGLES WHEN REMOVING LOCKWIRE.

TOUCHES BARE SKIN.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CHAFING/RUBBING, ENSURE NEWLY INSTALLED TUBES DO
NOT TOUCH ADJACENT COMPONENTS. MINIMUM CLEARANCE IS 0.125
IN. (3.175 mm).
NOTE: 1. Lubricate packings and threads with engine oil (PWC03-001), unless
otherwise specified.
NOTE: 2. In the event of tube replacement due to cracks or indication of cracks, it is

recommended to perform a borescope inspection on rotating assemblies (LP,
HP and PT) (Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK), to eliminate vibration
as a possible source of tube damage.
Item No. Name
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC09-010 Sealant, Silicone Rubber
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
72-01-30 Page 401

AIR SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Aug 13/2004
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Name
Screwdriver, Standard
5. P3 and Overspeed Governor Pressure Sensing Tubes (Ref. Fig. 401)
A. Removal
(1) Remove tube assembly (1).
(2) Remove tube assembly (10).
(3) Remove nuts (2), bolts (3, 4) and clamp assemblies (8, 9).
(4) Remove bolts (5), tube assembly (6) and gasket (7). Discard gasket.
B. Installation
CAUTION: LUBRICATE P3 TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULE AND TUBE NUT THREADS,

USING A MINIMAL AMOUNT OF OIL (PWC03-001). THIS WILL REDUCE
STRESS ON THE P3 TUBE ASSEMBLY. EXCESSIVE STRESS CAN
OCCUR WHEN THE FERRULE AND TUBE NUT THREADS ARE NOT
LUBRICATED.
(1) P3 Pressure Sensing Tube Assemblies
(a) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads, using a minimal amount of oil
(PWC03-001), and install tube assembly (12) as follows:
1 Install gasket (7), tube assembly (6) and bolts (5). Torque bolts 27 to
30 lb.in. (3.05-3.39 Nm).
2 Install clamp assemblies (8, 9), bolts (3, 4) and nuts (2). Torque nuts 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamp assembly of oil pressure tube.
72-01-30 Page 402

AIR SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Jan 16/2004
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: HOLD ASSOCIATED FITTING SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN

TORQUING TUBE NUTS.
CAUTION: ENSURE TUBE ASSEMBLY (1) IS INSTALLED ON THE CORRECT
NIPPLE. PROBLEMS HAVE OCCURRED IN SERVICE DUE TO THIS
TUBE ASSEMBLY BEING CONNECTED TO THE PY NIPPLE.
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULE AND TUBE NUT THREADS,
USING A MINIMAL AMOUNT OF OIL (PWC03-001). THIS WILL
REDUCE STRESS ON THE TUBE ASSEMBLY. EXCESSIVE STRESS
CAN OCCUR WHEN THE FERRULE AND TUBE NUT THREADS
ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
(b) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads, using a minimal amount of oil
(PWC03-001) and install tube assembly (1). Torque tube nuts 90 to 100 lb.in.
(10.17-11.29 Nm). Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
CAUTION: LUBRICATE PY TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULE AND TUBE NUT THREADS,

STRESS ON THE TUBE ASSEMBLY. EXCESSIVE STRESS CAN
LUBRICATED.
TORQUING TUBE NUTS.
(2) Overspeed Governor Pressure Sensing Tube Assembly
(a) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads, using a minimal amount of oil
(PWC03-001), and install tube assembly (10).
(b) Torque tube nuts 135 to 150 lb.in. (15.26-16.95 Nm). Secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
6. Inlet Air Pressure Sensing Tube (Ref. Fig. 402)
A. Removal
(1) Remove bolts (2) and tube assembly (1). Discard packing (3).
B. Installation
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULES AND TUBE NUT THREADS,

LUBRICATED.
(1) Lubricate packing (3) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on tube assembly (1).
72-01-30 Page 403

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
10
2
7
3 9
6
6
C39134A
P3 and Overspeed Governor Pressure Sensing Tube Assemblies - Removal/Installation
Figure 401
72-01-30 Page 404

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Tube Assembly
2. Nut
3. Bolt
4. Bolt
5. Bolt
6. Tube Assembly
7. Gasket
8. Clamp Assembly
9. Clamp Assembly
10. Tube Assembly
CAUTION: HOLD ADJACENT FITTING SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN

TORQUING TUBE NUT.
(2) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads using a minimal amount of oil (PWC03-001),
and install tube assembly (1) and bolts (2). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.06-4.52 Nm).
(3) Torque tube nuts 90 to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.30 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
7. No. 3 and 4 Bearing Cavity Pressure Sensing Tube (Ref. Fig. 403)
A. Removal
(1) Remove nuts (2), bolts (1), clamps (3) and grommets (4).
(2) Remove bolts (5) and tube assembly (6) and packing (7). Discard packing.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (7) and install on tube assembly (6).

LUBRICATED.
CAUTION: HOLD TEE SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING TUBE NUT.
(2) Lubricate tube assembly ferrule and tube nut thread, using a minimal amount of oil
(PWC03-001), and install tube assembly and bolts (5). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm) and tube nut 90 to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.30 Nm). Secure tube nut with
lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
72-01-30 Page 405

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C26647
Inlet Air Pressure Sensing Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 402
72-01-30 Page 406

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 402
1. Tube
2. Bolt
3. Packing
(3) Install grommets (4), clamps (3), bolts (1) and nuts (2). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamp and grommet of the electrical wiring harness and clamp
assembly of No. 3, 4 and 5 bearing oil pressure tube.
8. P3 Bleed Air Boss Insulation (Ref. Fig. 404)
A. Removal
(1) Cut lockwire and remove clamp (1)
(2) Remove insulation blankets (2, 3).
(3) Ensure temporary blanking cover is installed on open hole in engine.
B. Installation
(1) Install insulation blankets (2, 3).
(2) Install clamp (1) and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295) as shown.
9. Switching Valve-to-rear Inlet Case Sealing Air Tube (Ref. Fig. 405)
A. Removal
(1) Remove nuts (7, 10), bolts (6, 9) and clamp assembly (8).
(2) Remove bolts (2).
(3) Remove bolts (4).
(4) Remove tube (1) . Discard gaskets (3, 5).
B. Installation
(1) Install gaskets (3, 5), tube (1) and bolts (2, 4). Torque bolts (4) 62 to 72 lb.in.
(7.01-8.14 Nm) and bolts (2) 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(2) Install clamp assembly (8), bolt (6) and nuts (7). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(3) Install bolts (9) and nuts (10). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamp assemblies of T6 trim cable at bolts (9).
72-01-30 Page 407

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7 CHECK VALVE
TUBE
2 1
3 4
3 4 No. 3, 4 & 5
OIL PRESSURE
TUBE
C63454
No. 3 and 4 Bearing Cavity Pressure Sensing Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 403
72-01-30 Page 408

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 403
1. Bolt
2. Nut
3. Clamp
4. Grommet (ST3023-04)
5. Bolt
6. Tube Assembly
7. Packing
10. Oil Check Valve Air Pressure Tube (Ref. Fig. 406)
A. Removal
(1) Cut the lockwire securing tube nuts at both ends of tube.
(2) Remove nuts (2, 7) and bolts (3, 6), clamp (4) and grommet (5).
(3) Disconnect tube nuts at both ends of tube and remove tube assembly (1).
(4) If required, remove elbow (8), nut (9), backup ring (10) and packing (11). Discard
backup ring and packing.
B. Installation
(1) If removed, install elbow (8), nut (9), backup ring (10) and packing (11) according to
standard procedure (Ref. 72-00-00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULES AND TUBE NUT THREADS,

LUBRICATED.
CAUTION: HOLD ASSOCIATED FITTINGS SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN
TORQUING TUBE NUTS.
(2) Lubricate tube assembly ferrule and tube nut thread, using a minimal amount of oil
(PWC03-001), and install tube assembly (1). Torque tube nuts 90 to 100 lb.in.
(10.17-11.30 Nm) and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
(3) Torque nut (9) 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm) and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089)
or (PWC05-295).
NOTE: Metal-to-metal contact between nut (9) and boss must be obtained without
exceeding recommended torque, and there must be no extrusion of
packing or backup ring.
72-01-30 Page 409

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VIEW A
LOCKWIRE ARRANGEMENT
LOOKING REARWARD
C63239
P3 Bleed Air Boss Insulation - Removal/Installation
Figure 404
72-01-30 Page 410

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 404
1. Clamp
2. Insulation Blanket
3. Insulation Blanket
(4) Install clamp (4), grommet (5), bolts (3, 6) and nuts (2, 7). Torque nut 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: 1. Include clamp of motive fuel flow ejector tube at bolt (3).
NOTE: 2. Include clamps of electrical wiring harness at bolts (6).
11. Bleed Valve Air Supply Tube Assembly (Ref. Fig. 407)
A. Removal
(1) Remove nut (1) and bolt (2).
(2) Cut lockwire at both ends of tube assembly (3).
(3) Loosen tube nuts and remove tube assembly.
(4) If required, remove clamp (4).
B. Installation

OCCUR WHEN FERRULE AND TUBE NUT THREADS ARE NOT
LUBRICATED.
(1) Lubricate ferrules and tube nuts using a minimal amount of oil (PWC03-001) and
install tube assembly (1).
(2) Tighten tube nuts 90 to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.29 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
(3) If required, install clamp (4).
(4) Install nut (1) and bolt (2). Torque nut 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
12. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Assembly (IBV) (Ref. Fig. 408)
A. Removal
(1) Remove/disconnect airframe components, as required (Ref. AMM).
(2) Remove/disconnect air supply tube (1) (Ref. Para. 11.).
(3) Remove/disconnect electrical harness (2) (Ref. 72-01-10).
72-01-30 Page 411

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
10 9
1 2
5 10
9
3
10
10
C26649
Switching Valve-to-Rear Inlet Case Air Sealing Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 405
72-01-30 Page 412

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 405
1. Tube Assembly
2. Bolt
3. Gasket
4. Bolt
5. Gasket
6. Bolt
7. Nut
8. Clamp Assembly
9. Bolt
10. Nut
(4) Remove bolts (3) and washers (4).
(5) Remove IBV assembly (5) and gasket (6). Discard gasket.
B. Installation
(1) Install gasket (6), IBV assembly (5), washers (4) and bolts (3),. Torque bolts 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(2) Install/connect air supply tube (1) (Ref. Para. 11.).
(3) Install/connect electrical harness (2) (Ref. 72-01-10).
(4) Install/connect airframe components, as required (Ref. AMM).
13. Intercompressor Bleed Valve (IBV) Servo Valve (Ref. Fig. 409)
A. Removal
(1) Remove nuts (1), washers (2), bolts (3), servo valve (4) and packing (5). Discard
packing.
(2) Remove metering plug (6) using a standard screwdriver. Record class number.
NOTE: Metering plug is a classified component. It is calibrated to suit each

engine. Ensure same class is installed as recorded in this step.
(3) Remove reducer (7) and packing (8). Discard packing.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (5) with a light film of engine oil (PWC03-001).
(2) Install packing (5), servo valve (4), washers (2), bolts (3) and nuts (1). Torque nuts
36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
72-01-30 Page 413

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9
1
10
TO P10
11
7
6
2
5 4 3
C30272B
Oil Check Valve Air Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 406
72-01-30 Page 414

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 406
1. Tube Assembly
2. Nut
3. Bolt
4. Clamp
5. Grommet
6. Bolt
7. Nut
8. Elbow
9. Nut
10. Backup Ring
11. Packing
(3) Lubricate packing (9) with a light film of engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on reducer
(7).
(4) Install reducer, torque 40 to 50 lb.in. (4.52-5.65 Nm).
(5) Lubricate classified metering plug (10) and install in reducer. Torque 10 to 15 lb.in.
(1.13-1.69 Nm).
NOTE: Metering plug is a classified component. It is calibrated for each engine.

Ensure same class is installed as recorded (Ref. Subpara. A., step (2)).
(6) Install/connect airframe components, as required (Ref. AMM).
14. Intercompressor Bleed Valve (IBV) Servo Valve Screen (Ref. Fig. 410)
A. Removal
CAUTION: ENSURE PACKING GROOVE IS NOT DAMAGED WHEN REMOVING

SCREEN.
(1) Using minimum amount of force necessary, press a 0.125 in. (3.175 mm) diameter
plastic (or equivalent soft material) rod against the center of screen (1) sufficient to
deform and allow the screen to come out of its seat in housing (2).
B. Installation
(1) Position screen (1) with fine mesh showing, opposite servo valve housing (2) seat.
(2) Using minimum amount of force necessary, press screen until it bottoms in
seat.
(3) Verify screen is secure and not loose.
72-01-30 Page 415

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
4
C63241
Bleed Valve Air Supply Tube Assembly - Removal/Installation
Figure 407
72-01-30 Page 416

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 407
1. Nut
1. Bolt
1. Tube Assembly
1. Clamp
15. P2.5 Check Valve Assembly (Ref. Fig. 411)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the airframe duct from the P2.5 check valve assembly (1) (Ref. AMM).
(2) Slacken coupling assembly (2) nut.
(3) Open and remove coupling assembly (2).
(4) Remove the P2.5 check valve assembly (1) from the P2.5 adapter (4). Discard
gasket (3).
(5) Remove bolts (5), P2.5 adapter (4) and gasket (6). Discard gasket.
B. Installation
(1) Install gasket (6), P2.5 adapter (4) and bolts (5). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(2) Install gasket (3) at mounting face of P2.5 adapter (4).
(3) Position P2.5 check valve assembly (1) on P2.5 adapter with gasket centered in
face recess and engage coupling assembly (2).
(4) Torque coupling assembly (2) nut 75 to 100 lb.in. (8.5-11.3 Nm).
(5) Connect airframe duct to P2.5 check valve assembly (Ref. AMM).
16. Intercompressor Case (ICC) Transfer Tube (Ref. Fig. 412).
A. Removal
(1) Remove the intercompressor bleed air valve assembly (Ref. Para. 12. A.).
(2) Remove the P2.5 check valve assembly (Ref. Para. 15. A.).
(3) Remove the transfer tube from the intercompressor case and discard packings.
(4) Clean the transfer tube cavity in the intercompressor case with petrolium solvent
(PWC11-027)
72-01-30 Page 417

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
4 5
C63272
Intercompressor Bleed Valve Assembly - Removal/Installation
Figure 408
72-01-30 Page 418

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 408
1. Air Supply Tube

2. Electrical Harness
3. Bolt
4. Washer
5. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Assembly
6. Gasket
7. IBV Servo Valve
8. P2.5 Bleed Air Adapter
B. Installation
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER TUBE AND THE HOUSING CAVITY ARE FREE
OF OLD CURED SILICONE. REMOVE OLD COMPOUND AND CLEAN TUBE
AND INTERCOMPRESSOR CAVITY WITH PETROLIUM SOLVENT.
(1) Apply a thin layer of (PWC09-010) to the inside lower fillet of the housing.
(2) Lubricate the new packings with engine oil, (PWC03-001) and install on the transfer
tube.
(3) Install the transfer tube in the intercompressor case cavity. Inspect mating surfaces
for excess sealant.
NOTE: Remove all excess sealant visible with a clean rag when inspecting the
mating surface between the tube and the housing
(4) Install the P2.5 check valve assembly (Ref. Para. 15. B.).
(5) Install the intercompressor bleed air valve assembly (Ref. Para. 12. B.).
72-01-30 Page 419

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
9
7
6
3 4
C63274
Intercompressor Bleed Valve Assembly Servo Valve - Removal/Installation
Figure 409
72-01-30 Page 420

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 409
1. Nut
2. Washer
3. Bolt
4. Servo Valve
5. Packing
6. Metering Plug
7. Reducer
8. Packing
9. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Assembly
72-01-30 Page 421

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COARSE SCREEN
FINE SCREEN
C21126
IBV Servo Valve Screen - Removal/Installation
Figure 410
72-01-30 Page 422

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 410
1. Screen
2. Housing
72-01-30 Page 423

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
4
FWD 6
VIEW A
COUPLING INSTALLATION
C63280
P2.5 Check Valve and Bleed Air Adapter - Removal/Installation
Figure 411
72-01-30 Page 424

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 411
1. P2.5 Check Valve Assembly

2. Coupling Assembly
3. Gasket
4. P2.5 Adapter
5. Bolt
6. Gasket
72-01-30 Page 425

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 (REF.)
C93622
Intercompressor Case Transfer Tube - Removal/Installaion (Typical)
72-01-30 Page 426

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 412
1. Intercompressor Bleed Air Valve Assembly (Ref.)

2. Packing.
3. Transfer Tube.
4. Packing.
72-01-30 Page 427

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRANSFER TUBE
ENSURE NO SEALANT
CONTAMINATES THIS
AREA
PACKING
HOUSING
SEALANT SEALANT
(PWC09−010) (PWC09−010)
NO EXCESS SEALANT ALLOWED

INSIDE LOWER FILLET
C93709
Intercompressor Case Transfer Tube - Removal/Installaion (Typical)
72-01-30 Page 428

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
A. These instructions provide the information necessary for the adjustment/test of engine
air system components.
Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Adjustment/Test
A. Servo Valve Torque Motor
(1) After installation or at ground test, check servo valve torque motor as follows:
NOTE: Checking the torque motor requires two persons: one in the cockpit
and one beside the engine.
(a) Switch on the electrical power (Ref. AMM).
(b) Open starter/generator circuit breaker (Ref. AMM) and apply safety tag.
(c) Switch on EEC. Listen for the torque motor operating and opening the servo
valve installed on the intercompressor bleed valve.
(d) Switch off the electrical power (Ref. AMM).
(e) Remove the safety tag and close the starter/generator circuit breaker (Ref.
AMM).
B. Intercompressor Bleed Valve (IBV)
(1) After installation or at ground test, check intercompressor bleed valve as follows:
(a) Start the engine (Ref. AMM).
72-01-30 Page 501

AIR SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST Jul 07/2000
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Select EEC to Manual, then slowly accelerate (taking not less than 30
seconds) to a required NH, equivalent to a normalized NH of 84%. Allow engine
to stabilize and record NL.
NOTE: 1. Required NH is NH modified to compensate for effect of outside air

temperature (OAT) (Kelvin or Rankine scale) and is obtained using
Table 501.
NOTE: 2. On some cold days, Flight Idle (FI) will result in an actual NH greater
than required NH. In this case, set FI, do not retard the Power Lever
(PL) since the IBV is commanded to close just below FI.
(c) Set engine to a required NH, equivalent to a normalized NH of 91.5%. Allow

engine to stabilize and record the NL.
CAUTION: IF THE ‘‘EMERG. EEC’’ IS PULLED FIRST, THE 28V SIGNAL GOING
TO THE EEC IS LOST RESULTING IN AN UPTRIM OF THE
ENGINE.
(d) Set engine to flight idle and switch off the EEC by pulling out EEC circuit
breaker (Ref. AMM).
NOTE: 1. Selecting preferred mode does not close the intercompressor bleed
valve. Power must be removed from the EEC to close the valve.
NOTE: 2. ‘‘NORMAL EEC’’ circuit breaker to be pulled first followed by

‘‘EMERG. EEC’’ circuit breaker (Ref. AMM).
(e) Set engine to a required NH, equivalent to a normalized NH of 84%. Allow

engine to stabilize. Record the NL.
NOTE: The difference in NL recorded with the EEC on (Ref. step (b)) and
EEC off must be between 3 and 6%.
(f) Set engine to a required NH, equivalent to a normalized NH of 91.5%. Allow

engine to stabilize and record the NL.
NOTE: The difference in NL recorded with the EEC on (Ref. step (c)) and the
EEC off must be less than 0.5%.
CAUTION: REMOVE SERVO VALVE ASSEMBLY (REF. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

AND ENSURE INTEGRAL FILTER IS CLEAN BEFORE CHANGING
METERING PLUG. CLEAN DIRTY FILTERS (REF. CLEANING/
PAINTING) AND REPEAT STEPS (b) THROUGH (f) TO CONFIRM A
CHANGE IN ORIFICE SIZE IS NECESSARY.
(g) If the difference in NLs in step (e) or step (f) is larger than specified, replace
metering plug with one having an orifice size 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) larger. In
step (e), if the difference is smaller than specified, replace plug with one having
an orifice size 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) smaller.
(h) After a metering plug has been replaced, steps (b) through (f) must be
repeated.
72-01-30 Page 502

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) Switch EEC on and stop engine (Ref. AMM).
TABLE 501, Effect of Outside Air Temperature (OAT) on Required NH
OAT Required NH Equivalent Required NH ±0.5% Equivalent

to NH of 84% to NH of 91.5%
°F °C Normalized Normalized
-58 -50 74 80.2
-49 -45 75 81.5
-40 -40 76 82.3
-31 -35 76 83.0
-22 -30 77 84.1
-13 -25 78 84.8
-4 -20 79 85.5
5 -15 80 86.3
14 -10 81 87.2
23 -5 82 88.0
32 0 82 88.7
41 5 82 89.9
50 10 83 90.7
59 15 84 91.5
68 20 85 92.0
77 25 85 93.0
86 30 86 93.8
95 35 87 94.3
104 40 87 95.0
113 45 88 95.9
122 50 89 96.9
(2) If replacement of the metering plug does not bring the intercompressor bleed valve
within limits check:
(a) The tube connecting the LP diffuser exit duct to the bleed valve for air leaks. If
necessary, rectify the air leak and retest the valve.
(b) The valve cover gasket for extrusion. If the gasket is extruded, an air leak
occurs and the valve must be returned to an approved overhaul facility for
gasket replacement.
NOTE: The valve will remain open at a higher NH or not close if an air leak
occurs (Ref. steps (a) and (b)).
72-01-30 Page 503/504

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General

components of the engine air system.

Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
5. Inspection
A. General
(1) In addition to the details specifically mentioned, inspect for obvious damage, cracks
and defective threads.
(2) Replace dented tubes if:
(a) Dent greater than 10 percent of outside diameter of tube.
(b) More than one dent for 12-inch (305 mm) length of tube.
(c) Dent in bend of tube.
B. Intercompressor Bleed Valve
(1) Inspect intercompressor bleed valve metering plug for obstructed orifice (Ref.
Cleaning/Painting).
C. Intercompressor Case Transfer Tube
(1) Inspect the intercompressor case transfer tube for surface damage as follows:
72-01-30 Page 601

AIR SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK Jan 16/2004
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Remove local surface damage from 0.005 to 0.010 in. (0.12 to 0.25 mm) deep
maximum.
NOTE: Chamfers and radii must be the same as they were before the
damage.
(b) Measure the lenght of the transfer tube. Replace the transfer tube if its less
then 1.854 in. (47.09 mm).
(c) Measure the depth of the packing grooves. Replace the transfer the tube if the
grooves are less then 0.050 in. (1.27 mm) deep.
6. Check
A. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Torque Motor
(1) Check continuity, using ohmmeter
(a) Between pins A and C, 133 to 161 ohms.
(b) Between pins B and C, less than 100 milliohms.
(c) Between pin F and ground, less than 100 milliohms.
(2) Check insulation resistance, using test set at 45 volts AC or DC.
(a) Between pins A and F, 2 megohms minimum.
(b) Between pins B and F, 2 megohms minimum.
(c) Between pins C and F, 2 megohms minimum.
72-01-30 Page 602

AIR SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK Jan 16/2004
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING
1. General

components of the engine air system.
Item No. Name
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Standard Wooden Pick
5. Cleaning
A. General

FOR CONSUMABLE MATERIALS INFORMATION SUCH AS:
HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS, PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS,
FIRE, EXPLOSION, REACTIVITY, HEALTH HAZARD DATA,
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE HANDLING, USE AND CONTROL
MEASURES.
PRESSURE TO 29 PSIG (200 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES OR
(1) With the exception of the items specifically mentioned, clean all parts using
petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-031) and blow dry with clean
compressed air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
NOTE: Tergit (PWC11-031) is recommended as an alternative to petroleum

solvent where the use of this product is restricted by local environmental
and/or health legislation.
72-01-30 Page 701

AIR SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING Jan 16/2004
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Servo Valve Screen
(1) Immerse screen in petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-031) for 5

minutes minimum.
NOTE: Solvent or cleaner must just cover screen.
(2) Remove screen from solvent or cleaner and shake to dislodge dirt.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR TO DRY SCREEN.

(3) Allow screen to stand in a clean atmosphere to dry.
C. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Metering Plug
(1) Clean the metering plug orifice with a standard wooden pick . Remove any debris
with clean compressed air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
D. Intercompressor Case Cavity and Transfer Tube.
(1) Clean the ICC cavity and the transfer tube with petroleum solvent(PWC11-027) or
equivalent.
NOTE: You can use a plastic or wooden scraper to remove cured silicone on the
ICC cavity and the transfer tube.
72-01-30 Page 702

AIR SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING Jan 16/2004
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS
1. General
A. These instructions provide the information necessary to carry out the approved repairs
of components of the engine air system.

Item No. Name
PWC05-019 Compound, Lapping
PWC05-061 Cloth, Abrasive, Coated, Crocus
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Dies
Lapping Plate
Swiss Files
Taps
5. Approved Repairs
A. Tubes
(1) Blend out nicks, scratches, pits and corrosion not exceeding 0.005 in. (0.127 mm)
deep, provided blended areas do not exceed one-half square inch (322.6 sq. mm)
and are separated by one-half inch (12.70 mm) minimum undamaged surface.
(2) Use abrasive cloth (PWC05-101) followed by polishing with crocus cloth
(PWC05-061).
(3) Inspect tubes using fluorescent penetrant inspection method.
72-01-30 Page 801

AIR SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Housings
(1) Blend out nicks, scratches, burrs and corrosion using abrasive cloth (PWC05-101)
followed by polishing with crocus cloth (PWC05-061).
(2) Chase damaged threads using swiss files or appropriate tap or die.
(3) Replace defective inserts and studs (Ref. 72-00-00, APPROVED REPAIRS).
(4) Repair anodic film surfaces on aluminum (Ref. 72-00-00, APPROVED REPAIRS).
(5) Dress mating surfaces using lapping plate and lapping compound (PWC05-019).
72-01-30 Page 802

AIR SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SYSTEM - SERVICING
1. General
A. These instructions provide information necessary for servicing components of the engine
fuel system.
B. Lubricate packings with engine oil (PWC03-001), unless otherwise specified.
WARNING: FUEL IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. DO NOT BREATHE VAPORS. USE IN

WELL-VENTILATED AREA FREE FROM SPARKS, FLAME OR HOT
SURFACES. WEAR SPLASH GOGGLES, SOLVENT-RESISTANT GLOVES
AND OTHER PROTECTIVE GEAR. IN CASE OF EYE CONTACT, FLUSH WITH
WATER AND SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION. IN CASE OF SKIN CONTACT,
WASH WITH SOAP AND WATER.
WARNING: WEAR GOGGLES WHEN REMOVING, INSTALLING OR CUTTING
LOCKWIRE.
Item No. Name
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC05-090 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC32396 Jackscrew
PWC54639 Socket
Not Applicable
5. Fuel Heater Inlet Filter (Ref. Fig. 301)
72-01-40 Page 301

FUEL SYSTEM - SERVICING Mar 03/2000
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CENTERING TABS
CENTERING TABS
5
7
C27055A
Fuel Heater Inlet Filter - Removal/Installation
Figure 301
72-01-40 Page 302

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 301
1. Fuel Heater Assembly

2. Plug
3. Packing
4. Cover
5. Inlet Filter
6. Packing
7. Nut
A. Removal
(1) Remove filter drain plug (2). Discard packing (3).
(2) Allow fuel to drain.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A SCREWDRIVER OR SIMILAR LEVER TO REMOVE

COVER.
(3) Remove nuts (7), cover (4) and filter (5) from fuel heater assembly (1). Discard
packing (6).
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (6) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on cover (4).
(2) Install filter (5) as follows:
CAUTION: FILTER CENTERING TABS MAY BE DISTORTED AT INSTALLATION

IF IMPROPERLY FITTED INSIDE THE BOWL. MAKE SURE
CENTERING TABS SLIDE FREELY INSIDE THE BOWL WHILE
FITTING THE BOWL ON THE FUEL HEATER ADAPTER.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTORQUE THE FUEL HEATER FILTER COVER NUTS.
IF YOU OVERTORQUE THE NUTS, DAMAGE CAN OCCUR TO THE
FUEL HEATER BASE, STUDS AND FILTER COVER. DAMAGE TO
THESE AREAS COULD POSSIBLY CAUSE AN EXTERNAL FUEL
LEAK.
(a) Lubricate filter sealing surfaces with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install with
cover (4) and nuts (7).
(b) Torque nuts 32 to 36 lb.in. (3.62-4.07 Nm).
(3) Lubricate packing (3) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on drain plug (2).
Torque plug 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.34-8.47 Nm) and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089)
or (PWC05-295).
(4) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
72-01-40 Page 303

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Fuel Pump Outlet Filter (Ref. Fig. 302)
A. Removal

(1) Disconnect pressure differential switch electrical connector (Ref. AMM).
(2) Remove nuts (3) and cover (4) using jackscrews (PWC32396). Discard packings
(5).
(3) Remove filter (6) and packings (7, 8). Discard packings.
NOTE: For replacement of pressure differential switch, refer to Removal/Installation.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packings (7, 8) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install in filter (6).
(2) Install filter.
(3) Lubricate packings (5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on cover (4).
(4) Install cover and nuts (3). Torque nuts 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm).
NOTE: Due to stud arrangement, cover fits in only one position on associated
adapter.

(5) Connect pressure differential switch electrical harness connector (Ref. AMM).
7. Fuel Pump Inlet Screen (Ref. Fig. 302)
A. Removal
(1) Remove screen (1) using socket (PWC54639)and packing (2). Discard packing.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on screen (1).
(2) Install screen. Torque 100 to 150 lb.in. (11.30-16.95 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-090).
72-01-40 Page 304

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
72-01-40 Page 305

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
45 ° 45°
MASTER
KEYWAY
ALIGNMENT OF MASTER KEYWAY

VIEW A
3
4
11 5
10 A
7
6
9
8
2
1
C63303
Fuel Pump Filter and Screen - Removal/Installation
Figure 302
72-01-40 Page 306

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 302
1. Inlet Screen
2. Packing
3. Nut
4. Cover
5. Packing
6. Outlet Filter
7. Packing
8. Packing
9. Retaining Ring (Ref.)
10. Pressure Differential Switch (Ref.)
11. Packing (Ref.)
72-01-40 Page 307/308

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
A. These instructions provide information necessary for the replacement of components of

the engine fuel system.
WARNING: FUEL IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. DO NOT BREATHE VAPORS. USE IN

WELL-VENTILATED AREA FREE FROM SPARKS, FLAME OR HOT
SURFACES. WEAR SPLASH GOGGLES, SOLVENT-RESISTANT GLOVES
AND OTHER PROTECTIVE GEAR. IN CASE OF EYE CONTACT, FLUSH WITH
WATER AND SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION. IN CASE OF SKIN CONTACT,
WASH WITH SOAP AND WATER.
LOCKWIRE.
WARNING: GROUND AIRCRAFT/WORKSTAND WHEN PERFORMING FUEL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE.
TOUCHES BARE SKIN.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CHAFING/RUBBING, ENSURE NEWLY INSTALLED TUBE
DOES NOT TOUCH ADJACENT COMPONENTS. MINIMUM CLEARANCE IS
0.125 in. (3.175 mm).
NOTE: In the event of tube replacement due to cracks or indication of cracks, it is
recommended to perform a borescope inspection on rotating assemblies (LP,
HP and PT) (Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK), to eliminate vibration as a
possible source of tube damage.
Item No. Name
PWC04-006 Grease, Corrosion Preventative
72-01-40 Page 401

FUEL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Nov 04/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item No. Name

PWC05-048 Marker, Pen
PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC32396 Jackscrews
PWC37303 Pusher
PWC37442 Locator
PWC38163 Rigging Pins
PWC54021 Template
PWC56489 Stand
PWC56504 Wrench
PWC58145 Wrench
Name Remarks
Bolts (0.190-32 UNJF x 1.375) (4 required)
Bracket (Supplier P/N 3243908) See NOTE
Brush, Soft Bristle
Heat Gun - Thermofit Minigun (with
reflector)
MFC Shipping Base See NOTE
(Supplier P/N 3243907)
NOTE: The shipping base (P/N 3243907) and the bracket (P/N 3243908) are vendor supplied
and can be purchased at the following address:
Air Parts and Supply Company,
12840 SW 84th Avenue Rd.,
Miami, FL 33156
USA
TEL: (305) 235 5401
FAX: (305) 235 8185
72-01-40 Page 402

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Mechanical Fuel Control (MFC) and Fuel Pump Assembly
A. Removal (Fig. 401)
NOTE: It is recommended that the MFC and fuel pump be removed as one assembly,
then separated on the bench.
(1) Disconnect or remove airframe equipment, as required. (Ref. AMM).
WARNING: ENSURE ELECTRICAL POWER IS OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING

RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS.
(2) Disconnect harness plug (P8) (Ref. 72-01-10, REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) and
remove bolts (12).
CAUTION: P3 AND OVERSPEED GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSING TUBES MUST

BE REMOVED FROM THE ENGINE BEFORE THE MFC IS REMOVED.
TUBES HAVE BEEN DAMAGED DUE TO HAVING BEEN LEFT ON THE
ENGINE DURING MFC REMOVAL.
(3) Remove P3 and overspeed governor pressure sensing tubes (Ref. 72-01-30,
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) from MFC.
(4) Remove fuel tubes (Ref. Para. 7.) and drain tube (Ref. Para. 13.) from MFC.
(5) Remove bolts (1), bracket (2) and plate (3).
(6) Push transfer tube (4) into fuel pump (6) as far as possible.
(7) Loosen coupling assembly (7) nut and remove MFC/fuel pump assembly (8).
Discard packings (9, 10).
(8) Remove coupling assembly (7).
(9) Install the MFC/fuel pump assembly (8) on the stand (PWC56489) (11) and secure
with the coupling assembly (7).
(10) Remove transfer tube (4) and packings (5). Discard packings.
B. Disassembly
(1) MFC/Fuel Pump Assembly (Fig. 402)
(a) Remove the nuts (1) and washers (2).
(b) Separate MFC (3) from fuel pump (4). Remove the coupling (5) and the
packings (6). Discard packings.
NOTE: Discard the coupling (5) if worn.
(c) Install the MFC (3) on the shipping base (P/N 3243907) and the bracket (P/N
3243908).
72-01-40 Page 403

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7
9
10
6
ADAPTER
(REF.)
12
5
4
8 5
3
2
1
11
C84026
MFC/Fuel Pump Assembly - Removal/Installation
Figure 401
72-01-40 Page 404

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Bolt
2. Bracket
3. Plate
4. Transfer Tube
5. Packing
6. Fuel Pump
7. Coupling Assembly
8. MFC/Fuel Pump Assembly
9. Packing
10. Packing
11. Stand (PWC56489)
12. Bolt
(d) Use lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295) to attach the MFC levers

together and ensure the levers do not protrude beyond the bracket (P/N
3243908).
NOTE: If required, bracket (P/N 3243908) will need to be removed prior to

lockwiring the levers together. Reinstall bracket after you lockwire,
bracket used to protect levers.
(2) MFC (Fig. 403)
(a) Remove nipples (1) and packings (2). Discard packings.
(b) Remove adapter (7). Discard packing (8).
(c) Loosen nut (3) and remove elbow (4), backup ring (5) and packing (6). Discard
backup ring and packing.
(3) Fuel Pump (Fig. 403)
(a) Remove nipple (9) and packing (10). Discard packing.
C. Assembly
NOTE: All elbow nuts may be torqued after installation of the tube assemblies (Ref.
Sub Para. D.).
(1) Fuel Pump (Fig. 403)
(a) Lubricate packing (10) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on nipple (9).
(b) Install nipple. Torque 38 to 42 lb.in. (4.29-4.75 Nm).
(2) MFC (Fig. 403)
72-01-40 Page 405

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MFC LEVERS
(REF.) 2
STAND
(REF.)
C83999
MFC/Fuel Pump Assembly - Removal/Installation
Figure 402
72-01-40 Page 406

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 402
1. Nut
2. Washer
3. Mechanical Fuel Control (MFC)
4. Fuel Pump
5. Coupling
6. Packing
(a) Lubricate packing (8) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on adapter (7).
Install adapter and torque 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm).
(b) Install elbow (4), nut (3), backup ring (5) and packing (6) (Ref. 72-00-00,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES). Angle of elbow as shown.
(c) Torque nut 38 to 42 lb.in. (4.29-4.75 Nm). Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089)
or (PWC05-295).
NOTE: There must be no extrusion of packing and backup ring.
(d) Lubricate packings (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on nipples (2).
Install nipples and torque 110 to 120 lb.in. (12.43-13.56 Nm).
(3) MFC/Fuel Pump Assembly (Fig. 402)
(a) Lubricate packings (6) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on fuel pump
(4).
(b) Install coupling (5) on fuel pump (4).
CAUTION: ENSURE COUPLING (5) IS INSTALLED PRIOR TO MATING MFC

AND FUEL PUMP. FAILING TO INSTALL COUPLING WILL PRODUCE
AN ENGINE OVERSPEED IN MANUAL MODE OPERATION.
(c) Remove the MFC (3) from the shipping base (P/N 3243907) and the bracket
(P/N 3243908) and install it on the pump (4) with the washers (2) and the nuts
(1). Torque nuts 75 to 85 lb.in. (8.48-9.61 Nm).
D. Installation (Fig. 401)
(1) Loosen coupling assembly (7) nut and remove MFC/fuel pump assembly (8) from
the stand (PWC56489) (11).
(2) Lubricate packings (9, 10) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on fuel pump
(6).
(3) Lubricate mating face, adjacent outer diameter and clamp mating surface of
adapter using grease (PWC04-006).
72-01-40 Page 407

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VIEW A
4 1
7
3
2
5
8
6
C83178A
MFC and Fuel Pump - Disassembly/Assembly
72-01-40 Page 408

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 403
1. Nipple
2. Packing
3. Nut
4. Elbow
5. Backup Ring
6. Packing
7. Adapter
8. Packing
9. Nipple
10. Packing
72-01-40 Page 409

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
VIEW B
FUEL PUMP
(REF.)
B STAND
(REF.)
C84027B
MFC and Fuel Pump - Disassembly/Assembly
72-01-40 Page 410

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DOWEL PIN IN ADAPTER FLANGE MUST BE LOCATED IN COUPLING

SEGMENTS GAP CLOSEST TO TEE BOLT.
(4) Install coupling assembly (7) loosely on adapter.
(5) Align splines of pump drive with engine gearshaft, dowel pin with corresponding
hole in pump flange and install MFC/fuel pump assembly (8).
(6) Torque coupling assembly (7) nut 50 to 65 lb.in. (5.65-7.35 Nm).
(7) Using a teflon drift and a soft hammer, tap coupling (7) as far as possible around
the circumference to ensure it is seated correctly. Retorque coupling nut 50 to
65 lb.in. (5.65-7.35 Nm).
(8) Lubricate packings (5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on transfer tube (4).
(9) Install transfer tube as far into fuel pump (6) as possible.
(10) Slide transfer tube (4) to engage fuel heater.
(11) Install plate (3), bracket (2) and bolts (1). Torque bolts 85 to 95 lb.in. (9.61-10.74 Nm).
(12) If required, connect or tighten airframe equipment. (Ref. AMM).
(13) Connect fuel tubes (Ref. Para. 7.).
(14) Install P3 and overspeed governor pressure sensing tubes (Ref. 72-01-30,
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) to MFC.

CAUTION: ENSURE PLUGS AND RECEPTACLES ARE FREE FROM MOISTURE. IF
NECESSARY, DRY USING HEAT GUN.
(15) Connect harness plug (P8) (Ref. 72-01-10, REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) to MFC.
(16) Secure harness branch at bracket (2) with bolts (12). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(17) If required, carry out a wet motoring run to flush out any preservation fluid (Ref.
AMM).
6. Power Fuel Control and Condition Fuel Control Arms (Ref. Fig. 404)
A. Rigging
(1) DELETED
72-01-40 Page 411

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DELETED
C00000
Power Fuel Control and Condition Fuel Control Arms - Rigging
Figure 404
72-01-40 Page 412

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Fuel Tube Assemblies (Ref. Fig. 405)
A. MFCU-to-Oil Cooler Fuel Tube Assemblies
(1) Removal
CAUTION: HOLD ADJACENT FITTINGS SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN

REMOVING TUBE NUTS.
(a) Unscrew tube nuts and remove tube assemblies (1, 3).
(b) Remove nut (4), clamp assembly (5) and bolt (6).
(c) Unscrew tube nut and remove tube assembly (7).
(2) Installation

TORQUING TUBE NUTS.
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULES AND TUBE NUT
THREADS, USING A MINIMAL AMOUNT OF ENGINE OIL
(PWC03-001). THIS WILL REDUCE STRESS ON THE TUBE
ASSEMBLY. EXCESSIVE STRESS CAN OCCUR WHEN THE
FERRULE AND TUBE THREADS ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
(a) Lubricate ferrules and tube nut threads of tubes (1, 3, 7), using a minimum
amount of engine oil (PWC03-001).
(b) Install tubes (1, 3, 7). Torque tube nuts 270 to 300 lb.in. (30.51-33.90 Nm).
(c) Install clamp assembly (5), bolt (6) and nut (4). Torque nut 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(d) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
B. Oil Cooler to Dump Valve Fuel Tube Assemblies
(1) Removal
(a) Remove nuts (10, 15), bolts (11, 16, 17), spacer (18) and clamp assemblies
(12, 19).

REMOVING TUBE NUT.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE LOCKWIRE SECURING THRUST PIN (23) TO
TUBE NUT.
(b) Unscrew tube nuts and remove tubes assemblies (13, 21).
(c) Remove transfer tube (23) and packings (24). Discard packings.
72-01-40 Page 413

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OUTER END OF
THRUST PIN 2
25
C
DETAIL A
VIEW C
21
24
3
22 A
15
19
20
23
15 11
5
16 16 14
12 8
15 6
9
7
4
18 15 10
20
10
11
13
16 15
12
17 21
16 20
20
16
C63309
Fuel Tube Assemblies - Removal/Installation
Figure 405
72-01-40 Page 414

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 405
1. Tube Assembly
2. MFCU (Ref.)
3. Tube Assembly
4. Nut
5. Clamp Assembly
6. Bolt
7. Tube Assembly
8. Oil Cooler (Ref.)
9. Exciter Mounting Plate (Ref.)
10. Nut
11. Bolt
12. Clamp Assembly
13. Tube Assembly
14. Oil Filter Cover (Ref.)
15. Nut
16. Bolt
17. Bolt
18. Spacer
19. Clamp Assembly
20. Ignition Cables (Ref.)
21. Tube Assembly
22. Dump Valve
23. Transfer Tube
24. Packing
25. Thrust Pin
(2) Installation
(a) Lubricate packings (24) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on transfer
tube (23).
(b) Install transfer tube in flow divider and dump valve (22).
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULES AND TUBE NUT

THREADS, USING A MINIMAL AMOUNT OF ENGINE OIL
(PWC03-001). THIS WILL REDUCE STRESS ON THE TUBE
ASSEMBLY. EXCESSIVE STRESS CAN OCCUR WHEN THE
FERRULE AND TUBE THREADS ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
(c) Lubricate ferrules and tube nut threads, using a minimum amount of engine oil
(PWC03-001), and install tube assemblies (13, 21). Torque tube nuts
fingertight.
NOTE: Do not lubricate large tube nut on tube assembly (21).
72-01-40 Page 415

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Install clamp assemblies (12, 19), bolts (11, 16, 17), ignition cable (20) clamps,
spacer (18) and nuts (10, 15). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).

TORQUING TUBE NUTS.
CAUTION: ENSURE LOCKWIRE SECURES THRUST PIN (23) TO THE
COUPLING NUT.
(e) Torque tube nut at flow divider and dump valve (20) 320 to 350 lb.in.
(36.16-39.55 Nm). Secure tube nut with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295)
to two of the bolts securing the flow divider to the gas generator case.
(f) Torque remaining tube nuts 270 to 300 lb.in. (30.51-33.90 Nm). Secure with
(g) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
8. Fuel Drain Valves (Ref. Fig. 406)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect airframe drain (Ref. AMM).
(2) Holding associated fittings securely, loosen tube nuts and remove tube (1).
(3) Holding associated fittings securely, loosen tube (2) nuts and remove tube.
(4) Loosen nut (4) and remove elbow (3). Discard gasket (5).
(5) Loosen nut (7) and remove drain valve assembly (6) and cover (9). Discard gaskets
(8).
(6) Remove retaining ring (10), valve (11) and spring (12) from adapter (13).
(7) Remove drain valve assembly (14). Discard gasket (15).
(8) Remove retaining ring (16), valve (17) and spring (18) from adapter (19).
B. Installation
(1) Install spring (18), valve (17) (flat surface away from spring) and retaining ring (16)
in adapter (19).
(2) Install valve assembly (14) and gasket (15). Torque 450 to 550 lb.in.
(50.85-62.15 Nm).
(3) Install spring (12), valve (11) (flat surface away from spring) and retaining ring (10)
in adapter (13).
(4) Install nut (7) on valve assembly (6).
72-01-40 Page 416

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Install gaskets (8), cover (9), and valve assembly (6). Torque nut (7) 450 to
550 lb.in. (50.85-62.15 Nm).
(6) Secure nut (7) to bolt in flange K with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).

TORQUING TUBE NUT.
CAUTION: LUBRICATE SMALL TUBE NUT AND ASSOCIATED FERRULE USING
ENGINE OIL (PWC03-001). DO NOT LUBRICATE LARGE TUBE NUT.
THIS WILL REDUCE STRESS ON THE TUBE ASSEMBLY. EXCESSIVE
STRESS CAN OCCUR WHEN THE FERRULE AND TUBE NUT THREADS
ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
install tube assembly (2). Torque both ends fingertight, then 270 to 300 lb.in.
(30.51-33.90 Nm) at valve assembly (6).
(8) Install nut (4), gasket (5) and elbow (3). Torque nut fingertight.
install tube assembly (1).
(10) Torque nut (7) 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm).
CAUTION: HOLD ASSOCIATED FITTING SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING

TUBE NUTS.
(11) Torque tube nuts at both ends of tube assembly (1) and at front end of tube
assembly (2) 90 to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.30 Nm).
(12) Secure nut (4), valve assembly (14) and tube assembly (1, 2) nuts with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
9. Flow Divider and Dump Valve (Ref. Fig. 407)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect airframe drain (Ref. AMM).

UNSCREWING TUBE NUT.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE LOCKWIRE SECURING THRUST PIN (12) TO TUBE
NUT.
(2) Disconnect fuel tube assembly (1).
72-01-40 Page 417

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9
15
8
5 16 7
17
4 14 10
18
11
19
12
3 6
13
C38630
Fuel Drain Valves - Removal/Installation
Figure 406
72-01-40 Page 418

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 406
1. Tube Assembly
2. Tube Assembly
3. Elbow
4. Nut
5. Gasket
6. Drain Valve Assembly
7. Nut
8. Gasket
9. Cover
10. Retaining Ring
11. Valve
12. Spring
13. Adapter
14. Drain Valve Assembly
15. Gasket
16. Retaining Ring
17. Valve
18. Spring
19. Adapter
CAUTION: ENSURE POSITION OF INLET ADAPTER/GAS GENERATOR CASE

GASKET IS NOT AFFECTED BY REMOVAL OF FLOW DIVIDER AND
DUMP VALVE. LEAKS HAVE OCCURRED WHEN THIS GASKET WAS
DISTURBED WHEN FLOW DIVIDER AND DUMP VALVE WERE
REMOVED.
(3) Remove bolts (2) and valve (3) . Discard packings (4, 5).
(4) Remove nipple (6) and packing (7). Discard packing and backup ring.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packings (9) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on transfer tube (8).
(2) Install transfer tube in valve assembly (3).
(3) Lubricate packings (4, 5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on valve (3).
(4) Install valve (3) and bolts (2). Torque bolts 27 to 30 lb.in. (3.05-3.39 Nm). Secure
with lockwire after tube assembly (1) tube nut is torqued.
NOTE: Do not lubricate bolts.
72-01-40 Page 419

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D
10 FW
4
B
6
OUTER END OF 7
THRUST PIN
9
2
VIEW B
C65800
Flow Divider and Dump Valve - Removal/Installation
Figure 407
72-01-40 Page 420

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 407
1. Fuel Tube Assembly

2. Bolt
3. Valve Assembly
4. Packing
5. Packing
6. Nipple
7. Packing
8. Transfer Tube
9. Packing
10. Thrust Pin
CAUTION: HOLD VALVE ASSEMBLY SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING

TUBE NUT.
(5) Connect fuel tube assembly (1). Torque tube nut 320 to 350 lb.in. (36.16-39.55 Nm).
NOTE: Do not lubricate thread.
CAUTION: ENSURE LOCKWIRE SECURES THRUST PIN (10) TO THE TUBE NUT.
(6) Secure tube nut and dump valve bolts using lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
Tube nut to be lockwired to adjacent bolts on dump valve.
(7) Install nipple (6) and packing (7).

TORQUING NIPPLE
(8) Torque nipple 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm) and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089)
or (PWC05-295).
(9) Connect airframe drain (Ref. AMM).
72-01-40 Page 421

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10. Fuel Manifold and Adapters (Ref. Fig. 409)
A. Removal
CAUTION: TAKE EXTREME CARE WHEN HANDLING INSTALLED FUEL MANIFOLDS.

DO NOT PULL OR USE AS A HAND HOLD WHEN REMOVING ENGINE
COMPONENTS.
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN DURING REMOVAL OF THE FUEL
NOZZLE AND FLEXIBLE MANIFOLD, TO AVOID DAMAGE ON THE FLEXIBLE
MANIFOLD RUBBER HOSE.
NOTE: 1. Tool kit (PWC56616) for fuel nozzle flexible manifold which includes;
(PWC56601), (PWC56612), (PWC56617) and (PWC56630) is available and
will help you in the removal and installation of the fuel nozzle flexible manifold.
NOTE: 2. Removal of primary and secondary manifold hoses (1, 2, 3) from the engine
is not required to remove fuel nozzle adapters (6, 7, 8). The manifolds may
remain in position pending installation of the replacement adapters. However, it
is easier to install the preformed packing with the manifold completely
removed.
NOTE: 3. When removing a fuel manifold adapter, number it according to its location on
the engine as shown. This ensures hot end component distress can be
related to specific nozzle adapter(s).
NOTE: 4. Locators (PWC37442) must be installed (4 approx. equispaced) as fuel

manifold adapters are removed. Locators prevent movement of combustion
chamber outer liner and misalignment of fuel manifold adapter ports.
(1) Disconnect the accessory gearbox breather tube and the No. 5 bearing vent tube
assembly at both ends (Ref. 72-01-50 Oil System- Removal/Installation).
NOTE: 1. Step (1) is optional if using (PWC56612) crowfoot.
NOTE: 2. Do not remove the tubes, but move the tubes as required to get access
to the fuel manifold adapters bolts and coupling nuts.
(2) Post-SB21674: remove nut (12), bolt (11) and clamp (10) from bracket (13).
Remove the clamp from the primary hose.
(3) Remove flow divider and dump valve (Ref. Para. 9.).
(4) Use wrench (PWC56617) or (PWC56504) to untorque primary and secondary hose
(1, 2, 3) coupling nuts from fuel nozzle adapters (6, 7, 8).
72-01-40 Page 422

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
FUEL
FUEL MANIFOLD ADAPTER
HOSE FITTING FITTING
BORE
FUEL FUEL
MANIFOLD MANIFOLD
HOSE NOZZLE
BORE
PACKING GROOVE
MANIFOLD
TUBE
SECTION A−A
C76544A
Inspection of Fuel Nozzle Adapter and Hose
Figure 408
72-01-40 Page 423

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11 13
0.0500 in. MIN.

(1.27 mm)
2 10
12
C 1
5 4
9 VIEW B
7
ASSEMBLED COMPONENTS 3
1
B
4
SECONDARY FLOW
ADAPTER 9
LOCATING PIN 4
PRIMARY AND
SECONDARY
FLOW ADAPTER
9 LOCATING PIN 4
D
FW
6
4
2
3
D
4 FW
1 A
5
VIEW A
C38467C
Fuel Manifold - Removal/Installation
72-01-40 Page 424

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 409
1. Hose, Primary
2. Hose, Secondary
3. Hose, Secondary
4. Packing (AS3209-008)
5. Bolt
6. Inlet Adapter
7. Adapter (Secondary-flow)
8. Adapter (Primary- and Secondary-flow)
9. Gasket
10. Clamp (Post-SB21674)
11. Bolt (Post-SB21674)
12. Nut (Post-SB21674)
13. Bracket (Post-SB21674)
72-01-40 Page 425

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
14 1
13 2
7
8
8
12 3
11 4
10 5
8
9 6
8 7
6
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD
C38468
72-01-40 Page 426

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D
FW
TYPICAL PRIMARY/ SECONDARY
MANIFOLD ADAPTER OBTAINED
NOTE: PRIMARY AND SECONDARY BY REWORK.
NOZZLES SHOWN. THE SAME
APPLIES FOR THE SECONDARY
NOZZLES, WITH THE DIFFERENCE
BEING THAT THE LOCATING PIN
IS ON THE GGC INSTEAD OF
THE NOZZLE.
LOCATING HOLES LOCATING PIN BOSS

AND FUEL NOZZLE TIP
TOWARD REAR OF ENGINE
TYPICAL TYPICAL
PARKER−HANNIFIN DELAVAN
NOZZLE NOZZLE
D D
FW FW
LOCATING HOLES LOCATING PIN BOSS LOCATING HOLES LOCATING PIN BOSS
AND FUEL NOZZLE TIP AND FUEL NOZZLE TIP
TOWARD REAR OF ENGINE TOWARD REAR OF ENGINE
C72511
72-01-40 Page 427

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: AVOID TOUCHING NOZZLE ORIFICE. THIS COULD RESULT IN POOR

SPRAY PATTERN.
(5) Remove bolts (5), adapters (6, 7, 8) and gaskets (9) at four equally spaced
intervals. Install four outer combustion chamber locators (PWC37442)at these
locations. Remove the remaining bolts (5), adapters (6, 7, 8) and gaskets (9). Discard
gaskets.
NOTE: When not installed, fuel nozzle adapters must be stored in a clean
covered container. Slots in container should be marked to identify nozzle
positions on engine.
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN REMOVING PACKINGS

FROM THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY HOSE CONNECTIONS TO
ENSURE THE ADJACENT CONICAL SEALING FACES ARE NOT
DAMAGED. DO NOT USE SHARP METAL TOOLS. USE STANDARD
PROTECTION CAPS AT EACH HOSE CONNECTORS DURING
HANDLING.
(6) Remove and discard packings (4) from primary and secondary hose connections.
(7) If required, send adapters to an approved facility for refurbishment.
B. Installation (Post-SB21705)
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN DURING FUEL NOZZLE AND

FLEXIBLE MANIFOLD INSTALLATION, TO AVOID DAMAGE ON THE
FLEXIBLE MANIFOLD RUBBER HOSE AND THE CONICAL SEALING FACES.
CAUTION: DO AN INSPECTION OF THE FUEL MANIFOLD HOSE AND FUEL NOZZLE
ADAPTER BORES AND SEALING FACES FOR DAMAGE. REMOVE AND
REPLACE HOSE AND NOZZLE IF DAMAGE FOUND (Ref. Fig. 408).
CAUTION: ENSURE LUBRICANT DOES NOT ENTER BORES OF PRIMARY AND
SECONDARY HOSES .
CAUTION: GASKET LOCATING HOLE MUST BE TOWARD THE REAR OF THE ENGINE
(Ref. Fig. 409, Sheet 3).
CAUTION: WHEN FITTING THE FUEL MANIFOLD ADAPTERS ON THE GAS
GENERATOR CASE, MAKE SURE THAT THE FUEL NOZZLE TIPS AND
LOCATING PIN BOSSES FACE TOWARD THE REAR OF THE ENGINE (Ref.
Fig. 409, Sheet 3).
(1) Lubricate new packings (4) (AS3209-008) using a minimal amount of engine oil
(PWC03-001) and install on primary and secondary hoses (1, 2, 3) connectors.
NOTE: 1. Inspect the preformed packings for damage after installation on the
manifolds. Replace packings if damaged.
NOTE: 2. Make sure the correct fuel manifold adapter type is installed at each
correct location (Ref. Fig. 409, Sheet 2).
72-01-40 Page 428

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE ARROW ON ALL THE FUEL NOZZLES, POINTS
FORWARD WHEN INSTALLED.
NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL ARROW IS NOT PRESENT ON POST-SB21705
PRODUCTION FUEL NOZZLES. ONLY THE NOZZLES IN SERVICE
THAT HAVE BEEN MODIFIED BY SB21705 WILL STILL CARRY THE
DIRECTIONAL ARROW.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE TORQUE IS BETWEEN THE RECOMMENDED VALUE.
(2) Use new gaskets (9), install adapters (6, 7, 8) with the locating pin and fuel
nozzle tip facing toward the rear of the engine. Install bolts (5) and torque bolts Fig.
409), 27 to 30 lb.in. (3.05-3.39 Nm).
NOTE: 1. Adapters of primary and secondary flow incorporate dowel pins which
locate in a mating hole in the gas generator case.
NOTE: 2. Adapters of secondary flow have a hole which mates with dowel pins
fitted to gas generator case.
NOTE: 3. Do not lubricate bolts.
CAUTION: ENSURE LUBRICANT DOES NOT ENTER BORES OF PRIMARY AND

SECONDARY HOSES .
(3) Lubricate primary and secondary hose connector threads using a minimal amount
of engine oil (PWC03-001).
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY LUBRICANT TO FUEL NOZZLE ELBOW BORES.

(4) Lubricate fuel nozzle elbow threads and locking fingers using a minimal amount of
engine oil (PWC03-001).
CAUTION: ENSURE CLEARANCE OF 0.125 IN. (3.18 MM) EXISTS BETWEEN

FLEXIBLE FUEL MANIFOLDS AND ADJACENT TUBES. IF NECESSARY,
LOOSEN MANIFOLD NUTS, HOLD FLEXIBLE TUBE(S) AWAY FROM
ADJACENT RIGID TUBES AND RETORQUE TO THE CORRECT VALUE.
(5) Install primary and secondary hose (1, 2, 3) connectors as follows:
(a) Push the manifold hose tube to engage in the fuel manifold nozzle bore (Ref.
Fig. 408)
(b) Install the fuel manifold hose fitting to engage the fuel adapter fitting. Tighten
the fitting with your fingers.
(c) Use the wrench (PWC56630) or (PWC56504) to completely seat the fuel
manifold hose fitting before the final torque.
72-01-40 Page 429

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: MAKE SURE YOU APPLY THE FINAL TORQUE TO ALL MANIFOLD
CONNECTORS. IF FINAL TORQUE IS NOT DONE, IT IS POSSIBLE THE
FITTINGS CAN COME LOOSE AND SUBSEQUENTLY RESULT TO A
FUEL LEAKAGE OF THE CONICAL SEALING FACES
CAUTION: HOLD THE TEE FITTINGS SECURELY WHEN YOU TORQUE THE NUT
ASSEMBLY.
(6) Hold the tee fittings (part of 1, 2, 3) and use torque wrench (PWC56601) to apply
the final torque of 160 to 180 lb.in. (18.08 to 20.34 Nm).
NOTE: 1. Final torque of the secondary manifold of the fuel nozzle no. 14 maybe
applied using a standard crowfoot 11/16’’ with a standard torque wrench
having an extension.
NOTE: 2. Final torque of secondary manifold of fuel nozzle no. 6 can be applied
using special crowfoot PWC56612. If access is too restricted refer to
step (1) of removal instruction where instruction are given for the removal
of no. 5 bearing vent tube assembly.
NOTE: 3. Two crowfoot extensions are available for pre-setted torque wrench
PWC56601 to get more flexibility in restricted area access. Appropriate
selection of crowfoot extensions should be made to ease the final torque
application.
(7) Post-SB21674: Install the clamp on the primary hose at location shown. Align clamp
with bracket (13) and secure with nut (12), bolt (11). Torque the nut 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(8) Connect the accessory gearbox breather tube and the No. 5 bearing vent tube
assembly at both ends (Ref. 72-01-50, OIL SYSTEM- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
(9) Install flow divider and dump valve (Ref. Para. 9.).
CAUTION: A LEAK CHECK MUST BE CARRIED OUT TO ENSURE THE INTEGRITY

OF THE COMPLETE MANIFOLD SYSTEM.
(10) Carry out a leak check (Ref. 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST).
11. Fuel Pump Pressure Differential Switch (Ref. Fig. 410)
A. Removal

(1) Disconnect pressure differential switch electrical connector (Ref. AMM).
(2) Mark TDC on cover, using marker (PWC05-048).
(3) Remove nuts (3) and cover (4), using jackscrews (PWC32396) and packings (5).
Discard packings.
72-01-40 Page 430

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Remove retaining ring (9), pressure differential switch (10) and packing (11) from
cover. Discard packing.
(5) Remove and discard packing (7).
B. Installation
(1) If new cover is installed or TDC is not marked, do the following:
(a) Install cover (4).
adapter.
(b) Mark TDC on cover and adapter using marker (PWC05-048).
(c) Remove cover.
(2) Lubricate packings (11, 7) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on pressure
differential switch (10) and in filter (6), respectively.
(3) Install switch in cover (4), aligning flange hole with locating pin in cover and
ensuring switch electrical connection master keyway is within ± 45 degrees of TDC
mark.
(4) Install retaining ring (9) to secure switch in cover.
(5) Lubricate packings (5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on cover (4).
(6) Align TDC marks, install cover and nuts (3). Torque nuts 65 to 75 lb.in.
(7.35-8.48 Nm).
adapter.

CONNECTING PLUGS TO RECEPTACLES.
(7) Install pressure differential switch electrical harness connector (Ref. AMM).
(8) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Check).
12. Fuel Heater (Ref. Fig. 411)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect aircraft fuel supply tube and remove associated nipple (Ref. AMM).
WARNING: ENSURE AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL POWER IS OFF BEFORE

(2) Disconnect impending bypass switches electrical harness connectors P35 and P36.
(3) Disconnect sensor electrical harness connector P37.
72-01-40 Page 431

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
45 ° 45°
MASTER
KEYWAY
ALIGNMENT OF MASTER KEYWAY

VIEW A
3
4
11 5
10 A
7
6
9
8
2
1
C63303
Fuel Pump Pressure Differential Switch - Removal/Installation
Figure 410
72-01-40 Page 432

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 410
1. Inlet Screen (Ref.)

2. Packing (Ref.)
3. Nut
4. Cover
5. Packing
6. Outlet Filter
7. Packing
8. Packing
9. Retaining Ring
10. Pressure Differential Switch
11. Packing
(4) Remove electrical wiring harness and associated parts at brackets (11, 12) (Ref.
72-01-10, REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
(5) Remove pressure oil check valve (Ref. 72-01-50, REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
(6) Remove fuel heater-to-fuel cooled oil cooler oil pressure tube (18) (Ref. 72-01-50).
(7) Remove bolts (2), bracket (3) and retaining plate (4).
(8) Slide transfer tube (5) into fuel pump (7) clear of fuel heater.
(9) Slide transfer tube (14) into fuel heater using pusher (PWC37303).
(10) Remove bolts (8), washers (9), spacers (10), brackets (11, 12) and fuel heater (13).
(11) Remove transfer tube (14) and packings (15) from heater. Discard packings.
(12) Remove transfer tube (5) and packings (6) from fuel pump. Discard packings.
(13) Remove nipple (16) and packing (17). Discard packing.
B. Installation
CAUTION: IF FUEL HEATER HAS BEEN STORED, FLUSH FUEL CIRCUIT WITH
CLEAN FUEL AND OIL CIRCUIT WITH CLEAN OIL (PWC03-001).
(1) Lubricate packings (6) and install on transfer tube (5).
(2) Install transfer tube in fuel pump (7).
(3) Lubricate packings (15) with oil (PWC03-001) and install on transfer tube (14).
Install transfer tube in fuel heater (13).
(4) Install fuel heater, spacers (10), brackets (11, 12), washers (9) and bolts (8). Torque
bolts (8) 62 to 72 lb.in. (7.01-8.13).
72-01-40 Page 433

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11 10 12
10
13
P37
8
16
17
19
P35
10
9
P36
15 8
14 10
9
15
1
18
7
6
5
6
4
3
2
C79712
Fuel Heater - Removal/Installation
Figure 411
72-01-40 Page 434

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 411
1. Filter Housing (Ref.)

2. Bolt
3. Bracket
4. Retaining Plate
5. Transfer Tube
6. Packing
7. Fuel Pump
8. Bolt
9. Washer
10. Spacer
11. Bracket
12. Bracket
13. Fuel Heater
14. Transfer Tube
15. Packing
16. Nipple
17. Packing
18. Oil Pressure Tube Assembly
19. Sensor
(5) Slide transfer tube (5) into fuel heater (13).
(6) Install retaining plate (4), bracket (3) and bolts (2). Torque bolts 85 to 95 lb.in.
(9.61-10.74 Nm).
(7) Lubricate packing (17) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on nipple (16).
(8) Install nipple. Torque 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm). Secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
(9) Install oil pressure tube (Ref. 72-01-50).
(10) Install pressure oil check valve (Ref. 72-01-50, REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
(11) Install nipple and associated aircraft fuel supply line (Ref. AMM).
(12) Install electrical wiring harness and associated parts at brackets (11, 12) (Ref.
72-01-10, REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).

CONNECTORS.
(13) Clean and dry connectors (Ref. 72-01-10, CLEANING/PAINTING).
NOTE: install harness sleeves (PWC05-273) over connectors before they are
reconnected. The use of sleeves is optional.
72-01-40 Page 435

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MOISTURE. IF NECESSARY, DRY, USING A HEAT GUN.
(14) Install harness electrical connectors P35, P36, and P37 (Ref. 72-00-00,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES and 72-01-10, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION).
13. Fuel Waste Tubes, Motive Flow Pressure Fuel Tube Assembly and MFCU and Fuel Pump
Drain Tubes and Fuel Waste Ejector Assembly
A. Fuel Waste Ejector Tube and Motive Fuel Flow Ejector Tube (Ref. Fig. 412)
(1) Removal
(a) Remove nuts (10, 14, 19), bolts (9, 13, 18, 28), brackets (29, 30, 31, spacers
(15, 20), clamps (7, 11, 16, 26) and grommets (8, 12, 17, 27).
(b) Disconnect tube assembly (1, 21) at both ends and remove.
(c) Remove nipple (2) or elbow (4) as follows:
1 Remove nipple (2). Discard packing (3).
2 Remove nut (6), washer (5) and elbow (4).
(d) If required, remove nut (24), washer (23) and elbow (22).
(2) Installation
(a) Install nipple (2) or elbow (4) as follows:
1 Lubricate packing (3) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on nipple (2).
Install nipple, torque 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
2 Install elbow (4) (angle as shown), washer (5) and nut (6). Torque nut 38 to
42 lb.in. (4.29-4.75 Nm).
(b) If required, install elbow (22) (angle as shown), washer (23) and nut (24).
(c) Install tube assembly (1). Torque tube nut at elbow (4) 90 to 100 lb.in.
(d) Install tube assembly (21). Torque tube nut at elbow (22) 135 to 150 lb.in.
(e) Torque tube nuts at cover (25) 270 to 300 lb.in. (30.51-33.90 Nm) and secure
with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
72-01-40 Page 436

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Install grommets (12, 17), clamps (11, 16), spacers (15, 20), bracket (31), bolts
(13, 18) and nuts (14, 19). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamps of electrical wiring harness at bolts (13, 18).
(g) Install grommets (8, 27), clamps (7, 26), bolts (9, 28), brackets (29, 30) and
nuts (10). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamp of check valve air pressure tube at bolt (28) and wiring
harness clamps at brackets (29) and (30).
B. Motive Flow Pressure Fuel Tube Assembly (Ref. Fig. 413)
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect tube (1) at both ends and remove.
(b) Remove cap assembly (2), nut (3), and washer (4).
(c) Remove Tee (5).
(2) Installation
(a) Install tee (5), washer (4), and nut (3). Torque nut 70 to 80 lbf.in. (8.0-9.0 Nm)
and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULE AND NUT THREAD,

ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
CAUTION: HOLD ASSOCIATED FITTINGS FIRMLY IN POSITION WHEN
TORQUING TUBE NUTS.
(b) Lubricate ferrules and tube nuts using a minimal amount of oil (PWC03-001)
and install tube (1). Torque both ends 270 to 300 lb.in. (30.51-33.90 Nm).
(c) Install cap assembly (2). Torque cap assembly to 270 to 300 lbf.in.
C. Fuel Waste Ejector Assembly
Refer to Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
72-01-40 Page 437

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MUST BE WITHIN
11 DEG. 40 MIN. ± 1 DEG.
P5
P10 OF ENGINE AXIS
18
21
MUST BE WITHIN
13 12 VIEW AT A 32 DEG. 35 MIN. ± 1 DEG.
11 OF ENGINE AXIS
31
12
1 15
20 11 9
17 25
16 27
2 26 7
3 19 8
8 1
14
27 10
9 9 7 10 9
21 27
26
26
P35 27
P36 30
P37 26
10
28
29 10
27
10 6 24
26
P33
4 5 23
22
A
VIEW FROM LEFT SIDE OF ENGINE VIEW FROM RIGHT SIDE OF ENGINE
C63314A
Fuel Waste Ejector Tube and Motive Flow Ejector Tube Assemblies - Removal/Installation
Figure 412
72-01-40 Page 438

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 412
1. Tube Assembly
2. Nipple
3. Packing
4. Elbow
5. Washer
6. Nut
7. Clamp
8. Grommet
9. Bolt
10. Nut
11. Clamp
12. Grommet
13. Bolt
14. Nut
15. Spacer
16. Clamp
17. Grommet
18. Bolt
19. Nut
20. Spacer
21. Tube Assembly
22. Elbow
23. Washer
24. Nut
25. Cover
26. Clamp
27. Grommet
28. Bolt
29. Bracket
30. Bracket
31. Bracket
72-01-40 Page 439

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
3
4
C79488A
Motive Flow Pressure Fuel Tube Assembly - Removal/Installation
Figure 413
72-01-40 Page 440

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 413
1. Tube Assembly
2. Cap Assembly, Tube
3. Nut
4. Washer
5. Tee
72-01-40 Page 441/442

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
A. These instructions provide the information necessary for the adjustment/test of engine
fuel system components.
Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Leak Test
A. Mechanical Fuel Control Unit, Fuel Pump, Oil to Fuel Heater, Flow Divider and Dump
Valve, Fuel Lines and Fuel Manifold..
(1) Start engine, run for two minutes at 80% torque. Shut down engine (Ref. AMM).
(2) Check visually for leaks.
(3) Rectify leaking components and repeat test.
72-01-40 Page 501/502

FUEL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General

components of the engine fuel system.

Item No. Name
PWC11-002 Trichloroethane 1-1-1 (inhibited)
PWC11-031 Cleaner, Engine
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC54030 Tester
Name
Air filter
Air pressure regulator
Bleed valve
Flexible wire (0.030 in. (0.762 mm) diameter)
Lamp
Manometer (0 to 20 in.) (0-508 mm)
Needle valve (variable restrictor)
Pressure gage (0 to 10 psig) (0-69 kPa)
Rod or wire, No. 58 (0.042 in.) (1.07 mm)
72-01-40 Page 601

FUEL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK Mar 11/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Name
Spring compressor tester
Transparent tank (1.5 gal.) (5.7 liter)
5. Inspection/Check
A. General
(1) In addition to the details specifically mentioned, inspect for obvious damage,
cracks, defective threads, and loose or damaged locating pins and dowels.
(2) Replace distorted retaining rings.
(3) Replace dented tubes if:
(a) Dent has sharp corners (nicks).
(b) Dent length and depth greater than 10 percent of tube outside diameter.
(c) More than one dent per 12-inch (304.8 mm) length of tube.
(d) Dents on tube bends.
B. Fuel Filters and Screen
(1) Heater Inlet Filter, Pump Inlet Screen and Outlet Filter
(a) Insert a small lamp into the inside bore of the filter element.
(b) Visually inspect filter element for breaks, punctures or evidence of crushing or
collapse. There must be no loose particles, broken bonds or joints. Hairline
cracks in the epoxy securing the end caps of the fuel pump outlet filter to the
element are acceptable.
(2) Heater Inlet and Pump Outlet Filters
NOTE: The bubble point test is not a cleaning procedure. The test is carried out
to ensure the filter body is undamaged and the element not punctured.
(a) Carry out a bubble point test as follows (Ref. Fig. 601):
72-01-40 Page 602

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR PRESSURE NEEDLE BLEED

PRESSURE GAGE VALVE VALVE
INLET
AIR
REGULATOR AIR
FILTER
MANOMETER
BLACK LIGHT SOURCE
(SAME AS USED FOR
FLUORESCENT PENETRANT
INSPECTION)
ELEMENT SOLVENT
ADAPTER
TRANSPARENT FILTER PLUG
P1 P2
TANK ELEMENT
VACUUM
SCALE
h = MANOMETER READING
h
P1= PRESSURIZED AIR
P2= ATMOSPHERIC AIR
P1 h
MANOMETER
FLUID
ALTERNATE TYPES
OF MANOMETERS
C32394
Fuel Heater Inlet and Pump Outlet Filter Element - Bubble Point Test
Figure 601
72-01-40 Page 603

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA

SHEETS FOR CONSUMABLE MATERIALS INFORMATION
SUCH AS: HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS, PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL
CHARACTERISTICS, FIRE, EXPLOSION, REACTIVITY,
HEALTH HAZARD DATA, PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE HANDLING,
USE AND CONTROL MEASURES.
1 Fill tank with trichloroethane (PWC11-002) or solvent (PWC11-027) or
Tergit (PWC11-031) or Magkleen 4 (PWC11-032). Maintain fluid at room
temperature.

2 Install element adapter as applicable on pressurization hose.
NOTE: Adapters may be manufactured by drilling a hole through a

tapered rubber plug of the appropriate size for the element being
tested. Drill the hole slightly smaller than the fitting on the end
of the pressurization hose.
3 Install the adapter into the element core.
4 Install element in fluid tank using a suitable plug to seal open end of core.
Maintain approximately 1⁄2 in. (12.70 mm) between fluid surface and filter
top during test.
5 Ensure manometer scale reads zero; if necessary, open bleed valve to

allow residual air pressure to vent.
6 Close bleed and needle valves.
7 Turn on air supply.
8 Open air regulator until pressure gage reads 5 to 6 psig (34.47-41.37 kPa).
9 Open needle valve and gradually increase air pressure until manometer
reading is equivalent to 4.5 in. (114.3 mm) of water for the fuel pump
outlet filter, or 2.5 in. (63.5 mm) for the fuel heater inlet filter. No bubbles
must escape from filter mesh before these values are exceeded.
NOTE: Check bore seals if bubbles escape from locations other than the
filter mesh before the 4.5 in. (114.3 mm) and 2.5 in. (63.5 mm)
values, as applicable, are exceeded.
72-01-40 Page 604

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10 Rotate element slowly and watch for air bubbles. If no bubble stream
appears, increase pressure by opening needle valve. When a stream
of bubbles appears, reduce pressure until bubbles stop, then slowly increase
pressure until bubble stream begins again. The manometer reading is the
difference between lower and upper level of fluid, or twice the distance from
fill line to fluid line after pressurization. The reading when the stream
begins must be 4.5 in. (114.3 mm) (fuel pump outlet filter) or 2.5 in.
(63.5 mm) (fuel heater inlet filter) of water, minimum. Replace filter element
if these requirements are not met.
C. Fuel Heater Filter
NOTE: This inspection is to be done after cleaning (Ref. Cleaning/Painting).
(1) Inspect for broken wires and contamination.
(2) Replace filter if broken wires are evident or result of repeated cleaning is
unsatisfactory.
D. Fuel Heater Housing and Impending Bypass Switch
(1) Switch
(a) Check continuity using ohmmeter; resistance between pins B and C (open
circuit), minimum 2 megohms at 45 volts DC or AC.
(b) Check insulation using test set; resistance between pins and backshell,
minimum 2 megohms at 45 volts DC or AC.
(2) Housing
(a) Visually inspect for cracks in metal surfaces, paying particular attention to
mounting lugs. Replace heater if any cracks are found.
(b) Visually inspect for cracks in flame-retardant coating (where applicable). Cracks
are acceptable providing:
NOTE: If damage to coating exceeds following limits, heater must be repaired

(Ref. Cleaning/Painting).
1 There is no coating loss.
2 Crack does not expose metal surface.
E. Fuel Pump Pressure Differential Switch
CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE WHICH COULD AFFECT ELECTRICAL

CONTACTS, DO NOT INSERT PROBES INTO CONNECTOR SOCKETS
OR ATTACH CLIPS TO CONNECTOR PINS.
(1) Check continuity using ohmmeter.
72-01-40 Page 605

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Resistance between pins A and B (open circuit): minimum 2 megohms (infinite)
at 45 volts AC or DC.
(2) Check insulation using test set.
(a) Resistance between pins A and B, respectively, and backshell to ground:

minimum 2 megohms at 45 volts AC or DC.
F. Drain Valve
(1) Clean holes in valve using rod or wire.
(2) Check spring compression using tester:
(a) 4 oz. to 8 oz. (113.40-226.80 g), 0.250 in. (6.35 mm) length.
G. Mechanical Fuel Control to Fuel Pump Coupling
(1) Inspect coupling for wear. Replace if coupling is worn.
H. Transfer Tubes
(1) Inspect for fretting. Fretting on tubes is allowed on the shoulder, but the maximum
allowable on the tube itself is 0.008 in. (0.203 mm). Replace tubes if fretting limit is
exceeded.
I. Mechanical Fuel Control Unit Electrical Circuits
CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE THAT COULD AFFECT ELECTRICAL CONTACTS,

DO NOT INSERT PROBES INTO CONNECTOR SOCKETS OR ATTACH
CLIPS TO CONNECTOR PINS.
(1) Check continuity of rotary variable differential transformer (RVDT) using ohmmeter:
(a) Resistance between pins A and B, 52 to 78 ohms.
(b) Resistance between pins C and P and C and R, 76 to 114 ohms.
CAUTION: EXTREME CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO

INTERNAL CIRCUITS WHEN CHECKING INSULATION RESISTANCE.
(2) Check insulation of RVDT using test set:
(a) Resistance between pins A and C, A and P, A and R, B and C, B and R and B
and P, minimum 2 megohms at 45 volts DC or AC.
(3) Check continuity of manual solenoid using ohmmeter:
(a) Resistance between pins M and N, 32 to 55 ohms.
(4) Check insulation of manual solenoid using test set:
(a) Resistance between each pin and backshell, minimum 2 megohms at 45 volts
DC or AC.
72-01-40 Page 606

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Check continuity of stepper motor using ohmmeter with/without tester (PWC54030).
(a) Resistance between pins G and F, G and S, G and T and G and H, 115 to 155
ohms.
(6) Check insulation of stepper motor using test set:
(a) Resistance between pins G, F, S, T and H, respectively, and backshell,

minimum 2 megohms at 45 volts DC or AC.
J. Fuel Nozzle Sampling Program
(1) General
NOTE: Engines on this Fuel Nozzle Sampling Program must first be baselined at
the next engine HSI or engine overhaul, to ensure an accurate and
unbiased assessment regarding the condition of engine hot section
components.
(a) This sampling program is to establish, for each individual operator, an

optimized fuel nozzle maintenance interval that maximizes the life of the hot
section.
(b) Operators are recommended to use the following guidelines and criteria to
formulate an individual plan to meet their specific requirements.
(c) Refer to the Removal/Installation section of the Engine Maintenance Manual for
the locations for the Hybrid, Secondary and Inlet fuel nozzles.
(d) A fuel nozzle sample set for this program consists of one complete set of fuel
nozzles that have run continuously, as an integral set on the engine for the
entire current maintenance interval cycle. A complete fuel nozzle set is made up
of ten hybrid nozzles, three secondary nozzles and one inlet nozzle.
(e) This program requires that when a nozzle set is removed, that the nozzle
engine position be recorded against the nozzle serial and part number for
traceability purposes. It is also required to record the nozzle running hours at
the time of the set removal and the engine serial number.
(2) Acceptance Limits for New or Overhauled Fuel Nozzles (Reference Only)
NOTE: The following values from the Component Maintenance Manual (CMM) for
zero time fuel nozzles are provided here strictly for reference purposes.
(a) The acceptance limits and test setup for fuel nozzles are outlined in the Fuel
Nozzle CMM.
(b) The flow requirements for the ten Hybrid Fuel Nozzles are:
1 Primary Flow: 7.83 ± 0.40 pph (pound/per/hour).
2 Secondary Flow: 32.0 ± 0.80 pph.
72-01-40 Page 607

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) The flow requirements for the three Secondary and one Inlet Fuel Nozzles are:
1 Secondary Flow: 37.5 ± 0.90 pph.
(d) The above values from the CMM for zero time nozzles are for reference only
and must not be used for sampling purposes.
(3) Sampling Program - Fuel flow
(a) Hybrid Fuel Nozzles (Engine Positions: 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14).
1 Primary Jets: For each nozzle, flow test as per CMM instructions and record
fuel flow number.
2 Secondary Jets: For each nozzle, flow test as per CMM instructions and
record fuel flow number.
(b) Secondary and Inlet Fuel Nozzles (Engine Positions: 1, 4, 8, 12).
1 For each nozzle, flow test as per CMM instructions and record fuel flow
number.
(4) Sampling Program - Spray Cone Angle (Ref. Fig. 602)
(a) Measure the spray cone angle of the primary jets as per the CMM and record
the results.
(b) Measure the spray cone angle of the secondary jets as per the CMM and
record the results.
(5) Sampling Program - Spray Quality
(a) Hybrid Fuel Nozzles (Engine Positions: 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14).
1 Primary Jets: For each nozzle, spray quality test for streaking as per CMM
instructions and record results
2 Secondary Jets: No spray quality testing required.
(6) Criteria for a Successful Sample (Ref. Table 601)
(a) Fuel Flow
1 Hybrid Fuel Nozzles (Engine Positions: 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14).
a Primary Jets: Eight of the ten recorded flows must be within ± 1.5
pph of the set average on the hybrid primary jets.
b Secondary Jets: Nine of the ten recorded secondary flows must be

within ± 2.0 pph of the set average on the hybrid secondary jets.
2 Secondary and Inlet Fuel Nozzles (Engine Positions: 1, 4, 8, 12)
72-01-40 Page 608

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
50 o MIN.
MINIMUM
CONE ANGLE
C24920A
Fuel Nozzles - Spray Inspection Criteria
Figure 602
72-01-40 Page 609

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
a All the pure secondary and inlet nozzles recorded flows must be within
± 2.0 pph of the set average on the secondary and inlet nozzle jets.
(b) Spray Quality
1 Hybrid Fuel Nozzles (Engine Positions: 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14).
a Primary Jets: No heavy streaks permitted for all primary jets.
(c) Spray Cone Angle
1 Primary spray cone: Eight of the ten nozzles must have a minimum cone
angle of 50 degrees.
2 Secondary spray cone: All fourteen secondary spray cones (on all ten
hybrids, three secondary and one inlet nozzles) must have a minimum cone
angle of 50 degrees.
(7) Adjustment of Operator Fleet Fuel Nozzle Maintenance Interval
(a) The base fuel nozzle maintenance interval is stated in the Engine Maintenance
Manual (Ref. 05-20-00, SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS/MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS). Before increasing or reducing the maintenance interval, it is
necessary to complete five samples at the current maintenance interval.
1 It is recommended to increase the maintenance interval if four or more

samples meet the sampling criteria.
2 It is recommended to reduce the maintenance interval if two or more

samples do not meet the sampling criteria.
(b) The maintenance interval is considered optimized if 80% of the fleet samples
meet the sampling criteria.
(c) An operator is recommended to adjust the maintenance interval in increments

not greater than 250 flight hours following a fleet sample.
TABLE 601, Example of Successful Nozzle Sampling

Primary
Fuel Nozzle Primary Spray Primary Secondary Secondary
Position No. Flow Quality Cone Angle Flow Cone Angle
1 - n/a - 36.0 70
2 6.70 No heavy streaks 84 32.0 70
3 Blocked No heavy streaks 0 32.5 65
4 - n/a - 37.0 60
72-01-40 Page 610

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 601, Example of Successful Nozzle Sampling (Cont’d)

Primary
8 (Inlet) - n/a - 38.0 59
12 - n/a - 37.5 78
Summary of this successful Sample
Fuel Flow - Hybrid Nozzles (2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14)
Primary Nozzle Flow: Average primary flow: 6.52 pph.
Minimum flow allowed: 6.52 - 1.5 = 5.02 pph.
Maximum flow allowed: 6.52 + 1.5 = 8.02 pph.
Two nozzles are allowed to be below 5.02 pph or above
8.02 pph.
Secondary Nozzle Flow: Average secondary flow: 31.10 pph.
One nozzle is allowed to be below 29.10 pph or above
33.10 pph.
Fuel Flow - Secondary and Inlet Nozzles (1, 4, 8, 12)
Secondary Nozzle Flow: Average secondary flow: 37.13 pph.
No nozzles are allowed to be below 35.13 pph or above
39.13 pph.
Spray Quality - Hybrid Nozzles (2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14)
Primary Nozzle Spray No heavy streaks permitted
Quality:
No heavy streaks observed
Spray Cone Angle
Primary Spray Cones: Spray cone angle to be greater than 50 degrees.
Two cones are permitted to be less than 50 degrees.
72-01-40 Page 611

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 601, Example of Successful Nozzle Sampling (Cont’d)

Primary
Secondary Spray Spray cone angle to be greater than 50 degrees.
Cones:
No cones are permitted to be less than 50 degrees.
K. Fuel Manifold Adapters (Ref. Fig. 603)
(1) Examine lip and associated face (Ref. View B) for erosion and burnt material.
Replace adapter if damage on lip exceeds 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) and on face
0.020 in. (0.508 mm).
(2) Visually check sheath for erosion and burnt material (Ref. Area L) (indication of
spray pattern distortion). Replace adapter if parent material loss is evident.
(3) Visually check primary and secondary air and fuel passages for carbon deposits.
Replace adapter if carbon deposits are found.
(4) Inspect for fretting on sheath - acceptable to 0.020 in. (0.508 mm) deep.
(5) Inspect transfer tube bores for fretting. Replace adapter if fretting exceeds 0.005 in.
(0.127 mm) deep.
L. Flexible Fuel Manifold Hose (Ref. Fig. 604)
(1) Examine the external surfaces of the fuel manifold hoses as follows:
CAUTION: THE PRESENCE OF CHLORINE CAN CHEMICALLY ATTACK AND

CORRODE THE MANIFOLD WIRE OVERBRAID, WHICH CAN
CAUSE A HOSE TO RUPTURE. ENSURE THAT THE WORK
ENVIRONMENT, TOOLS, FIXTURES, ETC. ARE FREE FROM THE
PRESENCE OF ALL CHLORINE AND ALL PRODUCTS CONTAINING
ANY FORM OF CHLORINE. ENSURE HANDS HAVE BEEN
CLEANED PROPERLY TO REMOVE ALL RESIDUAL CHLORIDES
PRIOR TO WORKING ON THE FUEL MANIFOLDS.
CAUTION: DO NOT BEND THE HOSE SECTIONS TO AN INSIDE BEND
RADIUS LESS THAN 2 INCHES (50.8 mm). THE HOSE CAN BE
DAMAGED, TO THE EXTENT OF CAUSING AN EXTERNAL LEAK, IF
THE BEND IS OVER THE LIMIT.
(a) Clean the fuel manifold hoses thoroughly before you do the inspection (Ref.
Cleaning/Painting).
(b) Inspect the fuel manifold hoses for cracks. If you find cracks, reject the flexible
fuel manifold.
(c) Make sure that the rubber coating is not too soft: make sure that you can not
easily tear it with your finger nail.
72-01-40 Page 612

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.030 IN. REF

(0.762 mm)
0.020 IN. MAX

A (0.508 mm)
0.020 IN. MAX

(0.508 mm)
A
SECTION A-A
C32600
Fuel Manifold Adapters (Delavan) - Dimensional/Visual Checks
72-01-40 Page 613

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR CAP LIP

EROSION OR
DAMAGE
0.005 IN. MAX.
AREA L
0.020 IN.
(0.508 mm)
MAX.
NO PITTING IN
THIS AREA LIGHT PITTING
ALLOWED UP TO 0.010 IN.
(0.254 mm)
ACCEPTED
PARENT
MATERIAL
LOSS
AIR CAP
C21390
72-01-40 Page 614

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.015 - 0.026 IN.

(0.381 - 0.660 mm)
REF.
DETAIL A
0.006 IN.
(0.152 MM)
A
MAX.
C21391
72-01-40 Page 615

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Inspect for surface crazing. Minor surface crazing is permitted.
NOTE: Surface crazing is a network of fine splits or small cracks that occur in
the surface of the material.
(e) Inspect for bulges, cuts, and abrasions.
(f) Inspect for kinks, buckling, and signs of leakage.
NOTE: Signs of leakage include an unusually clean area or a deposit of light

brown fuel varnish.
(g) Inspect for exposed, broken or protruding wire overbraid material. If the wire
overbraid material is exposed, broken or protruding, reject the flexible fuel
manifold.
(2) In Zone A, when hose material loss, nicks, cuts or scratches are less than 0.750 in.
(19.05 mm) in length, the fuel manifold hose can be repaired (Ref. Approved
Repairs).
(3) In Zone B, when hose material loss, nicks, cuts or scratches are less than 0.750 in.
(19.05 mm) in length, and the wire overbraid is not exposed, the fuel manifold hose
can be repaired (Ref. Approved Repairs).
NOTE: Do not attempt to repair a fuel manifold hose that has the wire overbraid
material exposed.
(4) Rejected fuel manifolds that are outside of the repair limits above, can be returned
to the address below for evaluation and possible proprietary repair:
Pratt & Whitney Canada

333 Rue d’Auvergne (Area 2K)
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4H 3Y3
TEL: (450) 442-6837
FAX: (450) 442-6810
72-01-40 Page 616

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL MANIFOLD ZONE A ZONE B

FITTING (REF.)
WIRE OVERBRAID (REF.)
FUEL MANIFOLD
HOSES
C97100A
Flexible Fuel Manifold Hose - Inspection/Check
Figure 604
72-01-40 Page 617/618

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING
1. General

Item No. Name
PWC05-050 Nitrogen
PWC07-008 Paint, Thermal Insulating Coating
PWC11-003 Cleaning Agents (Biodegradable)
PWC11-010 Methanol
PWC11-024 Solvent, Methylene Chloride
PWC11-033 Cleaner, Aqueous
PWC11-054 Cleaner, Aqueous (Low Foam)
PWC11-055 Degreasing, Aqueous (Wax Remover)
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC32677-300 Cart, Compressor/Fuel Nozzle Wash
Name Remarks
Air pressure regulator
Brush, paint
Brush, stiff bristle
Electrosonic cleaner Vibration frequency = 3600 cycles, current
frequency = 60 cycles
72-01-40 Page 701

FUEL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING Mar 11/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Name Remarks
Ultrasonic cleaner
Back-flushing fixture
5. Cleaning
A. General

MEASURES.
(1) With the exception of items specifically mentioned, clean all parts with petroleum
solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-031) or solvent (PWC11-032) and blow
dry with clean, low pressure compressed air.
NOTE: Tergit (PWC11-031) and Magkleen 4 (PWC11-032) are recommended to

be used as an alternative to petroleum solvent and trichloroethane
respectively when the use of these products is restricted by local
B. Fuel Filters
NOTE: 1. The following instructions apply to cleanable filters only. Filters marked ’NON
CLEANABLE’ must not be cleaned.
NOTE: 2. P&WC is unable to supply a specific number of times a filter element can be
cleaned before it is replaced. This number is dependent on the engine
operating conditions. The number of filter element cleanings is based on the
Operator’s experience, as well as the cleaning and inspection process. It
is possible that an impending by-pass indication may result prior to the next
scheduled filter element removal because of the filter element serviceability.
NOTE: 3. There are three acceptable methods to clean the fuel filters. The first method
is the preferred and most efficient method, with the other two as alternatives:
(1) METHOD 1: Ultrasonic or Electrosonic bath using aqueous degreaser

solution(PWC11-055) (Preferred Method)
(a) Pre-cleaning:
1 Ensure packings, if fitted, are removed from bore of filter element and
discarded.
72-01-40 Page 702

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: FAILURE TO PLUG CENTER OF THE FILTER ELEMENT CAN

RESULT IN CONTAMINATION OF THE INTERIOR. FUEL FLOW
IS FROM THE OUTSIDE TO THE INSIDE, THE INTERIOR
BEING THE CLEAN SIDE.
2 Plug the centers of the filter element by inserting a tapered rubber or
plastic plugs of the appropriate size into the bores.

3 Using protective gloves, immerse the filter element horizontally in aqueous
degreaser solution (PWC11-055), heated at 57 to 63° C (135-145°F) for
thirty minutes.
4 Immediately immerse in warm water 43 to 49° C (110-120°F) for five

minutes or spray with warm water for two minutes at 30 PSIG Max.
5 Spray flush filters from the outside to the inside with aqueous cleaner
solution (PWC11-054), heated at 57 to 63° C (135-145°F) with a maximum
pressure of 30 PSIG.
6 Immediately immerse in warm water at 43 to 49° C (110-120°F) for five

minutes or spray rinse with warm water for two minutes at 30 PSIG
Max.
(b) Clean the filter element as follows:
NOTE: 1. Adjust cleaning time to suit condition of filter. For best results,
replace the degreaser solution (PWC11-055) after thirty minutes of
cleaning time.
NOTE: 2. Steps 2 thru 5 are optional and may be omitted if the back-flush
equipment is not available.
1 Using protective gloves, fully immerse the filter element horizontally in a

clean thermostatically controlled ultrasonic or electrosonic bath of
aqueous degreaser solution (PWC11-055), heated at 57 to 63° C
(135-145°F) for twenty minutes, rotating filter 90 degrees after each five
minutes of cleaning operation.
2 Remove from bath and carefully remove a plug from one end of the filter.
3 Install in the back-flush fixture and immerse in aqueous degreaser solution

(PWC11-055), heated at 57 to 63° C (135-145°F).
72-01-40 Page 703

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 Using protective gloves, back-flush the filter (from the inside to the outside)
and rotate filter element 90 degrees after each three minutes of cleaning
operation, while providing 1 to 3 gallons per minute at 30 PSIG Max. for ten
minutes Min.
5 Remove the back-flush fixture and filter element from tank and with
protective glooves remove the filter.
6 Using protective gloves, carefully remove all remaining plugs from bore.

minutes or spray rinse with warm water for two minutes at 30 PSIG Max.

PRESSURE TO 29 psig (200 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES
OR FACE SHIELD TO PROTECT EYES.
8 Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
9 Inspect filter element (Ref. Inspection/Check).
(2) METHOD 2: Ultrasonic or Electrosonic bath using cleaner (PWC11-031) and

aqueous cleaner (PWC11-033) and degreaser solvent (PWC11-032) (Alternative
Method)
(a) Ensure packings, if fitted, are removed from bore of filter element and
discarded.

RESULT IN CONTAMINATION OF THE INTERIOR. FUEL FLOW IS
FROM THE OUTSIDE TO THE INSIDE, THE INTERIOR BEING THE
CLEAN SIDE.
(b) Plug the centers of the filter element by inserting a tapered rubber or plastic
plugs of the appropriate size into the bores.

CONTROL MEASURES.
(c) Immerse the filter element in cleaner (PWC11-031) for 30 minutes Min.
Maintain temperature at 21°C (70°F) or heat cleaner to 45°C (113°F) Max.

(d) Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(e) Spray flush filters with aqueous cleaner (PWC11-033), heated at 21°C (70°F),
using one part cleaner to three parts water.
72-01-40 Page 704

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(f) Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(g) Place filter element in ultrasonic or electrosonic cleaner boiling sump.

CONTROL MEASURES.
(h) Fill tank to approximately 1⁄4 in. (6.350 mm) below edge with degreaser solvent
(PWC11-032).
(i) Set the temperature to 37.7°C (100°F) Max.
(j) Turn the ultrasonic or electrosonic switch to ON position for ten minutes
minimum.
(k) Using protective gloves, immerse the filter element horizontally in the ultrasonic
or electrosonic bath
(l) Back-flush the filter element using 1 to 3 gallons per minute (3.78-11.35 liters)
at 30 psig (206.9kPa) for ten minutes, rotating filter 180 degrees while
back-flushing.
(m) Using protective gloves, remove element from tank and plugs from bore.

(n) Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(o) Inspect filter element (Ref. Inspection/Check).
(3) METHOD 3: Ultrasonic clean filter using solvent (PWC11-002) (Alternative Method)
NOTE: Verify if the use of solvent (PWC11-002) is restricted by local environmental

and/or health legislation. If this is the case, this method is not recommended.
(a) Ensure packings, if fitted, are removed from bore of filter element and discarded.

RESULT IN CONTAMINATION OF THE INTERIOR. FUEL FLOW IS
CLEAN SIDE.
72-01-40 Page 705

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Place filter element horizontally in ultrasonic cleaner tank.

CONTROL MEASURES.
(d) Fill tank to approximately 1⁄4 in. (6.350 mm) below edge with solvent
(PWC11-002).
(e) Operate the cleaner for 10 to 15 minutes. Use protective gloves, rotate the filter
element 90 degrees after every three minutes of cleaning operation.
(f) Remove the filter element from the tank and install on a back-flush fixture.
(g) Back-flush the filter element with filtered solvent (PWC11-002)
(h) Using protective gloves, remove element from fixture and plugs from bore.

(i) Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(j) Inspect filter element (Ref. Inspection/Check).
C. Fuel Pump Inlet Screen
(1) Gently agitate screen in unused petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner

(PWC11-031) or solvent (PWC11-032) to remove loose contamination.
NOTE: 1. Any contamination found should be investigated and corrective action

taken.
NOTE: 2. Tergit (PWC11-031) and Magkleen 4 (PWC11-032) are recommended to

be used as an alternative to petroleum solvent and trichloroethane
respectively when the use of these products is restricted by local
(2) Remove screen from solvent and allow to drain in clean environment.
NOTE: Use brush to remove stubborn contamination.

(3) Dry screen with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(4) Inspect screen (Ref. Inspection/Check).
72-01-40 Page 706

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Flexible Fuel Manifold Hose
CAUTION: THE PRESENCE OF CHLORINE CAN CHEMICALLY ATTACK AND CORRODE

THE MANIFOLD WIRE OVERBRAID, WHICH CAN CAUSE A HOSE TO
RUPTURE. ENSURE THAT THE WORK ENVIRONMENT, TOOLS, FIXTURES,
ETC. ARE FREE FROM THE PRESENCE OF ALL CHLORINE AND ALL
PRODUCTS CONTAINING ANY FORM OF CHLORINE. ENSURE HANDS HAVE
BEEN CLEANED PROPERLY TO REMOVE ALL RESIDUAL CHLORIDES
CAUTION: DO NOT BEND THE HOSE SECTIONS TO AN INSIDE BEND RADIUS LESS
THAN 2 INCHES (50.8 mm). THE HOSE CAN BE DAMAGED TO THE
EXTENT OF CAUSING AN EXTERNAL LEAK IF THE BEND IS OVER THE
LIMIT.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A BRUSH THAT IS SO STIFF THAT THE RUBBER IS DAMAGED.
(1) Clean the outside surface of the fuel manifold hose per SPOP 209 (wiping method
only).
(2) Remove all old packing material from the adapter packing groove using petroleum
solvent (PWC11-027) and be careful to not scratch the surfaces. Do not let debris
enter the fuel passages.
(3) Manually wipe the external surfaces of the fuel manifold to remove all foreign
material using a soft brush or a lint-free cloth.
6. In-Situ Fuel Nozzle Adapter Washing (Optional)
A. General
CAUTION: IF YOU DO THIS OPTIONAL CLEANING METHOD, THE CLEANING

MUST START BETWEEN 150 AND 250 HOURS ON NEW OR
OVERHAULED NOZZLES USED IN NORMAL ENVIRONMENTS AND
WITHIN 100 HOURS IF USED IN HOT AND SALT LADEN ENVIRONMENTS.
(1) A fuel nozzle adapter wash uses a biodegradable wash solution (PWC11-003) to
wash the adapter passages. A frequent wash of the fuel nozzle adapters prevents
carbon buildup within the adapter passages. During the wash, approximately 5 US
gallons (19 liters) will pass through the adapters, cleaning the passages and
preventing carbon build-up.
(2) The minimum standard for water is drinking quality.
(3) After the wash, the adapters are rinsed of wash solution, using water or a
water/methanol (PWC11-010) solution, depending on the ambient temperature.
(4) The rinse solutions makeup (according to ambient temperature) is found in Table
701.
(5) The biodegradable wash solutions (PWC11-003) and solutions makeup (according
to ambient temperature) are found in Table 702.
72-01-40 Page 707

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) The wash cart (PWC32677-300) operating schedule is given in Table 703. This
schedule contains all the valve positions necessary for the wash.
TABLE 701, Rinse Solutions

WATER METHANOL
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE % BY VOL. % BY VOL.
+2°C up +36°F up 100 Nil
-25 to +2°C -13 to +36°F 50 50
Below -25°C Below -13°F 40 60
TABLE 702, Biodegradable Wash Solutions (Ardrox 6367 (Turboclean 2), B & B TC100,
R-MCS-G21 and ZOK27)
CLEANING
AGENT METHANOL WATER
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE % BY VOL. % BY VOL. % BY VOL.
+2°C up +36°F up 20 Nil 80
-25 to +2°C -13 to +36°F 20 30 50
Below -25°C Below -13°F 20 40 40
NOTE: Ardrox 6368 (Turboclean 2 RTU) is used undiluted at temperatures above +2°C (36°F).
This product must not be used below this temperature.
TABLE 703, Wash Cart (PWC32677-300) Operating Schedule

VALVE POSITION
OPERATION A B C
(1) Agitate cleaning solutions for two minutes AGITATE AGITATE OFF
(2) Solution wash for three minutes WASH WASH ON
(3) Soak for 10 minutes OFF OFF OFF
(4) Solution wash for three minutes WASH WASH ON
(5) Soak for 10 minutes OFF OFF OFF
(6) Rinse for six minutes RINSE RINSE ON
(7) Reduce both reservoir and pulse pressure to zero OFF OFF OFF
(7) Depending upon the operating environment, the nature and frequency of washing is
recommended to be in accordance with Table 704.
72-01-40 Page 708

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 704, Fuel Nozzle Adapter Wash Schedule

Operating
Environment Initial Subsequent Remarks
Hot and Salt 100 FH 100 FH Adjust frequency based on experience
Laden
Environment
Other Normal 150-250 FH 150-250 FH Adjust frequency based on experience
Environments
B. Equipment Required
(1) Compressor/fuel nozzle wash cart (PWC32677-300)
(a) This cart contains the components required to enable wash and rinse fluids to
be supplied to the fuel nozzle adapters at the specified rate and pressure.
(2) Quick disconnect fitting set (0.4375-20 UNF).
C. Fuel Nozzle Adapter Wash Procedure
(1) Depending upon the ambient temperature, fill rinse-and-wash tanks with appropriate
rinse and wash solutions (Ref. Tables 701 and 702).
(2) Disconnect tubes at combustion chamber and turbine support case drains (Ref.
AMM).
(3) Install suitable drain hoses at combustion chamber and turbine support case drains.
(4) Disconnect drain line from flow divider and dump valve (Ref. AMM).
(5) Connect wash cart fluid delivery hose to outlet of dump valve, using suitable quick
disconnect fitting set (0.4375-20 UNF).
CAUTION: WATER USED TO ACCELERATE ENGINE COOLING MUST BE

DEMINERALIZED.
(6) Before washing, ensure engine temperature is below 65°C (150°F) by one of the
following methods:
(a) Allow engine time to cool down (40 minutes minimum), or;
CAUTION: ENGINE MUST BE AT REST AT LEAST 40 MINUTES PRIOR TO

WATER INJECTION TO PREVENT THERMAL SHOCK AND
RESULTING DAMAGE.
(b) Carry out a dry motoring run (Ref. AMM) and inject demineralized water
through the wash nozzle.
72-01-40 Page 709

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED 120 psig (827.4 kPa).

(7) Connect compressed air or nitrogen (PWC05-050) supply to wash cart
(PWC32677-300).
(8) Set reservoir pressure to 60 psig (413 kPa), using reservoir air regulator.
(9) Set pulse pressure to 70 psig (483 kPa), using pulse air regulator.
(10) Set valves A, B and C to ‘‘OFF’’ position.
(11) Operate the wash cart (PWC32677-300) in accordance with Table 703.
(12) Disconnect wash cart fluid delivery hose from outlet of dump valve.
(13) Connect drain line to flow divider and dump valve (Ref. AMM).
(14) Remove drain hoses at combustion chamber and turbine support case drains.
(15) Connect tubes at combustion chamber and turbine support case drains (Ref. AMM).
CAUTION: CARRY OUT AN ENGINE GROUND RUN AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO

AVOID CORROSION PROBLEMS.
(16) Carry out an engine run, at 80% torque for one minute minimum, to completely dry
engine(Ref. AMM).
7. Painting
A. Fuel Heater Insulating Coating

MEASURES.
(1) Prepare damaged surfaces by cleaning with solvent (PWC11-024).
(2) Mix thermal paint (PWC07-008) compound A (epoxy base) with compound B
(catalyst) in a 10:1 ratio. Mixing must be performed in an open container, and quantity
prepared must only be sufficient for one coat. Apply with a brush to damaged
areas. Three coats must be applied with one hour drying time between coats.
NOTE: Once catalyzed, the paint has a usable life of 45 to 60 minutes. Brushes
and containers must be cleaned with solvent (PWC11-024) after initial
mixing of the two epoxy compounds.
(3) Inspect treated surface and ensure that damaged area is completely covered.
Recoat as necessary.
(4) Fuel heaters must be allowed to air dry at room temperature for an additional
12-hour period minimum.
72-01-40 Page 710

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS
1. General
C. Refer to equivalent functional heading of Chapter 72-00-00 for information of a general


LOCKWIRE.
Item No. Name
PWC05-037 Enamel, Epoxy
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC05-161 Solution, Chromel Pickle
PWC05-390 Tube Wrap
PWC08-016 Epoxy, Adhesive Paste
PWC09-017A Adhesive/Sealant
PWC11-014 Isopropyl Alcohol
PWC11-019 Solution, Chromate Conversion
PWC13-001 Primer, Epoxy
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Brush, Steel
72-01-40 Page 801

FUEL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Mar 11/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Name
Dies
File
Files, Rotary
Gun, Heating, (temperature range minimum 300°F (149°C) to maximum 450°F (232°C))
Plate, Lapping
Swiss Files
Taps
5. Approved Repairs
A. Tubes
(1) Using abrasive cloth (PWC05-101) followed by polishing with crocus cloth
(PWC05-061), blend out nicks, scratches, pits and corrosion not exceeding 0.005 in.
(0.127 mm) deep, provided blended areas do not exceed 0.5 sq.in. (322.58 sq.mm)
and are separated by 0.50 in. (12.70 mm) minimum undamaged surface. FPI
tubes using the fluorescent penetrant manufacturers instructions.
B. Super B Nut Replacement (Ref. Fig. 801)
CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE NIPPLE.

(1) Remove wire (2) from nut (1). Discard nut and wire.
(2) Install replacement nut (1) and wire (2).
C. Flexible Fuel Manifold Hose
CAUTION: THE PRESENCE OF CHLORINE CAN CHEMICALLY ATTACK AND CORRODE

THE MANIFOLD WIRE OVERBRAID, WHICH CAN CAUSE A HOSE TO
RUPTURE. ENSURE THAT THE WORK ENVIRONMENT, TOOLS, FIXTURES,
ETC. ARE FREE FROM THE PRESENCE OF ALL CHLORINE AND ALL
PRODUCTS CONTAINING ANY FORM OF CHLORINE. ENSURE HANDS HAVE
BEEN CLEANED PROPERLY TO REMOVE ALL RESIDUAL CHLORIDES
CAUTION: DO NOT BEND THE HOSE SECTIONS TO AN INSIDE BEND RADIUS LESS
THAN 2 INCHES (50.8 mm). THE HOSE CAN BE DAMAGED, TO THE
EXTENT OF CAUSING AN EXTERNAL LEAK, IF THE BEND IS OVER THE
LIMIT.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE FLEXIBLE FUEL MANIFOLD HAS BEEN CLEANED AND
INSPECTED BEFORE YOU DO EITHER OF THESE REPAIRS. INCORRECT
CLEANING MAY RESULT IN AN UNSATISFACTORY BOND.
(1) Do the steps that follow to repair the fuel manifold hose in zones A and/or B (Ref.
Fig. 802):
NOTE: This repair cannot be done on wing. The flexible fuel manifold must be
removed from the engine.
72-01-40 Page 802

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Clean the fuel manifold hoses thoroughly before you do the repair (Ref.
Cleaning/Painting).
(b) Cover the repair location with a clean lint free cloth, and let the fuel manifold
hose dry for 20 minutes at room temperature.
(c) Re-inspect the repair location on the fuel manifold hose to make sure that the
damage does not exceeded the specified limits (Ref. Inspection/Check).
NOTE: Do not proceed with this repair if the wire overbraid is exposed.
(d) Apply adhesive/sealant (PWC09-017A) to the damaged area, and restore to

the original diameter of the fuel manifold hose. Let the adhesive/sealant dry
for 4 hours.
(2) (Optional) Do the steps that follow to apply tube wrap (PWC05-390) on the fuel
manifold hose (Ref. Fig. 803):
NOTE: This repair cannot be done on wing. The flexible fuel manifold must be
removed from the engine.
(a) Clean the fuel manifold hoses (3) thoroughly before you do the repair (Ref.
Cleaning/Painting).
(b) Place the flexible fuel manifold on a clean work bench.
(c) Remove the protective backing from both sides of the tube wrap (2)
(PWC05-390).
(d) Align the tube wrap (2) with the fuel manifold fitting (1) and fuel manifold hose
(3) as shown, and firmly press the short tabs up and around the fuel manifold
hose. Then, firmly press the long tabs down and around the fuel manifold
hose and overlap the short tabs.
(e) Using a heat gun (temperature range 300°F (149°C) to 450°F (232°C)), apply
heat to the tube wrap for 3 to 4 minutes until the tube wrap is fully cured.
NOTE: The tube wrap will change from a glossy orange to a matt orange when
cured.
D. Housings
(1) Blend out nicks, burrs, scratches, pits and corrosion using 320 grit abrasive cloth
(PWC05-101) followed by polishing with crocus cloth (PWC05-061).
(3) Replace defective inserts and studs.
(4) Repair damaged anodic film surfaces on aluminum components (Ref. 72-00-00,
APPROVED REPAIRS).
(5) Dress mating surfaces using lapping plate and lapping compound (PWC05-019).
72-01-40 Page 803

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C11214A
Super B Nut Replacement
Figure 801
72-01-40 Page 804

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 801
1. Nut
2. Wire
E. Fuel Heater Thermal Element (Ref. Fig. 804)
CAUTION: CONTAMINATION WILL DAMAGE THE FUEL HEATER. DO NOT LET

CONTAMINATION ENTER THE FUEL HEATER THROUGH THE
ATMOSPHERE, OR WITH THE USE OF PARTS, TOOLS, HANDS OR
LUBRICANTS.
(1) Disconnect aircraft fuel supply line (Ref. AMM).
NOTE: This will prevent contamination of the engine oil due to fuel migrating from
the aircraft fuel tank.
WARNING: THERMAL VALVE HOUSING CONTAINS APPROXIMATELY 8 OUNCES

OF FUEL WHICH WILL BE RELEASED ONCE THE RETAINING CAP IS
REMOVED.
WARNING: BE EXTREMELY CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE THE RETAINING CAP
TO PREVENT INJURY. PARTS UNDER THE RETAINING CAP ARE
SPRING-LOADED.
(2) Carefully remove the retaining cap assembly (1) from the fuel heater (2).
NOTE: As the last threads of the retaining cap disengage from the housing, spring
tension from the thermal valve spring can be felt through the retaining cap.
If this tension is not felt, then the fuel heater must be removed from the
engine (Ref. Removal/Installation) and inspected for free movement of the
thermal element (Ref. Stewart Warner SB10718-73-12 or 10839-73-07
and Component Maintenance Manuals 73-10-06 or 73-10-08).
(3) Remove the thermal element (3) from the retaining cap (4) and packings (5, 6).
Discard the thermal element and packings.
NOTE: Use Stewart Warner thermal element replacement parts kit P/N G726681.
(4) Lubricate packing (5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on retaining cap (4).
(5) Lubricate packing (6) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on the thermal
element (3).
(6) Immerse the thermal element assembly in cold water 2 to 8°C (36 to 46°F) to fully
retract the piston prior to assembly with the retaining cap.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE WHEN YOU DRY THE THERMAL ELEMENT NOT TO
DAMAGE THE PUSH ROD GUIDE .
(7) Remove the thermal element from the water and dry with a clean lint free cloth.
72-01-40 Page 805

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL MANIFOLD ZONE A ZONE B

FITTING (REF.)
WIRE OVERBRAID (REF.)
FUEL MANIFOLD
HOSES
C97100A
Flexible Fuel Manifold Hose - Sealant Repair
Figure 802
72-01-40 Page 806

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Install the thermal element counterclockwise in the retaining cap, until the thermal
element screws through the retaining cap thread and disengages. The thermal
element should then be able to move freely in the retaining cap.
NOTE: The thermal element has left-handed threads.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE THERMAL ELEMENT IS INSTALLED CONCENTRIC

WITH THE BORE OF THE PUSH ROD GUIDE AND DOES NOT FOUL OR
BIND DURING INSTALLATION.
(9) Insert retaining cap assembly into the thermal element valve housing. Make sure
the cap is seated in the push rod guide and engages the hole in the sliding sleeve.
NOTE: A light resistance from the spring loaded valve must be felt.
(10) Torque the retaining cap assembly 75 to 80 lb.in. (8.5-9.0 Nm) and lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
F. Fuel Pump Adapter (Ref. Fig. 805)
(1) Clean surface to be repaired using a swarb soaked in isopropyl alcohol (PWC11-014)
and crocus cloth (PWC05-061).
(2) Using a small steel brush and/or file and/or rotary file (regulated at 40 psi), remove
corrosion from:
(a) The crosshatched areas shown on views A, B and Detail D (total area affected
must not exceed 50% of the surface over the arc of 120 degrees).
(b) Face C outside the crosshatched area shown in View A to a maximum depth of
0.050 in. (1.27 mm) (total area affected must not exceed 20% of the surface).
NOTE: Clustered pits should be blended after the removal of corrosion.
(3) Remove all debris.
(4) Adapters exceeding the limits after removal of the corrosion are unacceptable and
must be rejected.

FOR SAFE HANDLING, USE AND CONTROL MEASURES
(5) Apply chromate conversion solution (PWC11-019) or chromel pickle solution
(PWC05-161) to exposed surface (Ref. 72-00-00, APPROVED REPAIRS, Chromate
Surface Repair of Magnesium).
(6) Using a rag soaked in clean water, clean affected area.
72-01-40 Page 807

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C100032
Flexible Fuel Manifold Hose - Tube Wrap Repair
Figure 803
72-01-40 Page 808

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 803
1. Fuel Manifold Fitting

2. Tube Wrap
3. Fuel Manifold Hose

PRESSURE TO 29 psig OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES OR FACE SHIELD
TO PROTECT EYES.
(7) Dry thoroughly with clean low pressure compressed air at 29 psig (200 kPa).
(8) Optional (for improved corrosion resistance).
(a) Fill previously corroded area/pits (Ref. Views A, B and Detail D) with epoxy
(PWC08-016).
(b) Blend epoxy filled area/pits to restore original contour. Ensure epoxy does not
protrude above Face C.
(c) Cure at 115°C (240°F) for 1.5 hours.

PRESSURE TO 29 psig OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES OR FACE SHIELD
TO PROTECT EYES.
(9) Apply one coat of primer (PWC13-001) (may be diluted with 10% solvent) to
reworked areas. Allow 8 hours for air drying of primer before application of enamel
paint. Clean low pressure compressed air at 29 psig (200 kPa) may be used to
accelerate drying.
(10) Apply two to three coats of aluminized epoxy enamel (PWC05-037) to primed
surface. Allow surface of enamel to become tacky between each coat. Allow final
coat of paint to dry for 24 hours before re-installing fuel pump adapter.
NOTE: Drying times of primer and paint can be reduced by heating (use an oven
(temperature 60 to 82°C (140-180°F) for one hour) or a heat gun at the
low heat setting - see manufacturers instructions).
72-01-40 Page 809

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
6
5
3
4
C36520
Fuel Heater Thermal Element - Removal/Installation of
Figure 804
72-01-40 Page 810

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 804
1. Retaining Cap Assembly

2. Fuel Heater
3. Thermal Element
4. Retaining Cap
5. Packing (P/N AS3209-030)
6. Packing (P/N AS3209-010 or ST3367-010)
72-01-40 Page 811

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A B
0.315 in.
(8.00 mm) MIN.
A D
EPOXY FILLING
PERMITTED
60 ° 60 ° FACE C
VIEW A
SECTION A−A
.135 in REF.
(3.43 mm)
.315 IN. MIN.
(8.00 MM)
.135 in. REF.
(3.43 mm)
EPOXY FILLING
PERMITTED
60 ° 60 °
VIEW B DETAIL D
C38702A
Fuel Pump Adapter - Repair
Figure 805
72-01-40 Page 812

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL SYSTEM - SERVICING
1. General
A. These instructions provide information necessary for servicing components of the engine
oil system.
B. Refer to 72-00-00, SERVICING, for draining, filling, flushing and replenishing engine oil.
C. Lubricate packings using engine oil (PWC03-001), unless otherwise stated.
WARNING: WEAR GOGGLES WHEN CUTTING, REMOVING OR INSTALLING

LOCKWIRE.
Item No. Name
PWC05-089 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Pressure Oil Filter (Ref. Fig. 301)
A. Removal
(1) Remove plug (1) and drain oil into a container. Discard packing (2).
(2) Remove nuts (3), washers (4), bracket (5), cover (6) and packing (7). Discard
packing.
(3) Remove retaining ring (8) and filter (9) from cover (6). Discard packing (10).
(4) Inspect oil filter (Ref. INSPECTION/CHECK).
72-01-50 Page 301

OIL SYSTEM - SERVICING Mar 03/2000
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
5
12
3
11
C37181A
Pressure Oil Filter - Removal/Installation
Figure 301
72-01-50 Page 302

OIL SYSTEM - SERVICING Jul 13/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 301
1. Plug
2. Packing
3. Nut
4. Washer
5. Bracket
6. Cover
7. Packing
8. Retaining Ring
9. Filter
10. Packing
11. Retaining Ring
12. Screen
(5) Remove retaining ring (11) and screen (12).
NOTE: Screen is recommended to be removed and cleaned only when the

associated oil filter is replaced.
B. Installation
(1) Install screen (12) (concave face outward) and secure with retaining ring (11).
CAUTION: BEFORE INSTALLING PACKING, REFER TO IPC TO ENSURE FILTER

HAS CORRECT PART NUMBER.
(2) Lubricate packing (10) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install in filter (9).
(3) Install filter (9) in cover (6).
(4) Install retaining ring (8).
(6) Install cover (6), bracket (5), washers (4) and nuts (3). Torque nuts 75 to 85 lb.in.
(8.48-9.61 Nm).
(7) Lubricate packing (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on plug (1). Install
plug, torque 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm) and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089)
or (PWC05-295).
6. Reduction Gearbox (RGB) Scavenge Oil Filter (Ref. Fig. 302)
A. Removal
(1) Remove nuts (1), washers (2), bracket (3), cover (4) and packing (5). Discard
packing.
72-01-50 Page 303

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R.G.B. SCAVENGE FILTER
9
7
5
4
2
1
3 1
C63455
RGB Scavenge Oil Filter - Removal/Installation
Figure 302
72-01-50 Page 304

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 302
1. Nut
2. Washer
3. Bracket
4. Cover
5. Packing
6. Retaining Ring
7. Filter
8. Spacer Ring
9. Packing
(2) Remove retaining ring (6), filter (7) and spacer ring (8) from cover.
(3) Remove packing (9) from filter. Discard packing.
(4) Inspect oil filter (Ref. INSPECTION/CHECK).
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (9) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on filter (7).
(2) Install spacer ring (8) and filter (7) in cover (4) and secure with retaining ring (6).
(3) Lubricate packing (5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on cover.
(4) Install cover (4), washers (2), bracket (3), and nuts (1). Torque nuts 32 to 36 lb.in.
(3.62-4.07 Nm).
72-01-50 Page 305/306

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General

engine oil system.
B. Refer to 72-00-00, SERVICING, for draining, filling, flushing and replenishing the engine
oil.
WARNING: WEAR GOGGLES WHEN CUTTING, REMOVING OR INSTALLING

LOCKWIRE.
TOUCHES BARE SKIN.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CHAFING/RUBBING, ENSURE NEWLY INSTALLED TUBES DO
NOT TOUCH ADJACENT COMPONENTS. MINIMUM CLEARANCE IS
0.125 in. (3.175 mm).
NOTE: 1. Lubricate packings with engine oil (PWC03-001), unless otherwise stated.
NOTE: 2. In the event of tube replacement due to cracks or indication of cracks, it is

recommended a borescope inspection be carried out on rotating assemblies
(LP, HP and PT) (Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK), to eliminate vibration
as a possible source of tube damage.
Item No. Name
PWC04-001 Grease, Synthetic
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC06-032 Compound, Anti-galling and Antiseize
72-01-50 Page 401

OIL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Nov 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC37093 Crimper
PWC37303 Pusher/Puller
PWC37614 Adapter
PWC37651 Puller
PWC37728 Puller
PWC37952 Puller
PWC37953 Puller
PWC37981 Puller
Not Applicable
5. Main Oil Tank Chip Collector , Strainer and Associated Parts (Ref. Fig. 401)
A. Removal

DISCONNECTING PLUGS FROM RECEPTACLES.
(1) Chip Detector
(a) If installed, disconnect electrical harness from chip detector (1).
(b) Remove chip detector (1).
NOTE: 1. Replacement of the chip detector packings (2) is only necessary if a

visual inspection (nicks, cuts, etc.) shows they are damaged.
NOTE: 2. Packing (3), located inside chip detector valve, is not normally
removed at maintenance.
(2) Chip Detector and Associated Parts
(a) Drain oil (Ref. 72-00-00, SERVICING).
NOTE: Chip detector (1) and packings (2) are removed when oil is drained.
(b) Remove chip detector valve (4). Discard packing (5).
(c) Remove bolts (6) and washers (7).
(d) Remove adapter (8) and packing (9) using puller (PWC37728). Discard
packing.
(e) Remove strainer (10). Discard packing (11).
72-01-50 Page 402

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(a) Lubricate packing (11) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on strainer (10).
(b) Install strainer (10).
(c) Lubricate packing (9) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on adapter (8).
(d) Install adapter (8). washers (7) and bolts (6). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(e) Lubricate packing (5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on chip detector
valve (4).
NOTE: If removed, lubricate new packing (3) with engine oil (PWC03-001)
and install in the chip detector valve.
(f) Install valve. Torque 175 to 200 lb.in. (19.78-22.60 Nm) and secure with
(g) Lubricate packings (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on chip detector
(1).
CAUTION: AFTER INSTALLATION, ENSURE VISUALLY OR BY FEEL, THAT

SCALLOP ON CHIP DETECTOR IS IN LINE WITH FLAT ON CHIP
DETECTOR VALVE HEXAGON.
(h) Install detector (1). Rotate detector 90 degrees clockwise to locked position.

(i) Connect electrical harness (Ref. AMM).
(j) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
(2) Chip Detector
(a) Lubricate packing (5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on chip detector
valve (4).
(b) Install valve. Torque 175 to 200 lb.in. (19.78-22.60 Nm) and secure with
(c) Lubricate packings (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on chip detector
(1).

SCALLOP ON CHIP DETECTOR PLUG IS IN LINE WITH FLAT ON
CHIP DETECTOR VALVE HEXAGON.
(d) Install detector (1). Rotate detector 90 degrees clockwise to locked position.
72-01-50 Page 403

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
7
8
9
10
11
TYPICAL
LOCKED POSITION
C38775
Main Oil Tank Chip Detector, Strainer and Associated Parts - Removal/Installation
Figure 401
72-01-50 Page 404

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Chip Detector
2. Packing
3. Packing
4. Chip Detector Valve
5. Packing
6. Bolt
7. Washer
8. Adapter
9. Packing
10. Strainer
11. Packing

(e) Connect electrical harness (Ref. AMM).
(f) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
6. RGB Chip Detector, Strainer and Associated Parts (Ref. Fig. 402)
A. Removal

(1) Chip Detector
(a) Disconnect electrical harness from chip detector (1) (Ref. AMM).
(b) Remove chip detector (1).
NOTE: 1. Replacement of the chip detector packings (2) is only necessary if a

visual inspection (nicks, cuts, etc.) shows they are damaged.
NOTE: 2. Packing (3), located inside chip detector valve, is not normally
removed at maintenance.
(a) Disconnect electrical harness from chip detector (1) (Ref. AMM).
(b) Drain oil (Ref. 72-00-00, SERVICING).
NOTE: Chip detector (1) and packings (2) are removed when oil is drained.
(c) Remove chip detector valve (4). Discard packing (5).
(d) Remove nuts (6) and washers (7).
72-01-50 Page 405

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
9
6 10
4
TYPICAL
LOCKED POSITION
C38774B
Reduction Gearbox Chip Detector, Strainer and Associated Parts - Removal/Installation
Figure 402
72-01-50 Page 406

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 402
1. Chip Detector
2. Packing
3. Packing
4. Chip Detector Valve
5. Packing
6. Nut
7. Washer
8. Adapter
9. Packing
10. Strainer
(e) Remove adapter (8) using puller (PWC37728). Discard packing (9).
(f) Remove strainer (10).
B. Installation

(a) Install strainer (10).
(b) Lubricate packing (9) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on adapter (8).
(c) Install adapter (8), washers (7) and nuts (6). Torque nuts 32 to 36 lb.in.
(3.62-4.07 Nm).
(d) Lubricate packing (5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on chip detector
valve (4).
NOTE: If removed, lubricate new packing (3) with engine oil (PWC03-001)
and install in the chip detector valve.
(e) Install chip detector valve. Torque 175 to 200 lb.in. (19.78-22.60 Nm). Secure
(f) Lubricate packings (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on chip detector
(1).

(g) Install detector (1). Rotate detector 90 degrees clockwise to locked position.
(h) Connect electrical harness (Ref. AMM).
72-01-50 Page 407

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
(2) Chip Detector
(a) Lubricate packings (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and if required, install on
chip detector (1).

(b) Install detector (1). Rotate plug 90 degrees clockwise to locked position.
(c) Connect electrical harness (Ref. AMM).
7. Oil Pressure Differential Switches (Pressure and Scavenge) (Ref. Fig. 403)
A. Removal

(1) Disconnect electrical connectors from switches (1) (Ref. AMM).
(2) Remove switches (1) and packings (2, 3). Discard packings.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packings (2, 3) and install on switches (1).
(2) Install switch and indicator, torque 45 to 55 lb.in. (5.09-6.22 Nm) and secure with

(3) Reconnect electrical connectors (Ref. AMM).
8. Oil Pressure Regulating Valve (Ref. Figs. 404 and 405)
A. Removal (Ref. Fig. 404)
(1) Disconnect oil check valve tube at elbow (11).
(2) Disconnect pressure sensing tube at top of tee (10) (Ref. 72-01-30).
(3) Remove bolts (6) and plate (7). Raise transfer tube (4) using pusher/puller
(PWC37303) clear of pressure regulating valve assembly (1).
(4) Remove nuts (9), washers (8) and regulating valve assembly.
72-01-50 Page 408

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Remove transfer tubes (2, 4) and packing (3, 5). Discard packings.
NOTE: For replacement of restrictor (30) and plug (31) (Ref. fig. 405), refer to
Approved Repairs.
B. Disassembly (Ref. Fig. 405)
(1) Loosen nuts (19, 23, 25) and remove tee (18, 22), elbow (24), packings (21, 27,
29) and backup rings (20, 26, 28). Discard packings and backup rings.
WARNING: COVER RESTRAINS SPRING.

(2) Remove bolts (2, 3), washer (5), bracket (4), cover (1) using puller (PWC37651),
packing (6) and spacer(s) (7). Discard packing.
NOTE: Record number of spacers removed.
(3) Remove spring (8), spring sleeve (9) and valve (13).
(4) Remove valve sleeve (12), using puller (PWC37952) and packings (10, 11). Discard
packings.
(5) Remove retaining ring (14) from sleeve.
(6) Remove sleeve cover (15) and packing (16). Discard packing.
C. Assembly
(1) Lubricate with engine oil (PWC03-001) packing (16) and install on sleeve cover
(15).
(2) Install sleeve cover and retaining ring (14) in valve sleeve (12).
(3) Install valve (13) in sleeve and ensure free movement.
(4) Lubricate packings (10, 11) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on sleeve (12).
(5) Install sleeve in regulating valve housing (17).
(7) Install spring sleeve (9), spring (8), spacer(s) (7), cover (1), bracket (4), washer (5)
and bolts (2, 3). Torque bolts 32 to 36 lb.in. (3.62-4.07 Nm) and safety with wire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
NOTE: To obtain correct oil pressure (Ref. 05-10-00), the number of spacers (7)
varies between one minimum and six maximum. Reassemble using the
original spacers (Ref. Subpara. B., step (2)) and adjust if necessary during
test (Ref. 72-00-00).
(8) Install tees (18, 22), elbow (24), nuts (19, 23, 25), backup rings (22, 26, 28) and
packings (21, 27, 29) (Ref. 72-00-00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES). Torque nuts
fingertight.
72-01-50 Page 409

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 PRESSURE FILTER
2
3
SCAVENGE FILTER
C63442
Oil Pressure Differential Switches (Pressure and Scavenge) - Removal/Installation
Figure 403
72-01-50 Page 410

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 403
1. Switch
2. Packing
3. Packing
D. Installation (Ref. Fig. 404)
(1) Lubricate packings (3, 5) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on transfer tubes
(2, 4), respectively.
(2) Install transfer tube (2) in regulating valve (1) and transfer tube (4) in filter bypass
and relief valve housing, ensuring that both bottom in their respective bores.
(3) Install regulating valve assembly (1), washers (8) and nuts (9). Torque nuts 32 to
36 lb.in. (3.62-4.07 Nm).
(4) Lower transfer tube (4) into regulating valve assembly (1) and install plate (7) and
bolts (6). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULE AND TUBE NUT THREADS

LUBRICATED.
loosely connect oil check valve tube at elbow (11). Torque nut 70 to 80 lb.in.
(8.0-9.0 Nm).
NOTE: There must be no extrusion of packing or backup ring.

(6) Torque tube nut 270 to 300 lb.in. (30.51-33.90 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULE AND TUBE NUT THREADS

LUBRICATED.
loosely connect pressure sensing tube at tee (10). Torque nut 38 to 42 lb.in.
(4.29-4.75 Nm).

(8) Torque pressure sensing tube nut 90 to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.30 Nm) and secure with
72-01-50 Page 411

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 7
3
3
8
9 10 11 12
C63448C
Oil Pressure Regulating Valve - Removal/Installation
Figure 404
72-01-50 Page 412

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 404
1. Regulating Valve Assembly

2. Transfer Tube
3. Packing
4. Transfer Tube
5. Packing
6. Bolt
7. Plate
8. Washer
9. Nut
10. Tee
11. Elbow
12. Tee
9. Pressure Oil Check Valve (Ref. Fig. 406)
A. Removal
NOTE: The pressure oil check valve is not adjustable in the field. The valve can be
replaced by a new or serviceable valve for troubleshooting or disassembled for
cleaning.

(1) If installed, remove insulating tape (PWC05-105) or harness sleeve (PWC05-273)
from connector.
(2) Disconnect electrical harness connector P32.
(3) Remove oil pressure tube (Ref. Para. 12. F.).
(4) Remove pressure relief valve cover and filter element (Ref. Servicing).
(5) Disconnect oil pressure tubes (1, 2, 3).
(6) Remove air drain tube (4) (Ref. 72-01-30).
(7) Remove bolts (5), oil pressure valve assembly (6) and packing (7). Discard
packing.
(8) Loosen nut (8) and remove elbow (9), packing (11), backup ring (10) and nut (8).
Discard packing and backup ring.
(9) Remove nipples (12, 14) and packings (13, 15). Discard packings.
72-01-50 Page 413

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4
2
8
A 9
10 11 12
13
16
15
14 17
5
3 6
1 7
20 21
19
27
18
29
28 26
32 23 25
1 30
31
22 24
OIL PRESSURE SENSING TUBE ASSEMBLY,
No.6 AND No.7 BEARINGS (REF.)
VIEW A
C63449C
Oil Pressure Regulating Valve - Disassembly/Assembly
Figure 405
72-01-50 Page 414

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 405
1. Cover
2. Bolt (3022876)
3. Bolt (3116607-01)
4. Bracket
5. Washer
6. Packing
7. Spacer(s)
8. Spring
9. Sleeve
10. Packing
11. Packing
12. Valve Sleeve
13. Valve
14. Retaining Ring
15. Sleeve Cover
16. Packing
17. Housing
18. Tee
19. Nut
20. Backup Ring
21. Packing
22. Tee
23. Nut
24. Elbow
25. Nut
26. Backup Ring
27. Packing
28. Backup Ring
29. Packing
30. Restrictor
31. Plug
72-01-50 Page 415

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
10
11
6 7
22 21 23
19 20
17 18
4
25
13
15
24 5
12 14
16
2 3
D
FW
P32
C79705
Pressure Oil Check Valve - Removal/Installation
Figure 406
72-01-50 Page 416

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 406
1. Oil Pressure Tube

4. Air Drain Tube
5. Bolt
6. Valve Assembly
7. Packing
8. Nut
9. Elbow
10. Backup Ring
11. Packing
12. Nipple
13. Packing
14. Nipple
15. Packing
16. Bolt
17. Cover
18. Packing
19. Spring
20. Piston
21. Sleeve
22. Packing
23. Packing
24. Washer
25. Sensor
WARNING: COVER RESTRAINS SPRING.

(10) Remove bolts (16), cover (17), packing (18), washers (24), spring (19) and piston
(20). Discard packing. Record number of washers.
(11) Remove sleeve (21) using puller (PWC37953), and packings (22, 23). Discard
packings.
B. Installation
CAUTION: IF ANY COMPONENTS ARE REPLACED OR IF THE NUMBER OF WASHERS

ARE DIFFERENT FROM THE NUMBER RECORDED, SEND THE VALVE TO
A QUALIFIED OVERHAUL FACILITY TO BE CALIBRATED ON A TEST
BENCH.
(1) Lubricate and install packings (22, 23) on sleeve (21).
(2) Lubricate and install packing (18) on cover (17).
72-01-50 Page 417

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Install cover and bolts (16). Torque bolts 32 to 36 lb.in. (3.62-4.07 Nm) and secure
(4) Lubricate and install packings (13, 15) on nipples (12, 14), respectively.
(5) Install nipple (12) and torque 110 to 120 lb.in. (12.43-13.56 Nm).
(6) Install nipple (14) and torque 200 to 225 lb.in. (22.60-25.43 Nm).
(7) Lubricate nut (8), backup ring (10), packing (11) and threads of elbow (9).
(8) Refer to 72-00-00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES, and install elbow, nut, backup
ring and packing.
(9) Lubricate packing (7) and install on oil pressure valve assembly (6).
(10) Install valve assembly and bolts (5). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULE AND NUT THREAD, USING A

MINIMAL AMOUNT OF ENGINE OIL (PWC03-001). THIS WILL REDUCE
STRESS ON THE TUBE ASSEMBLY. EXCESSIVE STRESS CAN OCCUR
WHEN THE FERRULES AND TUBE NUT THREADS ARE NOT
LUBRICATED.
CAUTION: HOLD NIPPLES SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING TUBE
NUTS.
(11) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads with engine oil (PWC03-001) and connect
tube (3) nut. Torque 450 to 500 lb.in. (50.85-56.50 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
(12) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads with engine oil (PWC03-001) and connect
tube (2) nut. Torque 270 to 300 lb.in. (30.51-33.90 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
(13) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads with engine oil (PWC03-001) and loosely
connect tube (1) nut. Torque nut (8) 145 to 155 lb.in. (16.39-17.52 Nm).
CAUTION: HOLD ELBOW SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING TUBE NUT.

(14) Torque tube (1) nut 450 to 500 lb.in. (50.85-56.50 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
(15) Install air drain tube (4) (Ref. 72-01-30).
(16) Install pressure relief valve cover and filter element (Ref. Servicing).
(17) Install oil pressure tube (Ref. Para. 12. F.).
72-01-50 Page 418

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CONNECTORS.
(18) Clean and dry connector (Ref. 72-01-10, CLEANING/PAINTING).
NOTE: install harness sleeves (PWC05-273) over connector before it is

reconnected. The use of sleeves is optional.
CAUTION: ENSURE CONNECTOR AND RECEPTACLE ARE FREE FROM MOISTURE.

IF NECESSARY, DRY, USING A HEAT GUN.
(19) Install harness electrical connector P32 (72-01-10, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
10. Filter Bypass and Relief Valve (Ref. Fig. 407)
A. Removal
(1) Remove nut and bolt securing electrical harness to bracket (5) (Ref. 72-01-10).
(2) Remove nut (1) and bolt (2) securing bracket (4) to support.
CAUTION: COVER RESTRAINS SPRING.

(3) Remove nuts (3) and brackets (4, 5).
(4) Remove cover (6) and packing (7) using puller (PWC37651). Discard packing.
(5) Remove spring (8), valve (9) and packing (10). Discard packing.
(6) Remove sleeve (11) and packing (12) using puller (PWC37981). Discard packing.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (12) and install on sleeve (11).
(2) Install sleeve.
(3) Lubricate packing (10) and install on valve (9).
(4) Install valve and spring (8).
(5) Lubricate packing (7) and install on cover (6).
(6) Install cover, brackets (4, 5) and nuts (3). Torque nuts 32 to 36 lb.in. (3.62-4.07 Nm).
(7) Install bolt (2) and nut (1) to secure bracket (4) to support. Torque nuts 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(8) Install bolt and nut securing electrical harness to bracket (5) (Ref. 72-01-10).
72-01-50 Page 419

OIL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Aug 13/2004
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
5
7
6
10
11
12
C63443
Filter Bypass and Relief Valve - Removal/Installation
Figure 407
72-01-50 Page 420

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 407
1. Nut
2. Bolt
3. Nut
4. Bracket
5. Bracket
6. Cover
7. Packing
8. Spring
9. Valve
10. Packing
11. Sleeve
12. Packing
11. Oil Cooler and Heat Exchange Adapters (Ref. Fig. 408)
A. Removal
(1) Remove airframe component(s), as required (Ref. AMM).
(2) Remove nuts (1, 4), washers (5), adapters (2, 6) and packings (3, 7). Discard
packings.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (3) and install on adapter (2).
(2) Orienting 4 degree angle as shown, install adapter and nuts (1); torque nuts 32 to
36 lb.in. (3.62-4.07 Nm).
(3) Lubricate packing (7) and install on adapter (6).
(4) Install adapter, washers (5) and nuts (4); torque nuts 32 to 36 lb.in. (3.62-4.07 Nm).
(5) Install airframe component(s) (Ref. AMM).
12. Oil Pressure Tubes
A. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Oil Pressure Tubes (Ref. Fig. 409)
(1) Removal
WARNING: WEAR PROTECTIVE EYE GOGGLES WHEN REMOVING

LOCKWIRE.
(a) Cut lockwire and loosen coupling nuts of tubes (11, 13, 14, 15).
(b) Remove nuts (1), bolts (2, 3, 4, 12), spacer (5) and clamp assemblies (9, 10).
72-01-50 Page 421

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 RIGHT SIDE
A
1
HOLE A
HOLE
7
LEFT SIDE 4 DEGREES
5 VIEW AT A
6
4
C69156
Oil Cooler and Heat Exchange Adapters - Removal/Installation
Figure 408
72-01-50 Page 422

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 408
1. Nut
2. Adapter
3. Packing
4. Nut
5. Washer
6. Adapter
7. Packing
(c) Remove nuts (16, 31), bolts (17, 33), and clamp assemblies (18, 30 32).
(d) Remove tube assemblies (11, 13, 14, 15), and gasket (6). Discard gasket.
(e) Remove transfer tube (7) and packings (8). Discard packings.
(2) Installation
(a) Lubricate packings (8) and install on transfer tube (7).
(b) Install transfer tube into the installed long transfer tube in the turbine support
case.
NOTE: Do not lubricate large tube nut and gasket.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE NOT TO DAMAGE THE PACKING ON THE SMALL

TRANSFER TUBE WHEN YOU INSTALL THE GASKET.
(c) Install gasket (6) over transfer tube (7) up to the face of the long transfer tube
in the turbine support case.

ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
(d) Lubricate small ferrule and tube nut on the tube assembly (11) using a minimal
amount of oil (PWC03-001).
(e) Install tube assembly (11). Do not torque tube nut.
(f) Install tube assemblies (11, 13, 14 15). Do not torque tube nuts.
(g) Install clamp assemblies (9, 10, 18, 30, 32), spacer (5), bolts (2, 3, 4, 12) and
nuts (1). Do not torque nuts.
72-01-50 Page 423

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A 19
6
8
23
24
15 7
27 26
14
1
29 (REF.)
17 B
16
13 9
18 2
9
30
11
28 25 12
D
FW
3
5
1
33 1 32 31 10 4
20
13 (REF.) (REF.)
22
34
35
21
DETAIL B DETAIL A
C63440C
Oil Pressure Tubes - Removal/Installation
Figure 409
72-01-50 Page 424

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 409
1. Nut
2. Bolt
3. Bolt
4. Bolt
5. Spacer
6. Gasket
7. Transfer Tube
8. Packing
9. Clamp Assembly
10. Clamp Assembly
11. Tube Assembly
12. Bolt
13. Tube Assembly
14. Tube Assembly
15. Tube Assembly
16. Nut
17. Bolt
18. Bolt
19. Tube Assembly
20. Nut
21. Bolt
22. Clamp Assembly
23. Bolt
24. Packing
25. Tube Assembly
26. Tube Assembly
27. Bolt
28. Packing
29. Tee
30. Clamp Assembly
31. Nut
32. Clamp Assembly
33. Bolt
34. Thrust wire
35. Tube Coupling Nut
72-01-50 Page 425

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: HOLD ASSOCIATED PARTS SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN

TORQUING TUBE NUT.
(h) Torque large tube nut on tube assembly (11) 360 to 400 lb.in. (40.68-45.20 Nm).
Secure pin and tube nuts with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
NOTE: 1. Using lockwire to secure the head of the thrust wire pin to the nut is
optional. If required, the head can be removed (cut off) to prevent
interference with adjacent components. The nut retained by the thrust
wire will be more difficult to replace if the head is removed.
NOTE: 2. Individual components must be lockwired separately i.e. thrust wire

to tube nut (optional), tube nut to transfer tube and transfer tube to
bolt
(i) Torque nuts (1) 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: 1. Include clamp assembly for the intercompressor drain valve tube at
bolt (3).
NOTE: 2. Include clamp for the No. 3, 4 and 5 bearing scavenge tube at bolt
(4).
(j) Install bolts (17, 33) and nuts (16, 31). Torque nuts (17) 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
CAUTION: HOLD TEE SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING TUBE

NUTS.
(k) Torque tube nuts on tube assembly (15) and small tube nut on tube assembly
(11) 270 to 300 lb.in. (30.51-33.99 Nm). Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or
(PWC05-295).

(l) Torque tube nut on tube assembly (13, 14) 90 to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.30 Nm).
(m) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
B. No. 3, 4 and 5 Bearing Oil Pressure Tube (Ref. Fig. 409)
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect clamps of electrical wiring harness (Ref. 72-01-10,


LOCKWIRE.
(b) Cut lockwire and loosen coupling nut of tube (19).
(c) Remove nut (20), bolt (21) and clamp assembly (22).
72-01-50 Page 426

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Remove bolts (23), tube assembly (19) and packing (24). Discard packing.
(2) Installation
(a) Lubricate with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install packing (24) on tube
assembly (19).
CAUTION: LUBRICATE TUBE ASSEMBLY FERRULE AND NUT THREADS,

ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
CAUTION: HOLD ELBOW SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING TUBE
NUT.
(b) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut thread using a minimum amount of oil
(PWC03-001) and install tube assembly (19) and bolts (23). Torque tube nut
450 to 500 lb.in. (50.85-56.60 Nm) and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or
(PWC05-295). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamp assembly of No. 3 and 4 bearing pressure sensing

tube.
(d) Install clamps of electrical wiring harness (Ref. 72-01-10, REMOVAL/

INSTALLATION).
(e) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
C. No. 1 and 2 Bearing Oil Pressure Tube Assembly (Ref. Fig. 409)
(1) Removal

LOCKWIRE.
(a) Cut lockwire and loosen coupling nuts of tube (25).
(b) Remove tube assembly (25).
(c) Remove bolts (27), tube assembly (26) and packing (28). Discard packing.
(2) Installation
(a) Lubricate packing (28) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on tube
assembly (26).
72-01-50 Page 427

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
(b) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads using a minimal amount of oil
(PWC03-001) and install tube assembly and bolts (27). Torque bolts 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
CAUTION: HOLD ASSOCIATED NIPPLE IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING TUBE

NUT.
(c) Torque tube nut 450 to 500 lb.in. (50.85-56.50 Nm) and secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).

ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
CAUTION: HOLD ASSOCIATED FITTINGS SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN
TORQUING TUBE NUTS.
(d) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads using a minimal amount of oil
(PWC03-001) and install tube assembly (25). Torque tube big nut to 270 to
300 lb.in. (30.51-33.90 Nm) and small nut to 90 to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.30 Nm),
and secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
D. Fuel Heater to Fuel-cooled Oil Cooler Oil Tube Assembly (Ref. Fig. 410)
(1) Removal
(a) Remove mechanical fuel control (MFC) and pump assembly (Ref. 72-01-40,
(b) Remove bolt (5) and clamp assembly (4).
(c) Disconnect tube (2) at oil cooler.
(d) Remove nuts (3), tube assembly and packing (1). Discard packing.
(2) Installation
(a) Lubricate packing (1) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on tube (2).
72-01-50 Page 428

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
(b) Lubricate ferrule and using a minimal amount of oil (PWC03-001)and install
tube and nuts (3). Torque nuts 32 to 36 lb.in. (3.6-4.0 Nm) and tube nuts at
oil-cooler 650 to 700 lb.in. (73.45-79.10 Nm). Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089)
or (PWC05-295).
(c) Install clamp assemblies (4) and bolt (5). Torque bolt 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamp assembly of pressure sensing tube assembly at bolt

(5).
(d) Install mechanical fuel control (MFC) and pump assembly (Ref. 72-01-40,
E. Fuel-cooled Oil Cooler to RGB Oil Tube Assembly (Ref. Fig. 411)
(1) Removal
(a) Remove nut (6), bolt (5) and clamp assembly (4).
(b) Remove nuts (3), bracket (7), tube assembly (2) and packing (1). Discard
packing.
(2) Installation
(a) Lubricate packing (1) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on tube
assembly (2).

ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
(b) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads using a minimal amount of oil and install
tube assembly, bracket (7) and nuts (3). Torque tube nut fingertight and nuts 36
to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(c) Install clamp (4), bolt (5) and nut (6). Torque nut 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).

TORQUING TUBE NUT.
(d) Torque tube nut at fuel-cooled oil cooler 650 to 700 lb.in. (73.45-79.10 Nm) and
elbow nut 190 to 210 lb.in. (21-24 Nm). Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or
(PWC05-295).
72-01-50 Page 429

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
2
2 4
1
VIEW A VIEW B
C17581A
Fuel Heater to Fuel-cooled Oil Cooler Oil Tube Assembly - Removal/Installation
Figure 410
72-01-50 Page 430

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 410
1. Packing
2. Tube Assembly
3. Nut
4. Clamp Assembly
5. Bolt
F. Rear Inlet Case Oil Pressure Tube (Ref. Fig. 412)
(1) Removal
(a) Remove mechanical fuel control and pump assembly (Ref. 72-01-40,
(b) Remove bolts (2), tube assembly (3) and packings (1). Discard packings.
(2) Installation
(a) Lubricate packings (1) and install on tube assembly (3).
(b) Install tube assembly and bolts (2). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(c) Install mechanical fuel control and pump assembly (Ref. 72-01-40,
G. Low and Main Oil Pressure Sensing Tube Assemblies (Ref. Fig. 413)
(1) Removal
(a) Remove nuts (3, 9), spacer (4), bracket (11) and bolts (5, 6, 10) from tube
assembly (7).

LOCKWIRE.
(b) Cut lockwire and disconnect coupling nuts from tubes (1, 2, 7).
(c) Remove tube assemblies (1, 2, 7).
(d) Remove clamps (8) from the tube.
(e) Remove nuts (14, 18), tees (13, 17), backup rings (15, 19) and packings (16,
20). Discard packings.
(2) Installation
72-01-50 Page 431

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DETAIL A
2
1 6
3 5
C63317
Fuel-cooled Oil Cooler to RGB Oil Tube Assembly - Removal/Installation
Figure 411
72-01-50 Page 432

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 411
1. Packing
2. Tube Assembly
3. Nut
4. Clamp Assembly
5. Bolt
6. Nut
7. Bracket
(a) Install tees (13, 17), nuts (14, 18), backup rings (15, 19) and packings (16,
20) according to standard procedure (Ref. 72-00-00, STANDARD
PRACTICES). Torque nuts fingertight.

ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
(b) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads using a minimal amount of oil and install
tube assembly (7). Torque fingertight.
(c) Install bracket (11), bolt (10) and nut (9) on clamp (12). Torque nut 36 to
40 lbf.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(d) Install clamps (8) on tube assembly (7).
(e) Install bolt (5), nut (3), and secure clamp (8) to bracket (11). Torque nut 36 to
40 lbf.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(f) Install bolt (6), spacer (4) and nut (3), and secure clamp (8) to bracket. Torque
nuts 36 to 40 lbf.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).

ARE NOT LUBRICATED.
(g) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut threads using a minimal amount of oil and install
tube assemblies (1, 2). Torque fingertight.
CAUTION: HOLD ADJACENT FITTING SECURELY WHEN TORQUING TUBE

NUTS.
(h) Torque tube coupling nuts (1, 2, 7), 90 to 100 lbf.in. (10.17-11.30 Nm).
(i) Torque nuts (14, 18) 38 to 42 lbf.in. (4.29-4.75 Nm).
(j) Secure nuts (14, 18) and tube nuts for tube assemblies (1, 2, 7) with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
72-01-50 Page 433

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C14804
Rear Inlet Case Oil Pressure Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 412
72-01-50 Page 434

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 412
1. Packing
2. Bolt
3. Tube Assembly
(k) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
13. Oil Scavenge Tubes
A. No. 3, 4 and 5 Bearing Oil Scavenge Tubes (Ref. Fig. 414)
(1) Removal
(a) Remove airframe component, as required, at bracket (10).
(b) Disconnect oil pressure tube at clamp assembly (9) (Ref. Para. 12. A.) and
wiring harness (Ref. 72-01-10).
(c) Remove bolts (6).
(d) Slide adapters (4) along tube assemblies (7, 8).
(e) Remove tube assemblies.
(f) Remove packings (2, 3, 5), adapters (4), clamp assembly (9) and collars (1)
from tube assemblies. Discard packings.
(2) Installation
(a) Install collars (1) on tube assemblies (7, 8).
NOTE: Collar counterbore must be adjacent to tube flange.
(b) Lubricate packings (2, 3) and install on tube assemblies.
(c) Install adapters (4) on tube assemblies.
NOTE: Do not expose packings (3) when installing adapters (4) on tube
assemblies.
(d) Lubricate packings (5) and install on adapters.
(e) Install tube assemblies, bracket (10) (long end on flange) and bolts (6). Torque
bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(f) Install clamp assembly (9) on tube assembly (8).
(g) Install airframe component, as required, at bracket (10) (Ref. AMM).
(h) Install oil pressure tube at clamp assembly (9) (Ref. Para. 12. A.) and wiring
harness (Ref. 72-01-10).
72-01-50 Page 435

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4
6 8
7
8 3
5
2
11
9
3
10
17
18
19 12
20
16
15
14
13
C69456B
Low and Main Oil Pressure Sensing Tube Assemblies - Removal/Installation
Figure 413
72-01-50 Page 436

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 413
1. Tube Assembly
2. Tube Assembly
3. Nut
4. Spacer
5. Bolt (MS9556-06)
6. Bolt (MS9208-10)
7. Tube Assembly
8. Clamp
9. Nut
10. Bolt (MS9556-06)
11. Bracket
12. Clamp
13. Tee
14. Nut
15. Ring, Backup
16. Packing
17. Tee
18. Nut
19. Ring, Backup
20. Packing
(i) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
B. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Oil Scavenge Tubes (Ref. Fig. 415)
(1) Removal
(a) Remove nuts (9), bolts (8, 10) and clamps assemblies (7).
(b) Remove bolts (6), tube assembly (4), gasket (5) and packing (3). Discard
packing and gasket.
(2) Installation
(b) Install transfer tube (2) into the installed long transfer tube in the turbine
support case.

72-01-50 Page 437

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
7
4 2
6 6
3
9
4
10
6
8 6
C63318
No. 3, 4 and 5 Bearing Oil Scavenge Tubes - Removal/Installation
Figure 414
72-01-50 Page 438

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 414
1. Collar
2. Packing
3. Packing
4. Adapter
5. Packing
6. Bolt
7. Tube Assembly
8. Tube Assembly
9. Clamp Assembly
10. Bracket
(d) Lubricate packing (3) and install on tube assembly (4).
NOTE: Do not lubricate tube nut and gasket with engine oil.
CAUTION: HOLD FITTING SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING TUBE

NUT.
(e) Install tube assembly (4) and bolts (6). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm)
and tube nut 360 to 400 lb.in. (40.68-45.20 Nm). Secure tube nut and pin with

bolt
(f) Install clamps (7), bolts (8, 10) and nuts (9). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Secure fuel tube clamp with bolt (10).
(g) Carry out a leak check (Ref. Adjustment/Test).
C. Reduction Gearbox Oil Scavenge Tube (Ref. Fig. 416)
(1) Removal
(a) DELETED
(b) Remove nut (9), bolt (8) and clamp assembly (7).
(c) Remove bolts (5, 6), tube assembly (3), retaining plate (4) and packings (1, 2).
Discard packings.
72-01-50 Page 439

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2
3
10 7
5
7
7 4 9
8 6
C38472A
No. 6 and 7 Bearing Oil Scavenge Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 415
72-01-50 Page 440

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 415
1. Packing
2. Transfer Tube
3. Packing
4. Tube Assembly
5. Gasket
6. Bolt
7. Clamp Assembly
8. Bolt
9. Nut
10. Bolt
(2) Installation
(a) Lubricate packings (1, 2) and install on tube assembly (3).
(b) Install tube assembly, retaining plate (4), and bolts (5, 6). Torque bolts (5) 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm) and bolt (6) 85 to 95 lb.in. (9.61-10.74 Nm).
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(d) DELETED
14. Bearing Vent Tubes
A. No. 5 Bearing Vent Tube (Ref. Fig. 417)
(1) Removal
(a) Remove nut (1), washer (2), bolt (4), spacer (3), , and clamp assembly (10).

(b) Cut lockwire and remove cap (15).

(c) Cut lockwire and remove blankets (11, 12, 13, 14).
(d) Remove bolts (5, 6), tube assembly (7) and gaskets (8, 9). Discard gaskets.
(2) Installation
(a) Install gaskets (8, 9), tube assembly (7) and bolts (5, 6). Torque bolts (6) 85 to
95 lb.in. (9.61-10.64 Nm) and bolts (5) 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
72-01-50 Page 441

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7
8
6
5
1
C17611B
Reduction Gearbox Oil Scavenge Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 416
72-01-50 Page 442

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 416
1. Packing
2. Packing
3. Tube Assembly
4. Retaining Plate
5. Bolt
6. Bolt
7. Clamp Assembly
8. Bolt
9. Nut
10. DELETED
(b) Install blankets (11, 12, 13, 14). Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or
(PWC05-295).
(c) Install clamp assembly (10), bolt (4), spacer (3), , washer (2) and nut (1).
(d) Install cap (15). Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
B. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Vent Tube (Ref. Fig. 418)
(1) Removal
(a) Remove nuts (9), clamp assemblies (7, 11) and bolts (8, 10, 12).
(b) Remove nuts (6), tube assembly (4), gasket (5) and packing (3). Discard
packing and gasket.
(2) Installation
(b) Install transfer tube (2) into the installed long transfer tube in the turbine
support case.

(d) Lubricate packing (3) and install on tube assembly (4).
NOTE: Do not lubricate tube nut.
72-01-50 Page 443

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2
3 8
9 10
4
13 15
14
7
11
7 6
12
USE 3 TO 5 FULL
TURNS OF LOCKWIRE
FOR EACH PAIR
OF EYELETS
0.200 IN. MAX.
C68202
No. 5 Bearing Vent Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 417
72-01-50 Page 444

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 417
1. Nut
2. Washer
3. Spacer
4. Bolt
5. Bolt
6. Bolt
7. Tube Assembly
8. Gasket
9. Gasket
10. Clamp Assembly
11. Blanket
12. Blanket
13. Blanket
14. Blanket
15. Cap
CAUTION: HOLD FITTING SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING

TUBE NUT.
(e) Install tube assembly and nuts (6). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
Torque tube nut 360 to 400 lb.in. (40.68-45.20 Nm). Secure pin and tube nut

bolt
(f) Install clamp assemblies (7, 11), bolts (8, 10, 12) and nuts (9). Torque nuts 36
to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamp/bracket of T6 trim cable at bolts (8, 10).
15. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Pressure, Vent and Scavenge Transfer Tubes (Ref. Fig. 419)
A. Removal
(1) Remove No. 6 and 7 bearing pressure, scavenge and vent tubes (Ref. Paras. 12.
A., 13. B. and 14. B.).
(2) Remove No. 6 and 7 bearing pressure (1), vent (2) and scavenge (3) transfer
tubes.
72-01-50 Page 445

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12
11
9
10
9
1 8
7
2 1 5 13
C38365A
No. 6 and 7 Bearing Vent Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 418
72-01-50 Page 446

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 418
1. Packing
2. Transfer Tube
3. Packing
4. Tube Assembly
5. Gasket
6. Nut
7. Clamp Assembly
8. Bolt
9. Nut
10. Bolt
11. Clamp Assembly
12. Bolt
13. T6 Harness/Bracket Assembly
(3) Remove strainer (8).
CAUTION: GASKETS (7) MUST BE REMOVED AND DISCARDED.

(4) Remove retaining rings (4), plates (5), seal rings (6) and gaskets (7, 9) from
transfer tubes. Discard seal rings and gaskets.
B. Installation
(1) Install gaskets (9) on pressure oil transfer tube (1) and scavenge oil transfer tube
(3).
NOTE: Rotate gaskets during installation. When completely installed, straighten

gaskets.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT OIL LEAKS, NEW GASKETS MUST BE USED.

(2) Install gaskets (7) on transfer tubes (1, 2, 3), using crimper (PWC37093).
(3) Install seal rings (6), plates (5), and retaining rings (4) on transfer tubes.
(4) Install strainer (8) in transfer tube (1), using a small amount of grease (PWC04-001)
to retain strainer in position.
72-01-50 Page 447

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ROLL GASKET (7) INTO GROOVE AND

AROUND EDGE IF EXTENDING BEYOND
TUBE. GASKET MUST BE IN FIRM
CONTACT WITH CONICAL SURFACE
OF TUBE.
7
2
VIEW A 4
9
4
1
6
5
7
7
4
6
5
1 2 3 A
3 9
C30163A
No. 6 and 7 Bearing Pressure, Vent and Scavenge Transfer Tubes - Removal/Installation
Figure 419
72-01-50 Page 448

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 419
1. Transfer Tube
2. Transfer Tube
3. Transfer Tube
4. Retaining Ring
5. Plate
6. Seal Ring
7. Gasket
8. Strainer
9. Gasket
CAUTION: DO NOT LUBRICATE TRANSFER TUBE THREADS.

(5) Install transfer tubes (1, 2, 3). Torque transfer tubes 100 lb.in. (11.30 Nm). Remove
transfer tubes and examine gaskets to ensure each has 100% surface contact with
its seat. If contact is satisfactory, reinstall transfer tubes and torque 400 to
450 lb.in. (45.19-50.84 Nm). If contact is unsatisfactory, replace transfer tube gasket
and repeat assembly procedure.
NOTE: During initial assembly, transfer tubes are marked BR (vent), PR

(pressure) and SC (scavenge) to identify the locations at which they
are installed. If required, mark replacement tubes. Install at locations
marked.
(6) Install No. 6 and 7 bearing pressure, scavenge and vent tubes (Ref. Paras. 12. A.,
13. B. and 14. B.).
16. Oil Filler Cap, Neck and Tube Valve (Ref. Fig. 420)
A. Removal
(2) Remove bolts (3), washer (4), cable (5), filler cap (1) and packing (2). Discard
packing.
(3) Remove tube valve (6) and packing (7). Discard packing.
(4) Remove bolts (10), washers (11), filler neck (12) and packing (13). Discard packing.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (13) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on filler neck (12).
(2) Install oil filler neck (12), washers (11) and bolts (10). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in.
(4.0-4.6 Nm).
(3) Lubricate packing (7) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on tube valve (6).
72-01-50 Page 449

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 1
3
4 5
3
6
7
9
10
8
11
12
10
11
13
C69030A
Oil Filler Cap, Neck and Tube Valve - Removal/Installation
Figure 420
72-01-50 Page 450

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 420
1. Filler Cap
2. Packing
3. Bolt
4. Washer
5. Cable
6. Tube Valve
7. Packing
8. Nipple
9. Packing
10. Bolt
11. Washer
12. Filler Neck
13. Packing
CAUTION: DO NOT USE BOLTS TO SEAT OIL FILLER TUBE VALVE. INSTALL VALVE
BY HAND TO ENSURE FULL FLANGE CONTACT. IF RESISTANCE IS
FELT, REMOVE AND INSPECT VALVE.
(4) Install tube valve.
(5) Lubricate packing (2) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on filler cap (1).
(6) Install filler cap (1), washer (4), free end of cable (5) and bolts (3). Torque bolts 36
to 40 lb.in. (4.0-4.6 Nm).
(7) Lubricate packing (9) and install on nipple (8). Install nipple and torque 65 to
75 lb.in. (7.5-8.5 Nm). Secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
17. Oil Level Indicator (Ref. Fig. 421)
A. Removal
(1) Drain oil (Ref. 72-00-00, SERVICING).
(2) Remove heat exchanger (Ref. AMM).
(3) Remove nut (2), bolts (1, 3, 4) and bracket (5).
(4) Remove bolts (8), and bracket (9).
(5) Remove plug (11), packing (12), bolts (13), washers (14), indicator (15), and gasket
(16). Discard packing.
(6) Remove bolts (6), washers (10), bracket (7), adapter (17), and packing (18).
Discard packing.
72-01-50 Page 451

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 5
3
17 7
16
15
18 6
13
14
10
12 6
9
11
8
C69032A
Oil Level Indicator - Removal/Installation
Figure 421
72-01-50 Page 452

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 421
1. Bolt (MS9556-06)
2. Nut
3. Bolt (MS9556-05)
4. Bolt (MS9489-06)
5. Bracket
6. Bolt (MS9556-09)
7. Bracket
8. Bolt (MS9556-08)
9. Bracket
10. Washer
11. Plug
12. Packing
13. Bolt (MS9556-12)
14. Washer
15. Indicator, Oil Level
16. Gasket
17. Adapter
18. Packing
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (18) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on adapter (17).
(2) Install adapter (17), bracket (7), washers (10) and bolts (6). Torque bolts 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(3) Install gasket (16), indicator (15), washers (14), and bolts (13). Torque bolts 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(4) Lubricate packing (12) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on plug (11). Torque
plug 38 to 42 lb.in. (4.29-4.75 Nm).
(5) Install bracket (9), and bolts (8). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lbf.in. (4.1-4.5 Nm).
(6) Install bracket (5), bolts (1, 3, 4), and nut (2). Torque bolts and nut 36 to 40 lbf.in.
(4.1-4.5 Nm).
(7) Install heat exchanger (Ref. AMM)
(8) Fill oil system (Ref. 72-00-00, SERVICING).
72-01-50 Page 453

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
18. Oil Pump Pressure Relief Valve Assembly (Ref. Fig. 422)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect airframe components, as required (Ref. AMM).
(2) Remove nut (10) and bolt (9) securing clamp to bracket.
(3) Remove nuts (1) and washers (2).
(4) Remove relief valve assembly (3) and packing (4). Discard packing.
NOTE: Return valve assembly to an overhaul facility if replacement of the valves

internal components is required.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packings (8) and install on transfer tube (7). Install transfer tube in valve
assembly (3).
(2) Lubricate packings (6) and install on transfer tube (5). Install transfer tube in the
inlet case.
(3) Lubricate packing (4) and install on valve assembly (3).
(4) Install valve assembly (3), washers (2) and nuts (1). Torque nuts 75 to 85 lb.in.
(8.48-9.61 Nm).
(5) Install clamp assembly (11), bolt (9) and nut (10) to bracket. Torque nut 36 to
40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(6) Install airframe components (Ref. AMM).
19. Reduction Gearbox Scavenge Oil Pump
(1) Disconnect and unclamp igniter cables as to not interfere with removal of pump
(Ref. 72-01-20).
(2) Slide air inlet to scavenge pump oil transfer tube away from scavenge pump (Ref.
Approved Repairs).
(3) Remove No. 6 and 7 bearing oil scavenge tube (Ref. Para. 13. B.).
(4) Remove fuel line to flow divider and dump valve (Ref. 72-01-40).
72-01-50 Page 454

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Remove bolts (1), washers (2), scavenge pump assembly (3) and packings (4, 5).
Discard packings.
(7) Remove air inlet-to-scavenge pump oil transfer tube (Ref. Approved Repairs).
(1) Remove pump housing (1) from cover (9) and packing (2). Discard packing.
(2) Remove tube assembly (3) and packings (4). Discard packings. Remove strainer
(10) from tube assembly.
(3) Remove gears (5), woodruff keys (6), idler shaft (7) and driveshaft (8).
C. Assembly (Ref. Fig. 424)
(1) Install idler shaft (7) and driveshaft (8) in cover (9).
(2) Install woodruff keys (6) in idler and driveshafts.
(3) Install gears (5) on idler and driveshafts.
(4) Freeze strainer (10) to -40°C (-40°F) for 5 minutes minimum. Install strainer in tube
assembly (3).
(5) Lubricate packings (4) and install on strainer and tube assembly. Install strainer and
tube assembly.
(6) Lubricate packing (2) and install on pump housing (1).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE HOUSING TO FORCE GEARS INTO POSITION.

(7) Install pump housing on cover (9) .
(8) Ensure gears can be rotated using hand pressure.
(1) Lubricate packings and install on air inlet-to-scavenge pump oil transfer tube. Install
transfer tube in air inlet case (Ref. Approved Repairs).
(2) Lubricate packings (7) and install on transfer tube (6). Install transfer tube.
(3) Lubricate packings (4, 5) and install on pump assembly (3).
(4) Align holes with pins on rear inlet case, splines on driveshafts and install pump
assembly, washers (2) and bolts (1). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(5) Slide air inlet-to-scavenge pump oil transfer tube into position and secure with
retaining rings (Ref. Approved Repairs).
72-01-50 Page 455

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11
8
7
8
10
1
2
3
4
6
5
6
C17610
Oil Pump Pressure Relief Valve Assembly - Removal/Installation
Figure 422
72-01-50 Page 456

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 422
1. Nut
2. Washer
3. Relief Valve Assembly
4. Packing
5. Transfer Tube
6. Packing
7. Transfer Tube
8. Packing
9. Bolt
10. Nut
11. Clamp Assembly
(6) Install fuel line to flow divider and dump valve (Ref. 72-01-40).
(7) Install No. 6 and 7 bearing oil scavenge tube (Ref. Para. 13. B.).
(8) Connect igniter cables (Ref. 72-01-20).
20. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Scavenge Oil Pump/Pressure Oil Pump
(1) Remove oil pump pressure relief valve assembly (Ref. Para. 18.).
(2) Remove reduction gearbox scavenge oil pump assembly (Ref. Para. 19.).
(3) Remove bolts (1) and washers (2).
(4) Remove pump assemblies (4) using adapter (PWC37614) (3) and puller (PWC37651)
(7).
(5) Remove and discard packings (5, 6).
(1) Remove pressure pump housing (3), gears (4) and woodruff keys (5).
(2) Remove cover (6) and scavenge pump housing (7).
(3) Remove gears (8) and woodruff key (9).
(4) Remove idler shaft (11) and drive shaft (10).
C. Assembly (Ref. Fig. 426)
(1) Install woodruff key (9) in driveshaft (10).
72-01-50 Page 457

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 7
3
7
C12199
Reduction Gearbox Scavenge Oil Pump - Removal/Installation
Figure 423
72-01-50 Page 458

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 423
1. Bolt
2. Washer
3. Scavenge Pump Assembly
4. Packing
5. Packing
6. Transfer Tube
7. Packing
(2) Install gears (8) on driveshaft and idler shaft (11).
(3) Install idler shaft and driveshaft in scavenge pump housing (7).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE COVER TO FORCE GEARS INTO POSITION.

(4) Align pins and install cover (6), woodruff keys (5) and gears (4).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE HOUSING TO FORCE GEARS INTO POSITION.

(5) Align holes with pins in cover and install pressure pump housing (3), washers (2)
and bolts (1) . Torque bolts in a diagonal sequence 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(6) Ensure gears can be rotated using hand pressure.
(1) Lubricate packings (5, 6) and install on pump assemblies (4) and driveshaft.
(2) Align holes with pins on rear inlet case and install pump assemblies in engine.
NOTE: 1. Bolts (1) and washers (2) are installed at assembly (Ref. Subpara.
C.).
NOTE: 2. To align splines, rotate driveshaft during assembly.
(3) Install reduction gearbox scavenge oil pump assembly (Ref. Para. 19.).
(4) Install oil pump pressure relief valve assembly (Ref. Para. 18.).
21. Fuel-cooled Oil Cooler and Bracket Assembly (Ref. Fig. 427)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect oil pressure tubes.
(2) Disconnect fuel tubes.
(3) Remove elbows (3, 7, 15), adapter (11) and nuts (4, 8, 12, 16). Discard backup
rings (5, 9, 13, 17) and packings (6, 10, 14, 18).
72-01-50 Page 459

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C12198A
Reduction Gearbox Scavenge Oil Pump - Assembly/Disassembly
Figure 424
72-01-50 Page 460

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 424
1. Pump Housing
2. Packing
3. Tube Assembly
4. Packing
5. Gears
6. Woodruff Keys
7. Idler Shaft
8. Driveshaft
9. Cover
10. Strainer
(4) Remove bolts (1) and oil cooler assembly (2).
(5) Remove bolts (19, 23), washers (21, 22, 24) and mounting bracket assembly (25).
(6) Remove nuts (26), bolts (27, 28), washers (29) and bracket (30).
B. Installation
(1) Install mounting bracket as follows:
(a) Install mounting bracket (30), bolts (27, 28), washers (29) and nuts (26).
Torque nuts 85 to 95 lb.in. (9.61-10.74 Nm).
(b) Install mounting bracket (25), bolts (19, 23), free end of ground terminal (20)
and washers (21,22, 24). Torque bolt (19) 14 to 16 lb.in. (1.58-1.81 Nm) and
bolts (23) 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Lubricate bolt (19) with coating (PWC06-032).
(2) Install oil cooler assembly and bolts (1). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(3) Install nuts (4, 8, 12, 16), backup rings (5, 9, 13, 17), packings (6, 10, 14, 18),
elbows (3, 7, 15) and adapter (11) according to Chapter 72-00-00,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. Torque nuts fingertight.
(4) Install fuel tubes (Ref. 72-01-40, REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) and oil tubes (Ref.
Para. 12. D. and E.).
CAUTION: HOLD ADJACENT FITTING SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING

NUTS.
(5) Torque nuts as follows:
(a) Nuts (4, 8): 70 to 80 lb.in. (7.91-9.04 Nm).
72-01-50 Page 461

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C12197A
No. 6 and 7 Bearing Scavenge Oil Pump/Pressure Oil Pump - Removal/Installation
Figure 425
72-01-50 Page 462

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 425
1. Bolt
2. Washer
3. Adapter
4. Pump Assemblies
5. Packing
6. Packing
7. Puller
(b) Nuts (12, 16): 190 to 210 lb.in. (21.47-23.73 Nm).
NOTE: Metal-to-metal contact between nut and boss must be obtained

without exceeding recommended torque. There must be no extrusion
of packing or backup ring.
(6) Secure nuts (4, 8, 12, 16) with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
22. Accessory Gearbox Breather Tube Assembly (Ref. Fig. 428)
A. Removal
(1) Remove airframe component(s), as required (Ref. AMM).
(2) Remove bolts (11, 18), nuts (12) and clamp assemblies (10) .
(3) Remove nuts (3, 17), bracket (16), tube (2) and packing (1). Discard packing.
(4) Remove retaining rings (15) and washers (14). Slide cover (13).
(5) Remove bolts (8), nuts (9), gasket (7), tube (6), flexible coupling (5) and packings
(4). Discard packings.
B. Installation
(1) Install tube (6), gasket (7), bolts (8) and nuts (9). Torque fingertight.
(2) Slide cover (13) on tube (6).
(3) Lubricate packings (4) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on flexible coupling
(5).
(4) Lubricate packing (1) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on tube (2).
(5) Install flexible coupling, tube, bracket (16) and nuts (3, 17). Torque nut (17) 150 to
170 lb.in. (16.95-19.21 Nm) and nuts (3) 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(6) Torque bolts (8) 85 to 95 lb.in. (9.61-10.74 Nm).
72-01-50 Page 463

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11 10
9
8
7
2
C12200A
No. 6 and 7 Bearing Scavenge Oil Pump/Pressure Oil Pump - Assembly/Disassembly
Figure 426
72-01-50 Page 464

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 426
1. Bolt
2. Washer
3. Pressure Pump Housing
4. Gear
5. Woodruff Key
6. Cover
7. Scavenge Pump Housing
8. Gear
9. Woodruff Key
10. Driveshaft
11. Idler Shaft
(7) Position cover, install washers (14) and retaining ring (15).
CAUTION: ENSURE TUBE ASSEMBLIES (2) AND (6) ARE ALIGNED WITH
COUPLING (5) BEFORE SECURING CLAMPS (10).
(8) Install clamp assemblies (10) on tube (2), bolts (11, 18) and nuts (12). Torque bolts
36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamp assembly of electrical wiring harness at bolt (18).
23. Intercompressor Case Oil Drain (Ref. Fig. 429)
A. Removal
(1) Remove insulating cap assembly (14).
(2) Remove nuts (5), bolts (3, 4), clamp (8), grommet (9), clamp assembly (7) and
spacer (6).
(3) Remove bolts (10), tube assembly (12) and gasket (11). Discard gasket.
(4) Remove nipple (1) and gasket (2). Discard gasket.
B. Installation
(1) Install gasket (2) and nipple (1). Torque nipple 450 to 550 lb.in. (50.85-62.15 Nm).

LUBRICATED.
(2) Lubricate ferrule and tube nut of tube assembly (12), using a minimal amount of oil
(PWC03-001).
(3) Install gasket (11), tube assembly (12), bolts (10) . Do not torque bolts or tube nut.
72-01-50 Page 465

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
90°± 1° IN.
RELATION TO
11 ENGINE AXIS
30°
0° ± 1° IN.
RELATION TO
ENGINE AXIS 30°± 1° IN.
2 B
RELATION TO
3 ENGINE AXIS
7 1
VIEW A
14 15
13 16
12 17
23 18
25
23
10 24
9 26
7 6
11 5
A 8 24
4
3
29
30
15
27
21
20
28
22° 30’
19
VIEW B 22
C38605
Fuel-cooled Oil Cooler and Mounting Bracket - Removal/Installation
Figure 427
72-01-50 Page 466

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 427
1. Bolt
2. Oil Cooler Assembly
3. Elbow
4. Nut
5. Backup Ring
6. Packing
7. Elbow
8. Nut
9. Backup Ring
10. Packing
11. Adapter
12. Nut
13. Backup Ring
14. Packing
15. Elbow
16. Nut
17. Backup Ring
18. Packing
19. Bolt
20. Terminal Lead
21. Washer
22. Washer
23. Bolt
24. Washer
25. Bracket Assembly
26. Nut
27. Bolt
28. Bolt
29. Washer
30. Bracket
(4) Install grommet (9), clamp (8), clamp assembly (7), bolts (3, 4), spacer (6) and
nuts (5). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
NOTE: Include clamps on oil pressure tube assembly (13).
CAUTION: HOLD NIPPLE SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN TORQUING TUBE NUT.

(5) Torque bolts (10) 27 to 30 lb.in. (3.05-3.39 Nm) and tube assembly (12) nut 90
to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.29 Nm). Secure tube nut with lockwire (PWC05-089) or
(PWC05-295).
72-01-50 Page 467

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
6
13
7
12
15 14
9 18
5
10 16
11
10
12
17
3
2
1
C63331
Accessory Gearbox Breather Tube Assembly - Removal/Installation
Figure 428
72-01-50 Page 468

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 428
1. Packing
2. Tube
3. Nut
4. Packing
5. Coupling
6. Tube
7. Gasket
8. Bolt
9. Nut
10. Clamp Assembly
11. Bolt
12. Nut
13. Cover
14. Washer
15. Retaining Ring
16. Bracket
17. Nut
18. Bolt
(6) Install insulating cap (14). Secure using 3 to 5 turns of lockwire (PWC05-089) or
(PWC05-295) and crimping metal tag on insulating blanket.
72-01-50 Page 469

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13
DETAIL A
C63332
Intercompressor Case Oil Drain - Removal/Installation
72-01-50 Page 470

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 429
1. Nipple
2. Gasket
3. Bolt
4. Bolt
5. Nut
6. Spacer
7. Clamp Assembly
8. Clamp
9. Grommet
10. Bolt
11. Gasket
12. Tube Assembly
13. Pressure Oil Tube Assembly
14. Cap
72-01-50 Page 471

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
11
13
14
13
5
8
4 9
C37270A
Intercompressor Case Oil Drain - Removal/Installation
72-01-50 Page 472

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
A. These instructions provide information necessary for the adjustment/test of engine oil
system components.
Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
5. Adjustment/Test
A. Oil System Components and Lines - Leak Check
(1) Start engine, run for two minutes 55 psid or higher oil pressure. Shut down engine
(Ref. AMM).
B. Chip Detectors - Leak Check
(1) Start engine, run for five minutes at G.I. Shut down engine (Ref. AMM).
72-01-50 Page 501/502

OIL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST Oct 20/2000
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
A. These instructions provide information necessary for the inspection/check of components

of the engine oil system.
Item No. Name
PWC05-062 Stone, Sharpening (Oilstone)
PWC05-190 Filter Patch (60 Microns)
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Leakproof cylindrical container (Min. 8.0 in. (203.2 mm) long x 3.5 in. (88.9 mm) Dia.) -
Cole-Parmer P/N H-62503-00 or local purchase
Filter element bubble-point tester, 700-287, or equivalent
Filter patch holder (Hydrosol stainless, 47 mm - Millipore P/N xx2004720) and
accessories
Lamp
Magnifying glass (10X)
Manometer
Patch Receptacle (flat, circular) with cover (48 mm Min. inside Dia.) - Millipore P/Ns
PD1004700 and PD1004750
Rod or wire No. 58 (0.042 in. (1.07 mm))
Spring compression tester
72-01-50 Page 601

OIL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK Jan 24/2006
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Name
Steel bar, 3-oz. (85.05 g)
Tapered plugs
5. Inspection
A. General
(1) In addition to the details specifically mentioned, inspect for obvious damage:
cracks, scores, defective threads, contamination of chip detectors, strainers or filters,
and loose or damaged locating pins, dowels, inserts and studs.
(a) Replace distorted retaining rings.
(b) Replace dented tubes if:
v Dent depth exceeds 10% of tube outside diameter.

v Dent diameter is greater than 15% of tube outside diameter.
v Dent is within 0.250 in. (6.35 mm) of ferrule scarf-welds or bond.
(c) Replace defective items for which no repair is specified.
B. Oil Filters, Strainers and Screen Assembly
(1) Oil Strainers and Screen Assembly
(a) Inspect for clogged passages, dents and broken wires, using 10X magnifying
glass.
NOTE: If more than 5 percent of passages remain clogged after repeated

cleaning, the strainer must be returned to an approved overhaul
facility.
(2) Oil Pressure and RGB Scavenge Filters.
(a) Insert a small lamp into inside bore of filter element.
(b) Visually inspect, using magnifying glass, filter element for breaks, puncture or
evidence of crushing or collapse. There must be no loose particles, broken
bonds or joints.
(c) Perform a patch-making procedure (Ref. Para. H.).
(3) RGB Scavenge and Cleanable Pressure Filters.
NOTE: The bubble-point test is not a cleaning procedure. The test is carried out
to ensure the filter body is undamaged and the element not punctured.
(a) Carry out a bubble-point test as follows (Ref. Fig. 601):
72-01-50 Page 602

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR PRESSURE NEEDLE BLEED

PRESSURE GAGE VALVE VALVE
INLET
AIR
REGULATOR AIR
FILTER
MANOMETER
BLACK LIGHT SOURCE
(SAME AS USED FOR
FLUORESCENT PENETRANT
INSPECTION)
ELEMENT SOLVENT
ADAPTER
TRANSPARENT FILTER PLUG
P1 P2
TANK ELEMENT
VACUUM
SCALE
h = MANOMETER READING
h
P1= PRESSURIZED AIR
P2= ATMOSPHERIC AIR
P1 h
MANOMETER
FLUID
ALTERNATE TYPES
OF MANOMETERS
C32394
RGB Scavenge and Cleanable Main Oil Filter Elements - Bubble Point Test
Figure 601
72-01-50 Page 603

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA

USE AND CONTROL MEASURES
1 Fill tank with trichloroethane (PWC11-002) or solvent (PWC11-027) or
Tergit (PWC11-031) or Magkleen 4 (PWC11-032). Maintain fluid at room
temperature.
NOTE: Tergit (PWC11-031) and Magkleen 4 (PWC11-032) are

recommended to be used as an alternative to petroleum
solvent (PWC11-027) and trichloroethane (PWC11-002) respectively,
when the use of these products is restricted by local
2 Install element adapter on pressurization hose.
NOTE: Adapters may be manufactured by drilling a hole through a

tapered rubber plug of appropriate size. Drill the hole slightly
smaller than the fitting on the end of the pressurization hose.
3 Install adapter into element core.
4 Install element in fluid tank using a suitable plug to seal open end of core.
Maintain approximately 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) between fluid surface and top of
filter during bubble test.
5 Ensure manometer scale reads zero; if necessary, open bleed valve to

allow residual air pressure to vent.
6 Close bleed and needle valves.
7 Turn on air supply.
8 Open air regulator until pressure gage reads 5 to 6 psig (34.47-41.37 kPa).
9 Open needle valve and gradually increase air pressure until manometer
water reading is equivalent to the following values; 6.0 in. (15.2 cm) for
the pressure filter and 8.0 in. (20.3 cm) for the scavenge filter. No bubbles
must escape from the filter mesh before the applicable value is
exceeded.
NOTE: Check bore seals if bubbles escape from locations other than filter
mesh before the applicable value given above is exceeded.
72-01-50 Page 604

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10 Rotate element slowly and watch for air bubbles. If no bubble stream
appears, increase pressure by opening needle valve. When a stream
of bubbles appears, reduce pressure until bubbles stop, then slowly increase
pressure until bubble stream begins again. The manometer reading is the
difference between lower and upper level of fluid or twice the distance from
the fill line to fluid line after pressurization. The reading when the stream
begins must be 6.0 in. (15.2 cm) for pressure filter and 8.0 in. (20.3 cm) for
scavenge filter of water minimum. Replace filter element if the requirement
is not met.
C. Transfer Tube
(1) Inspect assembly for obstructions.
D. Oil Pump Housings and Cover Plates
(1) Inspect for general damage and wear. Touch up damaged surface coatings (Ref.
Cleaning/Painting).
E. Oil Filler and Check Valve (Post-SB21150) (Ref. Fig. 602)
(1) Visually inspect condition of the flapper valve O-ring using a 90° borescope.
(a) Replace the oil filler and check valve, if the O-ring is found damaged.
NOTE: Do not use a screwdriver or other hard metal objects to push the flapper
valve inwards for the O-ring inspection.
(2) Flapper valve sealing integrity check. Engine running:
(a) To verify the integrity of the flapper valve seal; an engine run may be
performed with the engine oil filler cap removed.
(b) Remove the filler cap and clean the inside of the oil filler neck with a clean rag.
(c) Start the engine (Ref to AMM).
(d) Run engine at ground idle speed for 2-3 minutes.
(e) Shut down engine (Ref AMM).
(f) Verify the inside of the oil filler neck for evidence of oil.
(g) Replace the oil filler valve assembly if an oil leak is found.
NOTE: Make sure the oil filler cap is re-installed following flapper valve seal
check engine run.
F. Spur Gears
(1) Inspect for general damage and wear. Stone raised metal, using sharpening stone
(PWC05-062).
72-01-50 Page 605

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLAPPER VALVE O−RING
C106018
Oil Filler and Check Valve Inspection
Figure 602
72-01-50 Page 606

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Idler and Driveshafts
(1) Inspect for general damage and wear. Stone raised metal, using sharpening stone
(PWC05-062).
H. Patch-making Procedure and Chip Detector Debris Transfer
(1) Patch-making Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT USE PATCH-MAKING PROCEDURE AS A CLEANING

PROCEDURE FOR FILTER ELEMENTS.
(a) Remove filter element (oil pressure or RGB scavenge) from engine (Ref.
Servicing).
(b) Using suitable tapered plugs, seal inner cavity of filter element.
(c) Place filter in cylindrical container.
WARNING: REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS

HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS, PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL
CONTROL MEASURES.
(d) Fill container with teksol (PWC11-048) or petroleum solvent (PWC11-027),
enough to cover filter element but leaving a space for liquid movement
when shaking. Secure cover.
(e) Shake container for about three minutes manually or 30 seconds in a vibrator.
Remove cover.
NOTE: Ensure there are no deposits left on filter. If there is, secure container
cover and continue shaking.
(f) Install new filter patch (PWC05-190) in filter patch holder and place over a
suitable container (2 liters min.).
(g) Remove filter element from container.
(h) Pour liquid contents of container into filter patch holder.
(i) Flush out all possible loose particles which may still be in container by pouring
some teksol (PWC11-048) or petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) into it, shaking,
then emptying into filter patch holder.
(j) Remove filter patch from filter patch holder and place in patch receptacle.
Identify sample with type of filter, engine serial number and hours run.
72-01-50 Page 607

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(k) If any debris is found (particles large enough to be trapped by filter patch),
send sample to laboratory for material spectrographic analysis.
NOTE: Some operators retain the filter patches to establish a visual coloration
trend. Operators doing this, need to build up their own experience for
patch coloration trend evaluation because trends may vary from
one engine to another and may be affected by the operating
environment and maintenance practices.
(l) Remove plugs from filter element (ensure the preformed packing does not drop
inside the element).
WARNING: WHEN USING COMPRESSED AIR FOR DRYING, REGULATE TO

29 psig (200 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES OR FACE SHIELD
TO PROTECT EYES.
(m) Dry filter element using clean compressed air at 29 psig (200 kPa).
(n) Install filter element (oil pressure or RGB scavenge) on engine (Ref. Servicing).
(2) Chip Detector Debris Transfer
(a) Remove chip detector (Main or RGB) (Ref. Removal/Installation).
(b) Dip magnet end in solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-031) to remove

oil.
(c) Transfer debris at magnet end to clear adhesive tape.
(d) Identify tape with engine serial number, hours run since new or overhaul, and
location of chip detector from which debris came.
(e) Install chip detector (Main or RGB) (Ref. Removal/Installation).
72-01-50 Page 608

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. Chip Detector Circuit Completion, Debris on Oil Filters and/or Filter Impending Bypass
Warnings
CAUTION: IN ALL INSTANCES OF ENGINE-GENERATED METAL CONTAMINATION,

WHEN THE MAIN OIL FILTER IS BYPASSED, RESIDUAL MATTER MAY
REMAIN IN PROPELLER AND AIRFRAME OIL SYSTEMS. RESIDUAL MATTER
WILL CONTRIBUTE TO RECONTAMINATION OF A NEWLY INSTALLED
ENGINE. WHEN AN ENGINE IS REMOVED DUE TO METAL CONTAMINATION
ASSOCIATED WITH MAIN OIL FILTER BYPASS OF THE OIL SYSTEM, ALL
AIRFRAME COMPONENTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM,
INCLUDING PROPELLER, PROPELLER GOVERNORS, TUBES AND
HOSES, SHOULD BE FLUSHED ACCORDING TO AIRFRAME
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. AIRFRAME OIL COOLERS SHOULD BE
REPLACED. ORIGINAL ENGINE EQUIPMENT SUCH AS FUEL HEATERS
AND GOVERNORS SHOULD BE RETURNED WITH ENGINE.
CAUTION: WHEN THE MAIN OIL FILTER IMPENDING BY-PASS INDICATOR IS
ACTIVATED AND THE INSPECTION OF THE MAIN OIL FILTER REVEALED
THAT THERE WAS NO FILTER BY-PASS (REF. NOTE), THEN ONLY THE
AIRFRAME OIL COOLER MUST BE REPLACED AND THE TUBES AND
HOSES SHOULD BE FLUSHED.
CAUTION: WHEN THE RGB SCAVENGE OIL FILTER IMPENDING BY-PASS INDICATOR
IS ACTIVATED AND THE INSPECTION OF THE RGB SCAVENGE OIL FILTER
REVEALED THAT THERE WAS NO FILTER BY-PASS (REF. NOTE), THE
AIRFRAME OIL COOLER MAY REMAIN IN SERVICE.
IF THE INSPECTION REVEALS THAT THE SCAVENGE FILTER WAS
BY-PASSED, THE AIRFRAME OIL COOLER MUST BE REPLACED AND THE
TUBES AND HOSES SHOULD BE FLUSHED. ALSO, INSPECT THE OIL
PRESSURE FILTER.
NOTE: An impending by-pass indication does not necessarily mean that the oil filter
was by-passed. An assessment of the amount of contamination can indicate
whether a by-pass has actually occurred. If debris is found on most of the surface
of the filter element, associated housing and the chip detector strainer, it can
considered that a by-pass has occurred.
(1) General
72-01-50 Page 609

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Turbomachinery chip detector circuit completion associated with main oil filter
bypass (Ref. Note 1) requires engine removal (Ref. Note 2).
NOTE: 1. An assessment of the amount of contamination can indicate whether

a bypass has actually occurred. If the oil filters are cleaned or
replaced at regular intervals as recommended by P&WC and debris
is deposited on most of surface of filter element, associated
housing, chip detector and strainer, it can be considered that a
bypass has occurred. This is not true in cases where the by-pass
indicator is used to determine when the filters should be cleaned or
replaced.
NOTE: 2. After an engine/module change due to bearing/gear distress, it is

recommended that the replacement engine have an oil-filter patch
check carried out after 50 hours. This is to ensure bearing/gear
material from the original failure has not contaminated the
replacement engine due to incomplete flushing of the airframes/propeller
oil system(s). If magnetic material is found, repeat patch check
after 50 hours. If the amount of material is reduced, repeat patch
check at 50-hour intervals until no magnetic material is found. The
time between patch checks should revert to the standard interval
after the second consecutive clean patch check. If the amount of
magnetic material increases or if magnetic material is found
after the second clean patch check, the maintenance action required
for debris in oil system must be carried out.
NOTE: 3. All debris particles should be sent to a laboratory for analysis.

Take note that contaminant material such as carbon particules are
not considered debris.
NOTE: 4. Unless otherwise specified, review of the laboratory results should

be done within 50 FH of debris discovery for the correct disposition
of the engine/module.
(b) Allowable/Non-allowable Debris definitions
1 Allowable Debris
v Small quantity of hair-like filaments (fuzz) or powder, providing there has

been no prior history of debris (allowable or non-allowable) within the
last 400 hours
2 Non-allowable Debris - Category 1
v Identifiable fragments (i.e., keywasher keys, tooth segments, etc.)
v Large quantities of hair-like filaments (fuzz) or powder.
72-01-50 Page 610

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
v Any quantity of hair-like filaments (fuzz) or powder if the module has a

history of generating debris (allowable or non-allowable) within the
last 400 hours
NOTE: Large quantity is defined as sufficient fuzz and/or powder

filaments to completely cover the chip detector magnetic poles.
v Dark irregular magnetic chips (minimum dimension 0.010 in. (0.254 mm)).
v Small clusters of magnetic flakes (three or more) (Ref. NOTE)
v All other debris not defined above.
NOTE: Thin, shiny rolled flakes with feathered edges and more than
0.020 in. (0.508 mm) in size are generated when bearing
surfaces break down due to excessive load (spalling). The outer
surface of the flakes is highly polished and may show parallel
impressions. The inner surface has a rough wavy or granular
texture. After the bearing surface breaks down, the underlying
material disintegrates and chips with dark, coarse and irregular
shapes are produced.
J. Determination of the Category for Debris
(1) Remove and inspect chip detector and filters. Carry out patch-making procedure on
relevant filter and collect any debris from chip detector (Ref. Subpara. H.).
(2) Determine if debris found is allowable or non-allowable. Determine the category of

the non-allowable debris (Ref. Para. I.). Use a magnifying glass and/or microscope.
(3) If the debris is allowable, clean and install filters, strainer, chip detector strainer(s)
and chip detectors. Record category, type and origin of debris. Send debris to an
approved laboratory (Ref. 72-00-00, Maintenance Practices). The engine can be
returned to service, pending the results of the laboratory analyzed debris (Ref.
Para. M.).
(4) If the debris is non-allowable category 2 or 3, record the category, type and origin
of debris. Send debris for analysis to an approved laboratory (Ref. 72-00-00,
Maintenance Practices). If debris originates from the Turbomachinery Module,
proceed to Para. K.; if not, proceed to Para. L..
(5) If non-allowable category 1 debris is found, proceed as follows:
(a) Record category, type and origin of debris.
(b) If the debris is not identifiable as the No. 9 bearing keywasher or as a No. 9
bearing retaining nut castellation or as a tab washer (Ref. step (c)), replace
affected module (Ref. Para. I., step (1), Note 2).
72-01-50 Page 611

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) If the non-allowable category 1 debris is identifiable as No. 9 bearing

keywasher debris (Ref. Fig. 603) or as tab washer debris (Ref. Fig. 604) or as
No. 9 bearing retaining nut castellation debris (Ref. Fig. 605) the RGB
module may remain in service, provided:
1 No previous similar events since last module overhaul.
2 There is no evidence of the keywasher or nut castellation fragment having

been deformed mechanically, such as having gone through the gear teeth,
thereby damaging the contacting surface.
3 If the above criteria are not met, remove the affected RGB (Ref. Para. I.,
step (1), Note 2).
K. Debris originating from the Turbomachinery Module
NOTE: The procedure that follows is applicable to non-allowable Category 2 and 3

debris originating from the Turbomachinery Module.
(1) If the Turbomachinery module has a history of generating debris (within 400 hours),
proceed as follows:
(a) Review the results of last laboratory analysis.
NOTE: Results of last sample MUST be known prior to continuing operation.
(b) If results showed bearing material (Ref. Para. M.), remove turbomachinery (Ref.
Para. I., step (1), Note 2).
(c) If results did not show bearing material and quantity of debris is not increasing
or turbomachinery is not consistently generating debris. Clean and install chip
detector, chip detector strainers, strainers and filter. Return engine to
service (Ref. Note). Check airframe condition panel (if applicable) for chip
detector circuit completion or remove and inspect turbomachinery chip
detector/collector daily for 50 FH. Remove and inspect main oil filter for debris
after 50 hours. If no debris is found, refer to Para. M. when most recent
debris analysis is available. If debris is found, review the results of last laboratory
analysis before next flight, refer to step M..
NOTE: Keeping a debris-generating turbomachinery module in service while a

removal is planned may substantially increase the cost of
repair/refurbishment due to further gear and/or bearing damage.
(d) If amount of debris is the same or increasing or the turbomachinery is

consistently generating debris, replace module at first opportunity within 10 flight
hours (Ref. Para. I., step (1), Note 2).
(2) If the Turbomachinery module has no history of generating debris (within 400
hours), proceed as follows:
(a) Clean and install Main chip detectors, chip detector strainers, strainers and
filters (Ref. Removal/Installation).
72-01-50 Page 612

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TYPICAL
SHAPE OF
FRAGMENTS
0.235
0.235 0.230
0.230 0.078
0.043 0.071
0.038
SECTION AA SECTION AA
MATERIAL REF. AMS 5504 MATERIAL REF. AMS 5504
PRE−SB21619 POST−SB21619
C28291A
No. 9 Bearing Keywasher Debris
Figure 603
72-01-50 Page 613

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TYPICAL
SHAPE OF
FRAGMENT
A 0.115
REF.
0.100
B B REF.
DETAIL A
0.019 − 0.025
SECTION B−B
MATERIAL REF. AMS5510
C100338
Tab Washer Debris
Figure 604
72-01-50 Page 614

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MISSING CASTELLATION
(ONE MISSING − MAX.)
NO. 9 BEARING
RETAINING NUT
C107917
No. 9 Bearing Reatining Nut Debris - Missing Castellation
Figure 605
72-01-50 Page 615

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Run engine at 80% torque for 10 minutes (Ref. AMM).
(c) Remove and inspect Main chip detectors, chip detector strainers, strainers and
(d) If no debris is found, clean and install filters, strainers, chip detector strainer(s)
and chip detectors and proceed as follows:
1 Return engine to service. Check airframe condition panel (if applicable) for
chip detector circuit completion or remove and inspect turbomachinery chip
detector/collector daily for 50 FH. Remove and inspect oil filters after 50
flight hours. If no debris is found, refer to Para. M. when most recent debris
analysis is available. If debris is found, review the results of last laboratory
analysis before next flight, refer to Para. M..
(e) If debris is found, proceed as follows:
1 Drain and flush engine (Ref. 72-00-00, SERVICING) and powerplant oil
system (Ref. AMM),
2 Clean and install chip detectors, strainers and oil filters (Ref.
Removal/Installation)
3 Fill engine (Ref. 72-00-00, SERVICING) and powerplant oil system (Ref.
AMM).
4 Run engine at 80% torque for 10 minutes (Ref. AMM).
5 Remove and inspect Main chip detectors, chip detector strainers, strainers
and filters (Ref. Removal/Installation).
6 If debris is found, replace turbomachinery module (Ref. Para. I., step (1),
Note 2).
7 If no debris is found, clean and install filters, strainer, chip detector

strainer(s) and chip detectors. Return engine to service. Check airframe
condition panel (if applicable) for chip detector circuit completion or remove
and inspect turbomachinery chip detector/collector daily for 50 FH.
Remove and inspect main oil filter after 50 flight hours. If no debris is
found, refer to Para. M. when most recent debris analysis is available. If
debris is found, review the results of last laboratory analysis before next
flight, refer to Para. M..
L. Debris originating from the Reduction Gearbox Module
NOTE: 1. The procedure that follows is applicable Non-allowable Category 2 and 3

debris originating from the Reduction Gearbox Module.
NOTE: 2. A hair-like filament composed of a single chain of metallic dust (fuzz) is

considered accetable. No action required.
(1) If the RGB module has a history of generating debris (within 400 hours), proceed
as follows:
72-01-50 Page 616

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Review the results of last laboratory analysis.
NOTE: Results of last sample MUST be known prior to continuing operation.
(b) If results showed bearing material and origin was determined to be from the
RGB and not the PCU or O/S governor and hydraulic pump, then RGB
should be removed within 50 hours of currently reported debris (Ref. Para. L.)
(Ref. Para. I., step (1), Note 2).
NOTE: It is possible that the debris believed to be originating from the RGB
Module, is in fact, originating from the propeller control unit , O/S
governor, hydraulic pump or feathering pump. To determine the actual
source of the debris, refer to the list of material to determine the
most probable source and/or remove and replace these components
individually based on the most probable source. Check daily to
determine the source of debris within 50 hours.
(c) If results showed bearing material and origin was determined to be from the
PCU or O/S governor and hydraulic pump, replace the defective accessory.
(d) If results did not show bearing material or is unknown, and the quantity of
debris is increasing or the RGB is consistently generating debris, schedule
RGB removal within 50 FH of the current reported debris.
(e) If results did not show bearing material and quantity of debris increasing or the
RGB is not consistently generating debris, clean and install chip detector and
filter. Return engine to service. Check airframe condition panel (if applicable) for
chip detector circuit completion or remove and inspect chip detector/collector
after 10 FH and after 50 FH. Remove and inspect oil filters for debris after 50
flight hours. If no debris is found, refer to Para. M. when most recent debris
analysis is available. If debris is found, review the results of last laboratory
analysis within 25 FH of the initial finding of the current reported debris,
refer to Para. M..
(2) If the RGB module has no history of generating debris (within 400 hours), proceed
as follows:
(a) Clean and install RGB chip detectors, chip detector strainers, strainers and
(b) Run engine at 80% torque for 10 minutes (Ref. AMM).
(c) Remove and inspect RGB chip detectors, chip detector strainers, strainers and
72-01-50 Page 617

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) If no debris is found, clean and install filters, strainers, chip detector strainer(s)
and chip detectors. Return engine to service. Check airframe condition panel (if
applicable) for chip detector completion or remove and inspect chip
detector/collector after 10 FH and after 50 FH. Remove and inspect oil filter for
debris after 50 flight hours. If no debris is found, refer to Para. M. when
most recent debris analysis is available. If debris is found, review the results of
last laboratory analysis within 25 FH of the initial finding of the current
reported debris, refer to Para. M..
(e) If debris is found, proceed as follows:
1 Drain and flush engine (Ref. 72-00-00, SERVICING) and powerplant oil
system (Ref. AMM)
2 Clean and install chip detectors and oil filters (Ref. Removal/Installation).
3 Fill engine (Ref. 72-00-00, SERVICING) and powerplant oil system (Ref.
AMM).
4 Run engine at 80% torque for 10 minutes (Ref. AMM).
5 Remove and inspect RGB chip detectors, chip detector strainers, strainers
and filters (Ref. Removal/Installation).
6 If debris is found, and the origin was determined to be from the RGB,
remove the RGB module within 50 hours of currently reported debris (Ref.
Para. L.). If the origin is from the PCU or O/S governor and hydraulic
pump, replace the accessories (Ref. Para. I., step (1), Note 2).
NOTE: It is possible that the debris believed to be originating from the

RGB Module, is in fact, originating from the propeller control unit ,
O/S governor, hydraulic pump or feathering pump. To determine
the actual source of the debris, refer to the list of material to
determine the most probable source and/or remove and
replace these components individually based on the most probable
source. Check daily to determine the source of debris within 50
hours.
7 If no debris is found, clean and install filters, strainer, chip detector

strainer(s) and chip detectors. Return engine to service. Check airframe
condition panel (if applicable) for chip detector circuit completion or remove
and inspect chip detector/collector after 10 FH and after 50 FH. Remove
and inspect oil filter for debris after 50 flight hours. Remove and inspect oil
filter after 50 flight hours. If no debris is found, refer to Para. M. when
most recent debris analysis is available. If debris is found, review the results
of last laboratory analysis within 25 FH of the initial finding of the current
reported debris, refer to Para. M..
72-01-50 Page 618

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
M. Laboratory Analyzed Debris (filter patch and chip detector)
NOTE: All debris (allowable and non-allowable Category 2 and 3) must be sent to a
laboratory for analysis. After analysis is carried out, Chapter 72-00-00,
STANDARD PRACTICES should be consulted to determine which component
is generating the debris.
(1) If bearing material AMS6444 (52100) or AMS6491 (M50) or AMS6414 or AMS6415

is found, determine the origin from the location of the chip detector and proceed as
follows:
(a) If bearing material originates in turbomachinery module, replace module (Ref.

Para. I., step (1), Note 2).
(b) If bearing material originates in RGB module (Ref. NOTE 1) and it has been
determined that it does not originate in PCU or O/S governor and hydraulic
pump, and the RGB module has a history of generating bearing debris (within
400 flight hours), replace the RGB within 50 flight hours of most currently
reported debris (Ref. Para. I., step (1), Note 2). If bearing material debris
originates from the accessories, then replace the accessories.
NOTE: AMS6444 (52100)/AMS6491 (M50) material in RGB debris may be

caused by electro-erosion of No. 15, 18 and 19 bearings. Check
propeller deicing system in accordance with propeller maintenance
documentation (also refer to Hamilton Standard Service Information
Release PROPS GEN 091A ). Record and report results of check
to local P&WC field representative.
(c) If RGB has no previous history of generating debris, the engine can continue in
service. Inspect the RGB chip detector after 50 flight hours. If no debris found,
the engine can continue in service. If debris is found, replace the RGB
within 50 flight hours of the most currently reported debris (Ref. Para. I., step
(1), Note 2).
NOTE: Keeping a debris-generating RGB module in service while a removal

is planned may substantially increase the cost of repair/refurbishment
due to further gear and/or bearing damage.
(2) All allowable debris (non-bearing material): engine can continue in service.
(3) If debris is not allowable and gear material is found, carry out an inspection of the
following components (depending on which chip detector the material was found)
(Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK):
(a) Reduction Gearbox Module
v First-stage gears
(b) Turbomachinery Module
v Angle-drive gearbox gears

v Oil-pump drive gears
72-01-50 Page 619

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
v Fuel-pump drive gears

v Starter-generator drive gears
(c) If defects found during inspection are within acceptable limits, engine can be
returned to service.
(d) If gear inspection shows defects exceeding limits, replace affected module
(4) If material found is not gear material and/or labyrinth seal material (AMS5504 or
AMS5613 or AMS5663), refer to 72-00-00, Material Specification and Common
Contaminants Tables to determine origin of debris. If possible remedy per
maintenance manual instructions or return to an approved overhaul facility.
(5) If debris found was labyrinth seal material (AMS5504 or AMS5613 or AMS5663)
and was a major or minor contaminant (Ref. Note 1) on a main oil filter at the
initial patch check or filter change (Ref. Note 2) on a new, overhauled or repaired
engine, carry out an additional filter patch check after 50 flight hours. If seal material
is found carry out inspection in step (6), otherwise return module/engine to
service.
NOTE: 1. The amount of individual constituents in oil filter patch debris after
analysis is;
Major - when weight of the constituent is more than 50% of the total
debris weight;
Minor - when weight of the constituent is less than 50% but more than
5% of the total debris weight;
Traces - when weight of the constituent is less than 5% of total debris
weight.
NOTE: 2. If the initial patch check or filter change is carried out at more than 100
flight hours, the seal material found may have been generated after the
running-in period. Therefore, an additional patch check must be
carried out after approximately one week (50 flight hours). Carry out the
inspections shown for labyrinth seal material (AMS5504 or AMS5613
or AMS5663).
(6) If labyrinth seal material (AMS5504 or AMS5613 or AMS5663) debris was found as
a major or minor contaminant (Ref. step (5), Note 1) on a main oil filter, at any time
except the initial patch check or filter change (Ref. step (5), Note 2) on a new,
overhauled or repaired engine, the following borescope inspections must be carried
out:
(a) A borescope inspection of the low pressure (LP) and high pressure (HP)
impellers to check for severe rubs or foreign object damage (FOD) (Ref.
72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK).
(b) A borescope inspection of the high and low pressure turbine blades and the
first- and second-stage power turbine blades to check for severe rubs (tips,
platforms, etc.), blade shift, corrosion/sulfidation and burned or missing tips (Ref.
72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK).
72-01-50 Page 620

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) A borescope inspection through the NL pulse pickup probe port at the bottom
of the intercompressor case air plenum to check for abradable seal material
(Ref. 72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK). In addition, the tip of the pickup probe
must be checked for magnetic material which could indicate No. 3 or 4
bearing distress.
(d) A borescope inspection through the bottom T6 thermocouple port (Ref.

72-00-00, INSPECTION/CHECK) to check for soot, carbon or oil in the area
around No. 6 and 7 bearing housing and at the bottom of the interturbine duct.
(e) To minimize the possibility of bearing failure and to facilitate decision making
when the origin of the seal material is not discovered during the above
inspections, operators may, at their discretion, carry out a borescope inspection
of No. 5 bearing cavity through the oil scavenge port (Ref. 72-00-00,
INSPECTION/CHECK) to check for labyrinth seal, bearing and bearing cage
deterioration.
NOTE: Use of a side viewing adapter to inspect the bearing cavity is not
recommended due to the difficulties encountered in locating the
entrance hole.
(7) If module is not found acceptable after inspections in step (6), remove module/engine
(8) If module is found acceptable during the inspections in step (6), the engine may
remain in service. Check airframe condition panel (if applicable) for chip detector
circuit completion or remove and inspect chip detector/collector daily for 50 FH. If
labyrinth seal material is found and is the major or minor contaminant (Ref. step
(5), NOTE 1), remove and return engine to an approved overhaul facility for an
inspection to be carried out.
(9) If the material found is not bearing/gear or seal material, but is organic/non-organic,
refer to 72-00-00, Material Specification and Common Contaminants Tables to
determine origin of debris. If possible, determine the source of the debris per
maintenance manual instructions or return to an approved overhaul facility.
(10) The most frequent non-magnetic materials found in filter debris are:
v Aluminum - Thin needle like fragments and powder

The most probable source of these types of contamination is the main/scavenge
oil pump housings/covers. Fragments are produced when the pump’s inner
wall is scratched or grooved. Powder is the result of cavitation or erosion. If more
than 10 fragments are found, the oil pumps should be removed and the
housings and covers visually inspected. If powder and/or less than 10 fragments
are found, the oil pumps can continue in service until a significant drop in oil
pressure occurs. The oil pumps should then be removed, the housings and covers
visually inspected and replaced if necessary.
v Silver Plating - Flakes
72-01-50 Page 621

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The most probable sources of this contamination are silver-plated nuts and the
towershaft bevel gears. This type of contamination is acceptable and the engine can
continue in service with no special inspection required.
v Magnesium - Chips
The most probable source of this contamination is the Reduction Gearbox and
could be caused by bearing outer races fretting in the housing bores or by gears
touching the housings (this indicates the gears are in an abnormal running
position). If this type of contamination is found, the engine can continue in service
providing an oil filter patch check is carried out every 250 hours and the
amount of magnesium chips is monitored. If the amount of contamination increases,
the reduction gearbox should be replaced.
v Carbon - Particles
The most common non-metallic contamination is carbon particles caused by
thermal breakdown of the oil due to hot spots in the engine. This type of
contamination is acceptable and the engine can continue in service with no special
inspections required.
v Silica - Particles
Silica contamination indicates that dirt or atmospheric pollutants may have
entered the oil system via labyrinth seal pressurized air and/or while replenishing
the oil. Excessive amounts of silica can indicate blocked cooling air passages
and worn labyrinth seals. To restore the silica content to normal levels, an oil
change is required. The engine can continue in service providing oil consumption
and ITT/T6 are within limits.
v Copper - Fragments
Usually found with fiber insulating material and paint chips in the reduction
gearbox scavenge filter and AC generator scavenge strainer. Ferrous material
may also be found on the AC generator chip detector. This type of contamination
is caused by failure of the AC generator gearbox.
N. Intercompressor Case P2.5 Cavity Inspection
NOTE: Refer to borescope ICC air plenum inspection (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE -
INSPECTION/CHECK) and troubleshooting chart Oil on Flanges E and/or F,
(Ref. 72-00-01, ENGINE - FAULT ISOLATION)
(1) Remove ICC drain tube (Ref. Removal/Installation).
(2) Inspect the bottom of the cavity for bolts and/or keywashers, if any bolts and/or
keywashers are found, do a borescope inspection of the HP impeller shroud
retaining bolts (Ref. 72-00-00, ENGINE - INSPECTION/CHECK).
(3) If no oil found, install the ICC drain tube (Ref. Removal/Installation) and return
engine to service.
(4) If oil is found, install the ICC drain tube (Ref. Removal/Installation) and carry out a
5-minute engine run at ground idle (GI) (Ref. 72-00-00, ADJUSTMENT/TEST).
72-01-50 Page 622

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Remove ICC drain tube (Ref. Removal/Installation) and collect any oil accumulated.
(6) Inspect the ICC drain tube for flow restriction. If any, rectify/replace the ICC drain
tube (Ref. Removal/Installation).
(7) If no oil is found, install ICC drain tube (Ref. Removal/Installation) and return
engine to service.
(8) If less than 5 ml of oil is collected, carry out the following:
(a) The engine may be returned to service after the chip detector is checked for
continuity. If the circuit is complete, carry out the procedure for chip detector
circuit completion(Ref. 72-00-01, FAULT ISOLATION). If the circuit is not
complete, return engine to service.
(b) Repeat the complete inspection procedure within 50 flight hours.
(9) If more than 5 ml of oil was collected, carry out the following:
(a) Remove NL sensor and NL sensor port sealing tube (Ref. 72-01-60,
(b) Check packings for damage (oil could leak from damaged packings into the
P2.5 cavity).
(c) Reinstall NL sensor and NL sensor port sealing tube (Ref. 72-01-60,
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION), using new packings.
(d) Remove and visually inspect P2.5/P3 switching valve (Ref. 72-30-00).
(e) If required, rectify, then reinstall P2.5/P3 switching valve (Ref. 72-30-00,
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES).
(f) If no defects found, replace engine.
(g) If defects found, correct and repeat steps (1) to (7).
(h) If more than 5 ml of oil is collected, replace engine.
(i) If less than 5 ml of oil is collected, engine may be returned to service after the
chip detector is checked for continuity. If the circuit is complete, carry out the
procedure for chip detector circuit completion (Ref. 72-00-01, FAULT
ISOLATION). If the circuit is not complete, return engine to service.
(j) Repeat the complete inspection procedure within 50 flight hours.
6. Check
A. Chip Detector
(1) Functional Check
72-01-50 Page 623

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Connect ohmmeter across detector output terminals and place suitable steel
bar across magnet poles. Circuit resistance must be less than 0.5 ohm.
(b) Check security of output terminal pins and condition of potting compound. If
pins are loose or if compound is cracked, reject detector.
(c) Insulation resistance between any terminal pin and case must be greater than
2 megohms at 45 volts AC or DC. Check, using test set.
(d) The chip detector magnets must be capable of lifting a 4-ounce (113.40 g)
steel bar.
(2) Operational Check
(a) Place suitable steel bar across magnet poles and check for circuit continuity.
(b) Check security of output terminal pins and condition of potting compound. If pins
are loose or if compound is cracked, reject detector.
(3) Chip Detector Airframe Circuit and Indicating System Operational Check
(a) The chip detector airframe circuit and indicating system operational check must
be carried out in accordance with the instructions contained in the AMM.
NOTE: The purpose of this check is to ensure a shorted chip detector will
activate the chip detector indicator.
B. Spring Compression
(1) Oil Pressure Regulating Valve
v 25 lb. 4 oz. to 27 lb. 0 oz., 2.155 in. length (11.45-12.25 kg, 54.737 mm)
(2) Pressure Oil Check Valve
v 9 lb. 0.5 oz. to 9 lb. 6.5 oz., 1.230 in. length (4.10-4.27 kg, 31.242 mm)
v 11 lb. 4.5 oz. to 12 lb. 0.5 oz., 1.030 in. length (5.12-5.46 kg, 26.162 mm)
(3) Filter Bypass and Pressure Relief Valve
C. Oil Filler Cap (Pre-SB21720, Post-SB21720).
(1) Check for positive spring action.
(2) Verify that the nut cannot be turned by hand. If the nut can be turned by hand, do
as follows:
72-01-50 Page 624

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Check for the minimum breakaway torque using suitable torque wrench set at
2 lbf.in. (0.23 Nm). If the Oil Filler Cap Assembly shows any movement of the
self-locking nut during that check, replace the self-locking nut as follows:
1 Mark the position of the nut, count and mark the remaining threads on the
bolt for reference. Remove the nut and discard
2 Install the new nut at the same position as previously identified. Install the
oil filler cap and check the spring loaded feature for positive spring action
as in step (1).
D. Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Elbow
(1) Check that restrictor is clear.
E. Drain Valve
(1) Clean holes in valve using rod or wire.
(2) Check spring compression using spring compression tester: 4 oz. to 8 oz.
(113.40-226.80 g), 0.250 in. (6.35 mm) length.
72-01-50 Page 625/626

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING
1. General

components of the engine oil system.
B. Before cleaning, a sample of metal particles found on chip detectors or oil filters should
be retained for source determination.
Item No. Name
PWC05-037 Enamel
PWC11-002 Trichloroethane 1-1-1 (inhibited)
PWC11-011 Cleaner
PWC11-013 Compound, Carbon Removing
PWC11-033 Degreaser, Liquid
PWC11-054 Cleaner, Aqueous (Low Foam)
PWC11-055 Degreasing, Aqueous (Wax Remover)
PWC13-001 Primer
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name Remarks
Electrosonic cleaner Vibration frequency = 3600 cycles,
current frequency = 60 cycles
Soft brush
Stiff bristle brush and/or spray equipment
Ultrasonic cleaner
Back-flushing fixture
72-01-50 Page 701

OIL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING Oct 20/2000
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Cleaning

WARNING: WHEN USING COMPRESSED AIR FOR DRYING, REGULATE PRESSURE
TO 29 psig (200 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES OR FACE SHIELD TO
PROTECT EYES.
NOTE: Tergit (PWC11-031) and Magkleen 4 (PWC11-032) are recommended to be used
as an alternative to petroleum solvent and trichloroethane respectively when the
use of these products is restricted by local environmental and/or health legislation.
A. General
(1) With the exception of the items specifically mentioned, clean all parts with
petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-031) and blow dry with filtered
compressed air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
B. Oil Filter Elements
NOTE: 1. The following instructions apply to cleanable filters only. Filters marked ’NON
CLEANABLE’ must not be cleaned.
NOTE: 2. P&WC is unable to supply a specific number of times a filter element can be
cleaned before it is replaced. This number is dependent on the engine
operating conditions. The number of filter element cleanings is based on the
Operator’s experience, as well as the cleaning and inspection process. It
is possible that an impending by-pass indication may result prior to the next
scheduled filter element removal because of the filter element serviceability.
NOTE: 3. There are three acceptable methods to clean the oil filters. The first method is
the preferred and most efficient method, with the other two as alternatives:
(1) METHOD 1: Ultrasonic or Electrosonic bath using aqueous degreaser

solution(PWC11-055) (Preferred Method)
(a) Pre-cleaning:
1 Ensure packings, if fitted, are removed from bore of filter element and
discarded.

RESULT IN CONTAMINATION OF THE INTERIOR. OIL FLOW IS
FROM THE OUTSIDE TO THE INSIDE, THE INTERIOR
BEING THE CLEAN SIDE.
2 Plug the centers of the filter element by inserting a tapered rubber or
plastic plugs of the appropriate size into the bores.
72-01-50 Page 702

OIL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING Nov 09/2001
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 Using protective gloves, immerse the filter element horizontally in aqueous
degreaser solution (PWC11-055), heated at 57 to 63° C (135-145°F) for
thirty minutes.
4 Immediately immerse in warm water 43 to 49° C (110-120°F) for five

minutes or spray with warm water for two minutes at 30 PSIG Max.
5 Spray flush filters from the outside to the inside with aqueous cleaner
solution (PWC11-054), heated at 57 to 63° C (135-145°F) with a maximum
pressure of 30 PSIG.

Max.
(b) Clean the filter element as follows:
NOTE: 1. Adjust cleaning time to suit condition of filter. For best results,
replace the degreaser solution (PWC11-055) after thirty minutes of
cleaning time.
NOTE: 2. Steps 2 thru 5 are optional and may be omitted if the back-flush
equipment is not available.
1 Using protective gloves, fully immerse the filter element horizontally in a

clean thermostatically controlled ultrasonic or electrosonic bath of
aqueous degreaser solution (PWC11-055), heated at 57 to 63° C
(135-145°F) for twenty minutes, rotating filter 90 degrees after each five
minutes of cleaning operation.
2 Remove from bath and carefully remove a plug from one end of the filter.
3 Install in the back-flush fixture and immerse in aqueous degreaser solution

(PWC11-055), heated at 57 to 63° C (135-145°F).
4 Using protective gloves, back-flush the filter (from the inside to the outside)
and rotate filter element 90 degrees after each three minutes of cleaning
operation, while providing 1 to 3 gallons per minute at 30 PSIG Max. for ten
minutes Min.
5 Remove the back-flush fixture and filter element from tank and with
protective glooves remove the filter.
6 Using protective gloves, carefully remove all remaining plugs from bore.
72-01-50 Page 703

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Max.

PRESSURE TO 29 psig (200 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES
OR FACE SHIELD TO PROTECT EYES.
8 Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
9 Inspect filter element (Ref. Inspection/Check).
(2) METHOD 2: Ultrasonic or Electrosonic bath using cleaner (PWC11-031) and

aqueous cleaner (PWC11-033) and degreaser solvent (PWC11-032) (Alternative
Method)
(a) Ensure packings, if fitted, are removed from bore of filter element and
discarded.

CLEAN SIDE.

CONTROL MEASURES.
(c) Immerse the filter element in cleaner (PWC11-031) for 30 minutes Min.
Maintain temperature at 21°C (70°F) or heat cleaner to 45°C (113°F) Max.

(d) Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(e) Spray flush filters with aqueous cleaner (PWC11-033), heated at 21°C (70°F),
using one part cleaner to three parts water.

(f) Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(g) Place filter element in ultrasonic or electrosonic cleaner boiling sump.
72-01-50 Page 704

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CONTROL MEASURES.
(h) Fill tank to approximately 1⁄4 in. (6.350 mm) below edge with degreaser solvent
(PWC11-032).
(i) Set the temperature to 37.7°C (100°F) Max.
(j) Turn the ultrasonic or electrosonic switch to ON position for ten minutes
minimum.
(k) Using protective gloves, immerse the filter element horizontally in the ultrasonic
or electrosonic bath
(l) Back-flush the filter element using 1 to 3 gallons per minute (3.78-11.35 liters)
at 30 psig (206.9kPa) for ten minutes, rotating filter 180 degrees while
back-flushing.
NOTE: DELETED.
(m) Using protective gloves, remove element from tank and plugs from bore.

(n) Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(o) Inspect filter element (Ref. Inspection/Check).
(3) METHOD 3: Ultrasonic clean filter using solvent (PWC11-002) (Alternative Method)
NOTE: Verify if the use of solvent (PWC11-002) is restricted by local environmental

and/or health legislation. If this is the case, this method is not recommended.
(a) Ensure packings, if fitted, are removed from bore of filter element and discarded.

CLEAN SIDE.
(c) Place filter element horizontally in ultrasonic cleaner tank.
72-01-50 Page 705

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CONTROL MEASURES.
(d) Fill tank to approximately 1⁄4 in. (6.350 mm) below edge with solvent
(PWC11-002).
(e) Operate the cleaner for 10 to 15 minutes. Use protective gloves, rotate the filter
element 90 degrees after every three minutes of cleaning operation.
(f) Remove the filter element from the tank and install on a back-flush fixture.
(g) Back-flush the filter element with filtered solvent (PWC11-002)
(h) Using protective gloves, remove element from fixture and plugs from bore.

(i) Dry element with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(j) Inspect filter element (Ref. Inspection/Check).
C. Strainers and Pump Inlet Screen
(1) Gently agitate strainers/screen in unused petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) or

cleaner (PWC11-031) to remove loose contamination.
NOTE: Any contamination found should be investigated and corrective action

taken (Ref. Inspection/Check).
(2) Remove strainers/screen from solvent and allow to drain in clean environment.
NOTE: Use brush to remove stubborn contamination.

(3) Dry strainers/screen with clean filtered air at 29 psig (200 kPa) maximum.
(4) Inspect strainers/screen (Ref. Inspection/Check).
72-01-50 Page 706

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Carbon Removal

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS INFORMATION SUCH AS HAZARDOUS
EXPLOSION, REACTIVITY HEALTH HAZARD DATA, PRECAUTIONS
FOR SAFE HANDLING, USE AND CONTROL METHODS.
(1) Preparation of carbon removal solution.
(a) Fill tank with water to 50% of operating volume.
(b) Cautiously add required amount of carbon removal compound (PWC11-013)

and stir to dissolve.
NOTE: The solution when operating should contain 2 to 2.4 lb. of compound
per US gal. (0.907-1.09 kg per 3.78 liter).
(c) Fill tank with water to 85% of operating volume and stir.
(d) Heat solution to 82 to 93°C (180-200°F).
(e) Fill tank with water to 100% of operating volume and stir to mix.
(2) Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SOLUTION TO REMOVE CARBON FROM

COMPONENTS MADE FROM SINGLE CRYSTAL MATERIAL.
(a) Soak component in solution at 82 to 93°C (180-200°F) for 30 to 90 minutes.
(b) Pressure rinse with cold water over tank, then dip rinse in a separate tank and
follow with a pressure rinse.
(c) Rinse in hot water at 66 to 93°C (150-200°F).
WARNING: WHEN USING COMPRESSED AIR FOR DRYING, REGULATE TO

29 psig (200 kPa) OR LESS. WEAR GOGGLES OR FACE SHIELD
TO PROTECT EYES.
(d) Blow dry with air at 29 psig (200 kPa).
E. Oil Indicator Sight Glass

CONSUMABLE MATERIAL INFORMATION SUCH AS HAZARDOUS
FOR SAFE HANDLING, USE AND CONTROL METHODS.
(1) Clean rear of sight glass using cleaner (PWC11-011), or equivalent, and a soft
brush.
72-01-50 Page 707

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Flush with petroleum solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-031) and

simultaneously scrub with brush to remove all traces of cleaner.
6. Painting
A. Procedure
(1) Repair damaged painted surfaces using one coat each of primer (PWC13-001) and
enamel (PWC05-037).
NOTE: If required, damaged anodic (on aluminum) or chromate (on magnesium)

surfaces must be repaired (Ref. 72-00-00) before the application of primer.
72-01-50 Page 708

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS
1. General
components of the engine oil system.

NOTE: Lubricate packings with engine oil (PWC03-001), unless otherwise stated.
Item No. Name
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC34520 Puller - (Replaced by PWC50781 and PWC50782)
Name
Dies
Plate, Lapping
Swiss Files
Taps
72-01-50 Page 801

OIL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Mar 11/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Approved Repairs
A. Tubes
(1) Using abrasive cloth (PWC05-101) followed by polishing with crocus cloth
(PWC05-061), blend out nicks, scratches, pits and corrosion not exceeding 0.005 in.
(0.127 mm) deep, provided blended areas do not exceed 0.5 sq. in. (32.258 sq.
mm) and are separated by 0.5 in. (12.70 mm) minimum undamaged surface.
(2) Fluorescent penetrant inspect tube assemblies.
B. No. 6 and 7 Bearing Oil Pressure, Vent and Scavenge Tubes Super B Nut Replacement
(Ref. Fig. 801)
CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE NIPPLE.

(1) Remove wire (2) from nut (1). Discard nut and wire.
(2) Install replacement nut (1) and wire (2).
NOTE: Using lockwire to secure the head of the thrust wire pin to the nut is
interference with adjacent components. The nut which is retained by the
thrust wire will be more difficult to replace if the head is removed.
C. Air Inlet-to-Scavenge Pump Oil Transfer Tube Seal Replacement (Ref. Fig. 802)
(1) Release retaining rings (1).
(2) Slide tube (2) in either direction to clear end from inlet case or scavenge pump.
(3) Remove packing (3) on both ends of tube and discard.
(4) Lubricate replacement packing (3) and install in grooves on tube.
(5) Slide tube (2) to engage with inlet case or scavenge pump.
(6) Install retaining rings (1).
D. Housings and Cover Plates
(1) Blend out nicks, burrs, scratches, pits and corrosion using abrasive cloth
(PWC05-101) followed by polishing with crocus cloth (PWC05-061).
(3) Replace defective inserts and studs.
(4) Repair damaged anodic film surfaces on aluminum (Ref. 72-00-00).
(5) Dress mating surfaces using a lapping plate and lapping compound (PWC05-019).
(6) Repair damaged chromate film surfaces on magnesium (Ref. 72-00-00).
72-01-50 Page 802

OIL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Valves
(1) Lap valve faces and seats using a lapping plate and lapping compound (PWC05-019)
to obtain 360-degree contact.
F. Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Tee Restrictor Replacement (Ref. Fig. 803)
(1) Remove plug (1) using puller (PWC34520 rev.B - Replaced by PWC50781 and
PWC50782). Discard plug.
(2) Remove restrictor (2) using puller (PWC34520 rev. B - Replaced by PWC50781
and PWC50782). Discard restrictor.
(3) Check that hole diameter of tee (3) is 0.1875 to 0.1880 in. (4.76-4.77 mm).
(4) Ensuring replacement plug and restrictor are clean and dry, insert restrictor (2) in
tee (3) using puller (PWC34520 rev. B - Replaced by PWC50781 and PWC50782).
CAUTION: RESTRICTOR MUST BE FULLY SEATED ON TEE SHOULDER BEFORE

INSTALLING PLUG.
(5) Install plug (1) in tee using puller (PWC34520 rev. B - Replaced by PWC50781 and
PWC50782).
(6) Ensure the following:
(a) Plug is ± 0.005 in. (0.127 mm) to restrictor surface.
(b) Plug/restrictor is 0.005 to 0.045 in. (0.127-1.143 mm) underflush to tee end
surface.
72-01-50 Page 803

OIL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Mar 11/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C11214A
Super B Nut Replacement
Figure 801
72-01-50 Page 804

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 801
1. Nut
2. Wire
72-01-50 Page 805

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2 3
C63335
Air Inlet Case to Scavenge Pump Oil Transfer Tube Seal Replacement
Figure 802
72-01-50 Page 806

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 802
1. Retaining Ring
2. Transfer Tube
3. Packing
72-01-50 Page 807

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C63340
Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Tee Restrictor Replacement
Figure 803
72-01-50 Page 808

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 803
1. Plug
2. Restrictor
3. Tee
72-01-50 Page 809/810

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
A. These instructions provide the information necessary for replacement of components of

the engine performance indicating system.
WARNING: WEAR GOGGLES WHEN CUTTING, INSTALLING OR REMOVING

LOCKWIRE.
TOUCHES BARE SKIN.
NOTE: Lubricate packings with engine oil (PWC03-001), unless stated otherwise.
B. Use 1 ml of alcohol (PWC11-014) with 15 ml of electrical contact enhancer (PWC05-256)

and mix thoroughly.
Item No. Name
PWC04-003 Grease, Synthetic
PWC05-076 Oil, Penetrating
PWC05-089 Lockwire
PWC05-256 Enhancer, Contact, Electrical
PWC06-007 Coating, Film Lubricant
PWC06-036 Compound, Lubricating
PWC11-014 Alcohol, Isopropyl
3. Special Tools
Tool No. Name

PWC54001 Wrench (Superseded by PWC54401)
72-01-60 Page 401

PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Mar 11/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Tool No. Name

PWC54201 Wrench
PWC54401 Wrench
PWC56384 Wrench
PWC58104 Wrench
Name
Heat gun - Thermofit Minigun (with reflector)
Tap - 0.375-24 UNJF-3B
Tap - 0.500-20 UNJF-3B
Pliers - Softjaw - Glenair TG69
Wrench - Ministrap - Glenair TG70
5. Negative and Positive Bus-bars (Ref. Fig. 401)
A. Removal
(1) Remove T6 thermocouple rear electrical cable (Ref. Para. 7.).
(2) Remove nuts (11), bolts (12) and lockplates (13).
(3) Remove nuts (14), bolts (15) and lockplates (13).
(4) Remove bolts (4, 9), nuts (8) and washers (6).
(5) Remove screws (3, 10), nuts (7) and washers (5).
(6) Remove bus-bars (1, 2).
B. Installation
NOTE: 1. Lubricate bolts and face of nuts adjacent to washers with coating (PWC06-007).
NOTE: 2. Install washers and nuts on the side of brackets (16) facing into engine.
(1) Install negative bus-bar (1) with split at location shown. Install bolt (4), washer (6)
and nut (8). Torque nut 26 to 30 lb.in. (2.94-3.39 Nm).
(2) Install bolt (9), washer (6), T6 thermocouple rear electrical cable lead (Ref. Para.
7.) and nut (8). Torque nut 26 to 30 lb.in. (2.94-3.39 Nm).
(3) Install positive bus-bar (2) with split at location shown. Install screw (10), washer (5)
and nut (7). Torque nut 18 to 20 lb.in. (2.03-2.26 Nm).
(4) Install screw (3), washer (5), T6 thermocouple rear electrical cable lead (Ref. Para.
7.) and nut (7). Torque nut 18 to 20 lb.in. (2.03-2.26 Nm).
72-01-60 Page 402

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TDC
LOCATION OF
BUS−BAR SPLITS
25
24
17
28
26 16
27 FLANGE K REAR VIEW
3
21
9 1
22
23
POST−SB21686
17
19 18
2
24
12
13
20
15 5
6
8 7
11
6
14 8
5
7
4 10
C86970
Negative and Positive Bus-bars and Immersion Thermocouples - Removal/Installation
72-01-60 Page 403

PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Oct 18/2002
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 401
1. Negative Bus-bar
2. Positive Bus-bar
3. Screw
4. Bolt
5. Washer
6. Washer
7. Nut
8. Nut
9. Bolt
10. Bolt
11. Nut
12. Bolt
13. Lockplate
14. Nut
15. Screw
16. Bracket
17. Nut
18. Washer (Pre-SB21686)
19. Plate (Pre-SB21686)
20. Plate (Pre-SB21686)
21. Thermocouple (Pre-SB21686)
22. Gasket (Pre-SB21686)
23. Adapter (Pre-SB21686)
24. Gasket
25. T6 Thermocouple (Post-SB21686)
26. Sealing Plate (Post-SB21686)
27. Sealing Plate (Post-SB21686)
28. Washer (Post-SB21686)
72-01-60 Page 404

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SECTION A−A
A A
Assembled Configuration C66060

Negative and Positive Bus-bars and Immersion Thermocouples - Removal/Installation
72-01-60 Page 405

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Install screws (3), washers (5) and nuts (7). Torque nuts 18 to 20 lb.in.
(2.03-2.26 Nm).
(6) Install T6 thermocouple rear electrical cable (Ref. Para. 7.).
(7) Install thermocouple terminals (Ref. Para. 6.) and carry out insulation resistance
test (Ref. Inspection/Check).
6. T6 Thermocouples (Ref. Fig. 401)
NOTE: Pre-SB21686: Ensure a 0.375-24 UNJF-3B tap is available before removing

thermocouples. Adapter threads may require cleaning before the thermocouples
are reinstalled.
A. Removal
(1) Remove T6 thermocouple rear electrical cable (Ref. Para. 7.).
(2) Pre-SB21686
(a) Remove nuts (17), washers (18) and plates (19, 20).
(b) Remove nuts (11), bolts (12) and lockplates (13).
(c) Remove nuts (14), bolts (15) and lockplates (13).
(d) Install wrench (PWC54401) on thermocouple adapters (23).
CAUTION: BEFORE REMOVAL, LUBRICATE THERMOCOUPLE THREADS

WITH PENETRATING OIL (PWC05-076). DO NOT USE WD40.
BACK-OFF THERMOCOUPLE BY A QUARTER TURN FREQUENTLY
DURING REMOVAL PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: HOLD WRENCH (PWC54401) SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN
UNTORQUING THERMOCOUPLES.
(e) Remove T6 thermocouples (21) and gaskets (22) using wrench (PWC54201).
Discard gaskets.
NOTE: 1. T6 thermocouples which can only be removed with the adapter due
to excessive bending of the stem are recommended to be discarded
and replaced with a new thermocouple.
NOTE: 2. Scratches, grooves or rubs on the thermocouple stem less than

0.010 in (0.254 mm) deep are acceptable. Function check
thermocouple to verify its serviceability (Ref. Inspection/Check).
NOTE: 3. Adapters with loose, damaged or missing sealing rings are

recommended to be discarded and replaced with new adapters.
(f) If required, remove adapters (23) and gaskets (24) using wrench (PWC54401).
Discard gaskets.
72-01-60 Page 406

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Post-SB21686
CAUTION: BEFORE REMOVAL, LUBRICATE THERMOCOUPLE THREADS

WITH PENETRATING OIL (PWC05-076). DO NOT USE WD40.
BACK-OFF THERMOCOUPLE BY A QUARTER TURN FREQUENTLY
DURING REMOVAL PROCEDURE.
(a) Remove T6 thermocouples (25) and gaskets (24) using wrench (PWC54401) or
(PWC56384). Discard gaskets.
B. Installation
(1) If necessary, clean up threads in turbine support case thermocouple bosses using a
0.500-20 UNJF-3B tap.
NOTE: Experience has shown three different 0.500-20 UNJF-3B taps are used in
the most effective cleaning procedure. The first pass is made with a worn
tap, the second with a newer tap and the third with a brand new tap
modified by the removal of the tapered end. This ensures the complete
thread is cleaned.
(2) Pre-SB21686
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ENGINE OIL ON THREADS OF IMMERSION

THERMOCOUPLES. OIL WILL CAUSE IMMERSION
THERMOCOUPLES TO BOND IN TURBINE SUPPORT CASE.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE T6 THERMOCOUPLE STEEL BRAID DOES NOT
CONTACT ANY ADJACENT PART(S).
(a) If removed, install adapters (23) as follows:
1 Install gaskets (24) on adapters (23).
NOTE: Use grease (PWC04-003) to keep the gaskets in position.
2 If necessary, clean internal threads of the thermocouple adapters, using a

0.375-24 UNJF-3B tap.
NOTE: Experience has shown three different 0.375-24 UNJF-3B taps are
used in the most effective cleaning procedure. The first pass is
made with a worn tap, the second with a newer tap and the third
with a brand new tap modified by the removal of the tapered
end. This ensures the complete thread is cleaned.
3 Apply a thin coat of lubricating compound (PWC06-036) to the external

threads of adapters (23). Install adapters using wrench (PWC54401).
Torque adapters 75 to 85 lb.in. (8.46-9.60 Nm). Remove wrench.
(b) Install gaskets (22) in the groove of the installed adapters (23).
NOTE: Use grease (PWC04-003) to keep the gaskets in position.
(c) Install wrench (PWC54401).
72-01-60 Page 407

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: HOLD WRENCH (PWC54401) SECURELY IN POSITION WHEN

TORQUING THERMOCOUPLES.
(d) Apply a thin coat of lubricating compound (PWC06-036) to the threads of
thermocouples (21). Install thermocouples using wrench (PWC54201).
Torque thermocouples 32 to 40 lb.in. (3.62-4.52 Nm).
(3) Post-SB21686
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ENGINE OIL ON THREADS OF IMMERSION

THERMOCOUPLES. OIL WILL CAUSE IMMERSION
THERMOCOUPLES TO BOND IN TURBINE SUPPORT CASE.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE T6 THERMOCOUPLE STEEL BRAID DOES NOT
CONTACT ANY ADJACENT PART(S).
(a) Install gaskets (24) on thermocouples (25).
(b) Apply a thin coat of lubricating compound (PWC06-036) to thermocouple

threads.
(c) Install thermocouples using wrench (PWC54401) or (PWC56384). Torque

thermocouples 75 to 80 lb.in. (8.48-9.04 Nm).
(4) Install plates (19, 20) (Pre-SB21686) or (26, 27) (Post-SB21686), washers (18)
(Pre-SB21686) or (28) (Post-SB21686) and nuts (17). Torque nuts 23 to 26 lb.in.
(2.60-2.94 Nm).
NOTE: 1. Install plate (20) or (27) with radius facing inwards and plate (19) or (26)
with radius facing outwards.
NOTE: 2. Plates (20) have retaining edges, ensure plates (19) press against them.
(5) Do the following:
(a) Pre-SB21686
CAUTION: HOLD TERMINALS SECURELY AT 90-DEGREE ANGLE TO

BUS-BAR WHEN TORQUING SCREW OR NUT.
1 Install thermocouple (21) terminals on side of positive bus-bar (2) facing
into engine, lockplates (13) on opposite side, bolts (15) and nuts (14).
NOTE: Lubricate bolts with coating (PWC06-007).
2 Install thermocouple (21) terminals on side of negative bus-bar (1) facing

(b) Post-SB21686
72-01-60 Page 408

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: HOLD TERMINALS SECURELY AT 90-DEGREE ANGLE TO

BUS-BAR WHEN TORQUING SCREW OR NUT.
1 Install thermocouple (25) terminals on side of positive bus-bar (2) facing
2 Install thermocouple (25) terminals on side of negative bus-bar (1) facing

(6) Perform insulation resistance test (Ref. Inspection/Check).
7. T6 Thermocouple Rear Electrical Cable (Ref. Fig. 402)
A. Removal
(1) Remove nuts (1, 2) and disconnect instrumentation (15), T6 harness leads (16) and
rear cable leads (13) at terminal (14).
(2) Remove nuts (3, 6), bolts (4, 7) and washers (5, 8).
(3) Remove nut (9), bolt (10), lockplate (11) and rear T6 cable (13).
B. Installation
(1) Install T6 rear cable leads (13), bolts (4, 7), washers (5, 8) and nuts (3, 6). Torque
bolt (4) 18 to 20 lb.in. (2.03-2.26 Nm) and bolt (7) 26 to 30 lb.in. (2.94-3.39 Nm).
(2) Install T6 rear cable leads (13), T6 harness leads (16), instrumentation leads (15)
and nuts (1, 2) at terminal (14). Torque nut (1) 24 to 40 lb.in. (2.8-4.6 Nm) and nut
(2) 15 to 20 lb.in. (1.7-2.2 Nm).
(3) Install T6 rear cable bracket, bolt (10) and nut (9). Torque bolt 25 to 28 lb.in.
(2.83-3.16 Nm).
NOTE: Include immersion thermocouple lead (12) and lockplate (11) at bolt (10).
8. NL Speed Sensor Probe (Ref. Fig. 403)
A. Removal

from connector.
72-01-60 Page 409

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13 11 12 14
9
10
1 2 16
15
5
3 6
4
7 8
C79824
T6 Thermocouple Rear Electrical Cable - Removal/Installation
Figure 402
72-01-60 Page 410

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 402
1. Nut
2. Nut
3. Nut
4. Bolt
5. Washer
6. Nut
7. Bolt
8. Washer
9. Nut
10. Bolt
11. Lockplate
12. Thermocouple Lead
13. T6 Rear Cable
14. Terminal
15. Instrumentation Wiring Harness
16. T6 Thermocouple Trim Harness
(2) Disconnect electrical harness connector P33 (Ref. 72-01-10, REMOVAL/

INSTALLATION).
(3) Remove bolts (2), probe (1) and packings (3, 4). Discard packings.
B. Installation
NOTE: Post-SB21269: Before connecting plug, install harness sleeve (PWC05-273)

over plug.
(1) Lubricate packings (3, 4) and install on probe (1).
(2) Install probe and bolts (2). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).

CONNECTORS.

follows:
(a) Prior to installing harness connectors, put a drop of the diluted (Ref. Para. 1.B.)
72-01-60 Page 411

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
7
8
2
3
RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE
C30375B
NL Speed Sensor Probe and NL Sensor Port Sealing Tube - Removal/Installation
Figure 403
72-01-60 Page 412

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 403
1. Probe
2. Bolt
3. Packing
4. Packing
5. Bolt
6. Sealing Tube
7. Packing
8. Packing
CAUTION: ENSURE PLUGS AND RECEPTACLES ARE FREE FROM MOISTURE.

IF NECESSARY, DRY, USING HEAT GUN.
(5) Install harness electrical connector P33. Torque connector coupling nut by hand
until witness band(s) on mating receptacle is/are covered. It is recommended to
further torque connector coupling nuts, using one of the following methods:



(6) Pre-SB21269: Use of insulating tape (PWC05-105) (Post-SB21004) (to wrap the
connector joints is optional (Ref. Fig. 406).
(7) Post-SB21269: Use heat gun to heat shrink harness sleeves over plugs. Connector
9. NL Sensor Port Sealing Tube (Ref. Fig. 403)
A. Removal
(1) Remove bolts (5), sealing tube (6) and packings (7, 8). Discard packings.
72-01-60 Page 413

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packings (7, 8) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on sealing tube
(6).
(2) Install sealing tube and bolts (5). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
10. T6 Thermocouple Trim Harness (Ref. Fig. 404)
A. Removal
(1) Remove nuts (10, 11) and electrical wiring harness leads at bracket (19).
(2) Remove nuts (14, 15, 16), disconnect engine harness leads at terminal block (18)
and remove resistor (17).
(3) Remove nuts (6), bolts (4, 5), clamps (8) and grommets (9) from tube assembly (7).
(4) Remove thermocouple (12) and packing (13). Discard packing.
(5) Remove nuts (2), bolts (3) and T6 harness (1).
B. Installation
(1) Install terminal block (18), bolts (3) and nuts (2). Torque nuts 85 to 95 lb.in.
(9.61-10.74 Nm).
(2) Lubricate packing (13) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on thermocouple
(12).
(3) Install thermocouple. Torque 90 to 100 lb.in. (10.17-11.30 Nm). Secure with lockwire
(PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).
CAUTION: REFER TO INSPECTION/CHECK (CHECK 6), TO SELECT CLASS OF

REPLACEMENT RESISTORS. RESISTANCE VALUE SHOWN ON
ENGINE REFERENCE DATA PLATE SHOULD FALL WITHIN TOLERANCE
GIVEN FOR CLASS SELECTED. HOWEVER, A RESISTOR HAVING A
HIGHER RESISTANCE (WHICH MUST BE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO
VALUE GIVEN ON ENGINE REFERENCE DATA PLATE) AND
IDENTIFIED BY A DIFFERENT CLASS NUMBER MAY BE USED FOR NO
MORE THAN 200 FLIGHT HOURS FROM INSTALLATION. ITT LIMITS
MUST NOT BE EXCEEDED.
(4) Install thermocouple leads, resistor (17), engine harness leadsand nuts (14, 15, 16)
at terminal block (18). Torque nuts (15, 16) 25 to 30 lb.in. (2.83-3.39 Nm) and nut
(14) 20 to 25 lb.in. (2.26-2.83 Nm).
CAUTION: ENSURE MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 0.250 IN. (6.350 MM) BETWEEN

HARNESS AND TUBE ASSEMBLY (7).
(5) Install harness (1), clamps (8), grommets (9), bolts (4, 5) and nuts (6) to clamp on
tube assembly (7). Torque nuts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.82 Nm).
NOTE: Include wiring harness clamps where shown.
72-01-60 Page 414

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Install harness leads and nuts (10, 11) at bracket (19). Torque nut (10) 25 to
30 lb.in. (2.83-3.39 Nm) and nut (11) 20 to 25 lb.in. (2.26-2.83 Nm).
NOTE: 1. Include wiring harness leads where shown.
NOTE: 2. Include T6 thermocouple rear electrical cable at nuts (10, 11).
11. NH Speed Sensor Probes (No. 1 and 2) (Ref. Fig. 405)
A. Removal

from connectors.
(2) Disconnect electrical harness plugs P5, P14 (Ref. 72-01-10, REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION).
(3) Remove bolts (3), probes (1, 2) and packings (4). Discard packings.
B. Installation
NOTE: Before connecting plugs, install harness sleeves (PWC05-273) over plugs. The
use of sleeves is optional.
(1) Lubricate packings (4) and install on probes (1, 2).
(2) Install probes and bolts (3). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).

CONNECTORS.

follows:

NECESSARY, DRY, USING A HEAT GUN.
(5) Install harness electrical connectors P5, P14. Torque connector coupling nut by
hand until witness band(s) on mating receptacle is/are covered. It is recommended
connector coupling nuts are further torqued using one of the following methods:

72-01-60 Page 415

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 8 9 8 9
4
1 4
8 9
6
8 9 6
6 7
4
4 6
4
12
8 9
2
13
10 11 19
5
8 9
6
P24 15 14
8 9 16 17 18 3
6
C63342B
T6 Thermocouple Trim Harness - Removal/Installation
Figure 404
72-01-60 Page 416

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 404
1. T6 Harness
2. Nut
3. Bolt
4. Bolt
5. Bolt
6. Nut
7. Tube Assembly
8. Clamp
9. Grommet
10. Nut
11. Nut
12. Thermocouple
13. Packing
14. Nut
15. Nut
16. Nut
17. Resistor
18. Terminal Block
19. Bracket
1 Using mini-strap wrench (PWC58104) or (Glenair TG70), apply

reasonable force to ensure connector coupling nut is firmly tightened and
metal-to-metal bottoming of connector is achieved.

(6) Use of insulating tape (PWC05-105) to wrap the connector joints is optional (Ref.
Fig. 406).
(7) If installed, use a heat gun to heat shrink harness sleeves over plugs. Connector
72-01-60 Page 417

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P5
4
P14
C14721B
NH Speed Sensor Probes (No. 1 and 2) - Removal/Installation
Figure 405
72-01-60 Page 418

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 405
1. Probe
2. Probe
3. Bolt
4. Packing
12. No. 1 and 2 Torque Monitor Sensors (Ref. Fig. 407)
A. Removal

from connectors.
(2) Disconnect electrical harness plug P7 and airframe harness (Ref. AMM).
(3) Remove electrical harness clamps at brackets (4).
(4) Remove bolts (2), brackets (4), sensor (1) and packing (3). Discard packing.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (3) with oil (PWC03-001) and install on sensor (1).
(2) Install sensor, brackets (4) and bolts (2). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lb.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).

HANDLING CONNECTORS.

follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TORQUE WRENCH OR PLIERS TO TIGHTEN P7

CONNECTION.
(5) Install connector and rotate it by hand 1/4 turn clockwise until a click is heard which
indicates the connector is in the locked position. Do not use a torque wrench or
pliers to apply torque.
72-01-60 Page 419

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAPE / SLEEVE
COVERAGE ZONE
0.500 IN.
MIN.
(12.7 mm)
TYPICAL VIEW OF STRAIGHT CONNECTOR
0.250 IN.
MIN.
(6.35 mm)
TAPE / SLEEVE
COVERAGE ZONE
TYPICAL VIEW OF 90 DEGREE CONNECTOR
C26248A
Protective Tape/Heat ShrinK - Installation Zone
72-01-60 Page 420

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAPE / SLEEVE
0.500 IN. COVERAGE ZONE
(12.7 mm)
MIN.
0.250 IN. MIN.

(6.35 mm)
C62304A
Protective Tape/Heat ShrinK - Installation Zone
72-01-60 Page 421

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
1
3
P7
1 3
4
4
2
C17745A
No. 1 and 2 Torque Monitor Sensors - Removal/Installation
Figure 407
72-01-60 Page 422

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 407
1. Sensor
2. Bolts
3. Packing
4. Bracket
(6) Use of insulating tape (PWC05-105) to wrap the connector joints is optional (Ref. Fig.
406).
13. T1.8 Sensor (Ref. Fig. 408)
A. Removal

from connectors.
(2) Disconnect electrical harness plug P4.
(3) Remove sensor (1) and gasket (2). Discard gasket.
B. Installation
(1) Install gasket (2) and sensor (1). Torque sensor 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm) and
secure with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).

CONNECTORS.

follows:
72-01-60 Page 423

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P4
1 2
C14761B
T1.8 Sensor - Removal/Installation
Figure 408
72-01-60 Page 424

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 408
1. Sensor
2. Gasket

(4) Install harness electrical connector P4. Torque connector coupling nut by hand until
witness band(s) on mating receptacle is/are covered. It is recommended connector
coupling nuts are further torqued using one of the following methods:



Fig. 406).
14. NP Speed Sensor Probe (Ref. Fig. 409)
A. Removal

from connectors.
(2) Disconnect electrical harness plug P9 from sensor probe (1).
(3) Remove nuts (2), sensor probe (1) and packing (3). Discard packing.
72-01-60 Page 425

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P9
C14755B
NP Speed Sensor Probe - Removal/Installation
Figure 409
72-01-60 Page 426

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 409
1. Probe
2. Nut
3. Packing
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate packing (3) with engine oil (PWC03-001) and install on sensor probe (1).
(2) Install sensor probe and nuts (2). Torque nuts 32 to 36 lb.in. (3.62-4.07 Nm).

CONNECTORS.

follows:

(5) Install harness electrical connector plug P9. Torque connector coupling nut by hand
until witness band(s) on mating receptacle is/are covered. It is recommended



72-01-60 Page 427

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fig. 406).
15. Low and Main Oil Pressure Sensors (Ref. Fig. 410)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect wiring harness connectors.
(2) As required, remove associated tube assemblies (Ref. 72-01-50).
(3) Remove bolts (1), clamps (2) and low oil pressure sensor (3). Remove clamps (2)
from sensor.
(4) Remove bolts (4), clamps (5) and main oil pressure sensor (6). Remove clamps (5)
from sensor.
B. Installation
(1) Install clamps (5) on sensor (6).
(2) Install bolts (4), clamps and main oil pressure sensor (6). Torque bolts 36 to
40 lbf.in. (4.07-4.52 Nm).
(3) Install clamps (2) on sensor (3).
(4) Install bolts (1), clamps and low oil pressure sensor (3). Torque bolts 36 to 40 lbf.in.
(4.07-4.52 Nm).
(5) As required, install associated tube assemblies (Ref. 72-01-50).
(6) Install wiring harness connectors (Ref. 72-01-10).
16. Fuel Temperature Sensor (Ref. Fig. 411)
A. Removal

from connectors.
(3) Remove sensor (1) and packing (2). Discard packing.
72-01-60 Page 428

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(2) Install sensor (1) and torque to 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm).
(3) Secure sensor with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).

CONNECTORS.

follows:




Fig. 406).
72-01-60 Page 429

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 1
C69185A
Low and Main Oil Pressure Sensors - Removal
Figure 410
72-01-60 Page 430

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 410
1. Bolt
2. Clamp
3. Low Oil Pressure Sensor
4. Bolt
5. Clamp
6. Main Oil Pressure Sensor
17. Oil Temperature Sensor (Ref. Fig. 412)
A. Removal

from connectors.
(3) Remove sensor (1) and packing (2). Discard packing.
B. Installation
(2) Install sensor (1) and torque to 65 to 75 lb.in. (7.35-8.48 Nm).
(3) Secure sensor with lockwire (PWC05-089) or (PWC05-295).

CONNECTORS.

follows:
72-01-60 Page 431

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P37
1
2
C79519
Fuel Temperature Sensor - Removal/Installation
Figure 411
72-01-60 Page 432

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 411
1. Sensor
2. Packing




Fig. 406).
72-01-60 Page 433

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
1
P32
D
FW
C79520
Oil Temperature Sensor - Removal/Installation
Figure 412
72-01-60 Page 434

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 412
1. Sensor
2. Packing
72-01-60 Page 435/436

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General

components of the engine performance indicating system.
Not Applicable
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
5. Inspection
A. Procedure
(1) Inspect for obvious defects. Replace defective parts for which no repair is given.
6. Check
A. Temperature Sensing System (Ref. Fig. 601)
NOTE: 1. Thermocouples are connected in parallel and, if defective, have a very small
effect on the total system resistance value. Therefore, they must be checked
individually (Ref. step (3)) irrespective of the results of Check 1.
NOTE: 2. Replace any component found not within limits, then carry out Check 1 again
to verify T6 system.
(1) Check 1 (T6 system, untrimmed)
NOTE: 1. Check 1 verifies T6 system (not including trim resistor (10)). If Check 1
values are not within limits, carry out Checks 2 thru 6 to isolate faulty
component and then carry out Check 7.
NOTE: 2. If Check 1 values are within limits, carry out Checks 3 and 7.
(a) Disconnect wiring harness leads (5) and resistor (10) as follows:
72-01-60 Page 601

PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK Mar 11/2005
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A FLANGE C
13
C
12
B
D
11
STUD IDENTIFICATION
AT TERMINAL BLOCK
7 13
8 9
10
INSTALLATION AT FLANGE C
FLANGE K
6
4
1 3
14
2
INSTALLATION AT FLANGE K
C80382
T6 Thermocouple Trim Electrical Cable - T6 Check
Figure 601
72-01-60 Page 602

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 601
1. Nut
2. Nut
3. T6 Leads
4 Rear Cable Leads
5. Airframe Leads
6. Terminal Block
7. Nut
8. Nut
9. Nut
10. Resistor
13. Terminal Block
14. Instrumentation Wiring Harness Lead
1 At terminal block (6), remove nuts (1, 2) and disconnect wiring harness leads
(5). Reinstall nuts (1, 2). Torque nut (1) 20 to 25 lb.in. (2.26-2.83 Nm) and
nut (2) 25 to 30 lb.in. (2.83-3.39 Nm).
2 At terminal block (13), remove nuts (7, 8) and resistor (10). Reinstall
thermocouple lead (11) and nuts. Torque nuts 25 to 30 lb.in. (2.83-3.39 Nm).
(b) Check continuity resistance as follows:
NOTE: Before using a test set or ohmmeter to measure electrical resistance,

connect test leads together and record reading. If meter does not read
zero ohms, either, subtract this reading from measured resistance
of component being tested, or adjust meter to read zero ohms.
1 Connect test leads studs identified A and B to the harness leads and
record resistance value.
2 Switch test leads to opposite studs to reverse polarity (lead installed to A,

install on B and lead installed on B, install on A). Record resistance value.
3 Add the two recorded values together and divide by two to find the correct
resistance. Continuity resistance between studs identified as A and B must
be 9.19 to 11.40 ohms.
NOTE: The two readings must be taken in quick succession so that the
temperature will be constant.
(c) Check insulation resistance as follows:
72-01-60 Page 603

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Insulation resistance from each stud (A and B) to casing must be 0.2

megohm minimum at 45 volts DC or AC.
NOTE: When the insulation resistance is between 0.2 and 0.5 megohm, it
is recommended to visually inspect the T6 system for contamination
and to clean the terminals as necessary.
(2) Check 2 (bus-bars, immersion thermocouples)
NOTE: 1. If Check 2 values are not within limits, carry out Checks 3 and 4.
NOTE: 2. If Check 2 values are within limits, carry out Checks 5 and 6.
(a) At terminal block (6), remove nuts (1, 2), disconnect wiring instrumentation
leads (14) and disconnect T6 cable leads (3). Reinstall nuts (1, 2). Torque
nut (1) 20 to 25 lb.in. (2.26-2.83 Nm) and nut (2) 25 to 30 lb.in. (2.83-3.39 Nm).
(b) Check continuity and insulation resistance using test set.
1 Continuity resistance between studs on terminal block (6) must be 7.87 to

8.80 ohms.
2 Insulation resistance between each stud to casing must be 2 megohms

minimum at 45 volts AC or DC.
(c) Check bus-bars and support brackets for obvious defects such as cracks,
sharp bends and nicks.
(3) Check 3 (thermocouples)
(a) After a T6 thermocouple failure (maximum 1 thermocouple), engines can

continue in service for a maximum of 150 flight hours for scheduling purposes
only, providing that:
1 The immediate effect of the thermocouple failure did not reduce the ITT
(T6) on ECTM. This ensures the indicated temperature is equal to or
higher than the ITT prior to the thermocouple failure.
2 The failed thermocouple leads (both chromel and alumel) are disconnected
from the bus-bar and completely cut off before the engine is returned to
service.
(b) Disconnect thermocouples from bus-bars (Ref. Removal/Installation).
(c) Check continuity and insulation resistance as follows:
NOTE: Before using a test set or ohmmeter to measure electrical resistance,

connect test leads together and record reading. If meter does not read
zero ohms, either: subtract this reading from measured resistance
of component being tested or adjust meter to read zero ohms.
1 Check continuity as follows:
72-01-60 Page 604

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
a The engine temperature is the same as the outside air temperature

(OAT).
The continuity resistance ‘‘terminal to terminal’’ must be 0.4 to 1.4

ohms.
b The engine temperature is higher than the outside air temperature

(OAT).
Connect the test leads to the thermocouple leads and record the
resistance value.
Connect the test leads to the opposite leads of the thermocouple to

change the polarity and write the resistance value.
NOTE: The two readings must be taken in quick succession so that

the thermocouple temperature will be constant.
Add the two recorded values together and divide by two to find the
actual resistance. The resistance must be between 0.4 and 1.4 ohms.
NOTE: If the thermocouples are too hot (ITT higher than 150°C
(302°F), the results will not be accurate. Allow the engine to
cool down.
2 Check insulation resistance ‘‘terminal to casing’’ as follows:
a Connect one terminal on each probe to a test set in turn. Connect the
other test set lead to the Turbine Support Case. Resistance must be 2
megohms minimum at 45 volts AC or DC.
b If insulation test is unsatisfactory, remove thermocouple from engine

and bake thermocouple at 93°C (200°F) to dry out possible moisture.
c Perform Check 4 (Ref. Para. A., step (4)) and repeat step a, above.
(4) Check 4 Thermocouple (Heat Response Check)
(a) Remove the thermocouples (Ref. Removal/Installation).
(b) Connect the thermocouples to a test set in turn. Use the same polarity each
time.
CAUTION: DO NOT HEAT THE THERMOCOUPLE MORE THAN 538 °C (1000

°F).
(c) Apply heat to the thermocouple and make sure the voltage is produced in the
same direction for each thermocouple.
(d) Reinstall thermocouples (Ref. Removal/Installation).
72-01-60 Page 605

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Check 5 (harness)
NOTE: For further information refer to CMM P/N 3041327 (77-20-05).
(a) Remove nut (8, 9), disconnect thermocouple leads (12) at stud C and install a
slave lead between studs C and B (terminal block (13)). Reinstall nuts and
torque nut (8) 25 to 30 lb.in. (2.83-3.39 Nm) and nut (9) 20 to 25 lb.in.
(2.26-2.83 Nm).
NOTE: Slave lead resistance to be less than 0.05 ohm.
(b) Check continuity and insulation resistance using test set:
1 Disconnect harness leads (3) from terminal block at Flange K. Continuity

resistance between harness terminals must be 1.8 to 2.3 ohms.
2 Insulation resistance between each stud identified as C or D and casing

must be 2.0 megohms minimum at 45 volts AC or DC.
(6) Check 6 ( oil immersed thermocouple)
(a) Remove nut (7) and disconnect thermocouple lead (11).
(b) Check continuity and insulation resistance, using test set:
1 Continuity resistance between terminals must be 0.20 to 0.35 ohms.
2 Insulation resistance between each terminal and casing must be 2 megohms

minimum at 45 volts AC or DC.
(7) Check 7 (trim resistor)
(a) Continuity resistance using ohmmeter or test set as per Table 601 and 602.
TABLE 601, Continuity Resistance

RESISTANCE VALUE
PART NO. RESISTOR CLASS (OHMS ± 2% AT 21°C (70°F))
ST3114-01 CL0 INFINITY
ST3114-02 CL5 500
ST3114-03 CL10 300
ST3114-04 CL15 200
ST3114-05 CL20 150
ST3114-06 CL25 125
ST3114-07 CL30 100
ST3114-08 CL35 85
ST3114-09 CL40 70
72-01-60 Page 606

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 601, Continuity Resistance (Cont’d)

RESISTANCE VALUE
ST3114-10 CL45 63
ST3114-11 CL50 55
ST3114-12 CL55 50
ST3114-13 CL60 45
ST3114-14 CL70 (see NOTE) 40
ST3114-15 CL80 (see NOTE) 35
ST3114-16 CL90 (see NOTE) 30
ST3114-17 CL100 (see NOTE) 25
ST3114-18 - 42
ST3114-19 - (see NOTE) 38
ST3114-20 - (see NOTE) 36
ST3114-21 - (see NOTE) 34
ST3114-22 - (see NOTE) 32
ST3114-23 - (see NOTE) 28
ST3114-24 - (see NOTE) 26
ST3114-25 - (see NOTE) 24
ST3114-26 - (see NOTE) 22
ST3114-27 - (see NOTE) 20
ST3114-28 - (see NOTE) 18
ST3114-29 - (see NOTE) 16
ST3114-30 147
ST3114-31 140
ST3114-32 137
ST3114-33 130
ST3114-34 121
ST3114-35 117
ST3114-36 110
ST3114-37 105
ST3114-38 95.3
ST3114-39 90.9
ST3114-40 80.6
72-01-60 Page 607

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 601, Continuity Resistance (Cont’d)

RESISTANCE VALUE
ST3114-41 75
ST3114-42 66.5
ST3114-43 59
NOTE: Use test set to check continuity of these resistors.
TABLE 602, Continuity Resistance - Optional Parts

CONTROL RESISTANCE
NO. CLASS IN OHMS AT 21°C (70°F) OPTIONAL PARTS
ST3152-01 0 20 megohms - Infinity ST3144-01 OR ST3151-01
ST3152-02 5 73.50 - 76.50 (see NOTE) ST3144-02 OR ST3151-02
NOTE: Use test set to check continuity of these resistors.
(8) Install removed components (Ref. Removal/Installation and AMM) and carry out
Check 1 to confirm T6 system functions correctly.
72-01-60 Page 608

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. NL Speed Sensor Probe

(1) Continuity resistance using ohmmeter:
(a) From pins 1 to 2, 5.0 to 10.0 ohms.
(b) From pin 3 to ground, 0.1 ohm maximum.
(2) Insulation resistance using test set:
(a) From pin 1 to body, 2 megohms minimum at 45 volts AC or DC.
(b) From pin 2 to body, 2 megohms minimum at 45 volts AC or DC.
C. Torque Sensors
(1) Check continuity using ohmmeter.
(a) P/N 3116499-02
1 Pin A to pin B resistance: 557 to 589 ohms.
2 Pin C to pin D resistance: 612 to 664 ohms.
3 Pin G to pin E, pin G to pin F resistance: 108 ohms at 20°C (68°F).
(2) Check insulation resistance using test set:
(a) Resistance between any pin (except pin H) and ground must be 2 megohms
minimum at 45 volts DC or AC.
(b) Pin A to pin C resistance: 2 megohms minimum at 45 volts DC or AC.
D. T1.8 Sensor

(1) Continuity using ohmmeter: resistance from pins 1 to 3 to be as shown in Table
603.
TABLE 603, TEMPERATURE vs. RESISTANCE

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (ohms)
-40°C (-40°F) 84.10 ± 0.35
-29°C (-20°F) 88.53 ± 0.28
-18°C (0°F) 92.96 ± 0.22
72-01-60 Page 609

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE 603, TEMPERATURE vs. RESISTANCE (Cont’d)

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (ohms)
-6.66°C (20°F) 97.36 ± 0.21
0°C (32°F) 100.00 ± 0.20
4.44°C (40°F) 101.75 ± 0.20
15.55°C (60°F) 106.12 ± 0.21
26.66°C (80°F) 110.47 ± 0.22
37.77°C (100°F) 114.83 ± 0.23
48.88°C (120°F) 119.15 ± 0.27
60°C (140°F) 123.47 ± 0.31
71.11°C (160°F) 127.77 ± 0.35
82.22°C (180°F) 132.05 ± 0.39
93.33°C (200°F) 136.34 ± 0.44
100°C (212°F) 138.90 ± 0.50
(2) Continuity using ohmmeter: resistance from pins 1 to 2, 0.5 ohm maximum; from
pin 4 to body, 0.5 ohm maximum.
(3) Insulation resistance using test set: resistance from pins 1 and 3 together to
housing, not less than 2 megohms at 45 volts DC or AC.
E. Speed Sensor Probes (NH or NP)

(1) Check continuity resistance using ohmmeter.
(a) Coil 2: between pins 1 and 2, 72 to 88 ohms.
(b) Coil 1: between pins 3 and 4, 36 to 45 ohms.
(2) Check insulation resistance using test set.
(a) Between pins 1 and 2 together and body, 2 megohms minimum at 45 volts AC
or DC.
(b) Between pins 3 and 4 together and body, 2 megohms minimum at 45 volts AC
or DC.
72-01-60 Page 610

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Main Pressure Oil Sensor

(1) Check input and output resistance with a digital multimeter:
NOTE: The maximum excitation current at 10,000 VDC shall be 10 milliamps.

This is equivalent to a minimum input resistance of 1000 ohms. The output
resistance shall be a maximum of 2000 ohms (1500 nominal).
(a) Pin A to pin B resistance (Input): _________ ohms. Limit: ≥ 1000 ohms
(b) Pin C to pin D resistance (Output): __________ ohms. Limit: ≤ 2000 ohms
(2) Check insulation resistance with a megohmmeter:
NOTE: The minimum insulation resistance between all circuit points tied together
and the case shall be 40 megohms at 500 VDC.
(a) Set the megohmmeter test voltage to 500 VDC.
(b) Using the internal calibration feature of the megohmmeter, check the ‘‘short’’
and ‘‘open’’ circuit settings. Adjust if required.
(c) Tie the four pins together, and connect to the negative terminal of the
megohmmeter. Connect the positive terminal to the case.
(d) Apply the 500 VDC test voltage for two minutes, +10/-0 seconds. Verify that
the insulation resistance equals or exceeds 40 megohms.
NOTE: If the reading exceeds 40 megohms before the two minutes delay has
ended, and it is steady or increasing, then the test can be terminated
at that point. Record the value.
G. Fuel and Oil Temperature Sensor
(1) Check insulation resistance with a DC megohmmeter:
(a) Set the megohmmeter to 500 VDC.
(b) Tie the connector pins together, and connect to one test lead of the
megohmmeter. Connect the other test lead to the housing.
(c) Do the measurement: The insulation resistance value shall be greater than 40
megohms.
72-01-60 Page 611

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Low Pressure Oil Switch
(1) Check insulation resistance with a megohmmeter:
NOTE: The minimum insulation resistance between all circuit points tied together
and the case shall be 40 megohms at 500 VDC.
(a) Set the megohmmeter test voltage to 500 VDC.
(b) Using the internal calibration feature of the megohmmeter, check the ‘‘short’’
and ‘‘open’’ circuit settings. Adjust if required.
(c) Tie the six pins together and connect to the negative terminal. Connect the
positive terminal to the case.
(d) Apply the 500 VDC test voltage for two minutes, +10/-0 seconds. Verify that
the insulation resistance equals or exceeds 40 megohms.
NOTE: If the reading exceeds 40 megohms before the two minutes delay has
ended, and it is steady or increasing, then the test can be terminated
at that point. Record the value.
72-01-60 Page 612

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING
1. General

Item No. Name
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Brush, Brass wire
5. Cleaning
A. General

(1) With the exception of items specifically mentioned, clean parts with petroleum
solvent (PWC11-027) or cleaner (PWC11-031).
NOTE: Tergit (PWC11-031) is recommended to be used as an alternative to

petroleum solvent when the use of this product is restricted by local
B. Thermocouple Wiring Harness
(1) Clean terminal lugs using abrasive cloth (PWC05-101).
72-01-60 Page 701

PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. T6 Thermocouple
(1) Clean probes using fine brass wire brush.
(2) Clean contact surfaces at terminal posts with abrasive cloth (PWC05-101).
72-01-60 Page 702

PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS
1. General

Item No. Name
PWC05-066 Insulating Tape
PWC05-110 Lockwire
3. Special Tools
Not Applicable
Name
Dies
Swiss Files
5. Thermocouple Wiring Harness (Ref. Fig. 801)
A. Procedure
(1) Cut off all loose strands of braiding around damaged area.
(2) Wrap insulating tape (PWC05-066) around harness covering all of the damaged
area as shown.
(3) Wrap repaired area with lockwire (PWC05-110) or (PWC05-294) as shown. Hold
wrapping wire snugly along length of harness braid beginning from the left.
Starting at opposite end, wrap wire tightly and uniformly over harness braid and
repaired area.
NOTE: Ensure that wire overlaps tape and contacts harness braid at each end of
repair.
72-01-60 Page 801

PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS Sep 03/99
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSULATING TAPE
B X
1/3 X
C
C4960C
Harness Braid Repair
Figure 801
72-01-60 Page 802

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) When approximately two-thirds of wrapping length is completed, allow short end of
loop to remain exposed. Continue wrapping wire to complete remaining distance,
shown as 1/3X.
(5) After final turn of wrapping, insert wire A through loop as shown. Cut off surplus
end B of wire so that length is approximately one-third of repair length. Pull loop
end C until wire at A is snug and end B of wire has just disappeared underneath final
turn of wrappings. Then cut wire end C flush.
(6) Check continuity and insulation (Ref. Inspection/Check).
6. Thermocouple Harness Terminal Assembly (Ref. Fig. 802)
A. Procedure
(1) Removal
(a) Remove nuts (1, 5), washers (6, 7), bushing (2, 8), studs (3, 9) and pad (4).
(2) Installation
(a) Install pad (4), bushings (2, 8), studs (3, 9), washers (6, 7) and nuts (1, 5).
Torque nut (1) 25 to 30 lb.in. (2.83-3.39 Nm) and nut (5) 20 to 25 lb.in.
(2.26-2.83 Nm).
7. T1.8 Sensor
A. Procedure
(1) Chase defective threads using swiss files or appropriate die.
72-01-60 Page 803

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7
8
9
2
4
C70256
Thermocouple Harness Terminal Repair
Figure 802
72-01-60 Page 804

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Key to Figure 802
1. Nut
2. Bushing
3. Stud
4. Pad
5. Nut
6. Washer
7. Washer
8. Bushing
9. Stud
72-01-60 Page 805/806


PW 127H Maintenance Manual Chapter 72 01 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PW 127H Maintenance Manual Chapter 72 01 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

72-01-60 601 Mar 11/2005

72-01-60 701 Sep 03/99

EXTERNALS AND ACCESSORIES - INTRODUCTION 72-01-00

4. Fixtures, Equipment and Supplier Tools 402

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-01-10

4. Fixtures, Equipment and Supplier Tools 601

IGNITION SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-01-20

IGNITION SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-01-20

2. Consumable Materials 601

IGNITION SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS (Cont’d) 72-01-20

3. Special Tools 801

AIR SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-30

9. Switching Valve-to-rear Inlet Case Sealing Air Tube 407

AIR SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 72-01-30

A. Servo Valve Torque Motor 501

AIR SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING (Cont’d) 72-01-30

B. Intercompressor Bleed Valve Servo Valve Screen 702

FUEL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-01-40

FUEL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-40

B. Motive Flow Pressure Fuel Tube Assembly 437

2. Consumable Materials 601

FUEL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-01-40

C. Fuel Heater Filter 605

FUEL SYSTEM - CLEANING/PAINTING (Cont’d) 72-01-40

OIL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 72-01-50

OIL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-50

11. Oil Cooler and Heat Exchange Adapters 421

OIL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Cont’d) 72-01-50

17. Oil Level Indicator 451

OIL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 72-01-50

A. Oil System Components and Lines - Leak Check 501

OIL SYSTEM - INSPECTION/CHECK (Cont’d) 72-01-50

L. Debris originating from the Reduction Gearbox Module 616

OIL SYSTEM - APPROVED REPAIRS (Cont’d) 72-01-50

3. Special Tools 801

D. Housings and Cover Plates 802

PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM -

8. NL Speed Sensor Probe 409

PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM -

16. Fuel Temperature Sensor 428

C. Torque Sensors 609

PERFORMANCE INDICATING SYSTEM -

2. Consumable Materials 701

7. T1.8 Sensor 803

EXTERNALS AND ACCESSORIES - INTRODUCTION

72-01-00 Page 1/2

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A. These instructions provide information necessary for replacement of components of the

B. Refer to 72-00-00, MAINTENANCE PRACTICES, for installation of elbows and tees.

C. Lubricate packings with engine oil (PWC03-001), unless otherwise stated.

D. Use 1 ml of alcohol (PWC11-014) with 15 ml of electrical contact enhancer (PWC05-256)

WARNING: WEAR GOGGLES WHEN REMOVING/INSTALLING LOCKWIRE.

72-01-10 Page 401

Item No. Name

Special tools are identified in procedural text by part number in parentheses.